USRE49967E1 - Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase - Google Patents

Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase Download PDF

Info

Publication number
USRE49967E1
USRE49967E1 US17/332,776 US202117332776A USRE49967E US RE49967 E1 USRE49967 E1 US RE49967E1 US 202117332776 A US202117332776 A US 202117332776A US RE49967 E USRE49967 E US RE49967E
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
hyaluronidase
administered
composition
soluble
administration
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
US17/332,776
Inventor
Richard Schiff
Heinz Leibl
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Takeda Pharmaceutical Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Takeda Pharmaceutical Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=40940524&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=USRE49967(E1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Takeda Pharmaceutical Co Ltd filed Critical Takeda Pharmaceutical Co Ltd
Priority to US17/332,776 priority Critical patent/USRE49967E1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of USRE49967E1 publication Critical patent/USRE49967E1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/06—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies from serum
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2300/00—Mixtures or combinations of active ingredients, wherein at least one active ingredient is fully defined in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/43—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/46—Hydrolases (3)
    • A61K38/47—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2), e.g. cellulases, lactases
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A61K39/39516—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum from serum, plasma
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/10—Antimycotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/04—Immunostimulants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02—Antidotes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/04—Antihaemorrhagics; Procoagulants; Haemostatic agents; Antifibrinolytic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/06—Antianaemics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/14—Hydrolases (3)
    • C12N9/24—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2)
    • C12N9/2402—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2) hydrolysing O- and S- glycosyl compounds (3.2.1)
    • C12N9/2405—Glucanases
    • C12N9/2408—Glucanases acting on alpha -1,4-glucosidic bonds
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/14—Hydrolases (3)
    • C12N9/24—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2)
    • C12N9/2402—Hydrolases (3) acting on glycosyl compounds (3.2) hydrolysing O- and S- glycosyl compounds (3.2.1)
    • C12N9/2474—Hyaluronoglucosaminidase (3.2.1.35), i.e. hyaluronidase
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Y—ENZYMES
    • C12Y302/00—Hydrolases acting on glycosyl compounds, i.e. glycosylases (3.2)
    • C12Y302/01—Glycosidases, i.e. enzymes hydrolysing O- and S-glycosyl compounds (3.2.1)
    • C12Y302/01035—Hyaluronoglucosaminidase (3.2.1.35), i.e. hyaluronidase
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/505—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising antibodies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/54—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the route of administration
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/545—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies characterised by the dose, timing or administration schedule
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/20—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin
    • C07K2317/21—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin from primates, e.g. man
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30—Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • compositions and kits containing an immune globulin (IG) composition and a soluble hyaluronidase composition formulated for subcutaneous administration.
  • IG immune globulin
  • Such products can be used in methods of treating IG-treatable diseases or conditions.
  • methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin whereby the dosing regimen is substantially the same as for intravenous administration of the same dosage for treatment of the same IG-treatable disease or condition.
  • IVIG immune globulin
  • WIG immune globulin
  • Subcutaneous (SQ) administration of immune globulin is an alternative to intravenous administration.
  • SQ administration of immune globulin has several advantages. For example, it reduces the incidence of systemic reactions, does not require sometimes-difficult IV access, improves trough levels, and gives patients more independence. Because of the difficulty in administering large quantities of fluid in a single site, it is necessary to do SQ infusions once or twice a week, using two to as many as 5 sites at a time. Thus, unlike WIG, which is given once a month, subcutaneous administration is usually done weekly. Hence, there is a need for alternative methods for administering immune globulin.
  • IG-treatable diseases or conditions Provided herein are methods, compositions, combinations and kits for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and for treating IG-treatable diseases or conditions.
  • methods for treating an IG-treatable disease or condition in a subject by subcutaneously administering to the subject soluble hyaluronidase and an immune globulin (IG) for treating the disease or condition.
  • IG immune globulin
  • Co-administration of IG and hyaluronidase increases the bioavailability of subcutaneously administered IG to permit administration of IG subcutaneously using a dosing regime substantially the same as intravenous IG (IVIG) administration for the particular disease or condition.
  • the administration of the IG is effected such that the amount administered and frequency of administration is substantially the same as for IV (intravenous) administration of the same amount via IV for the same disease or condition.
  • the amount administered via IV can be predetermined or is known for a particular disease or condition.
  • the rate of administration can be greater than for IV administration.
  • Rate of administration can be controlled, such as by a pump, or can rely on gravity.
  • IG-treatable disease or condition in a subject in need of such treatment by subcutaneously administering to the subject a soluble hyaluronidase and an amount of immune globulin (IG) effective for treating the disease or condition.
  • the administration is performed with a dosage regimen in which: (a) a quantity of IG; and (b) a dosing frequency for successive administrations of IG to the subject are selected such that the therapeutic effect of the subcutaneous IG administration upon the subject is at least substantially equivalent to intravenous administration of the IG to the subject using the same dosing regimen.
  • bioavailability of the subcutaneously administered IG is at least about 90% of the bioavailability of the same dosage administered via IV administration.
  • the amount of soluble hyaluronidase administered can be sufficient to effect subcutaneous administration of the IG at a dosage administered no more than once a month. In other examples, administration of IG is no more than once monthly.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase used in the methods and uses provided herein can be PH20 or a truncated form thereof.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can an ovine or bovine or truncated human PH20.
  • the truncated human PH20 can be selected from among polypeptides having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase is rHuPH20.
  • the IG administered using the methods and uses herein can be purified from human plasma, such as by alcohol fractionation.
  • the IG is further purified by any one or more of a chemical modification, incubation at pH 4.0 with or without pepsin, polyethylene glycol (PEG) precipitation, ion-exchange chromatography, enzymatic cleavage, solvent detergent treatment, diafiltration or ultrafiltration.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • the methods and uses provided herein can employ IG that contains IgG, IgA and IgM. In some examples, the IG contains greater than 95% IgG. Further, the IgG can be monomeric.
  • Protein-stabilizing excipients such as one or more of glycine, maltose, a polyol, human serum albumin, mannitol, and non-ionic detergent, also can be present in the IG.
  • the pH of the IG preparation is at or about 4.2 to 5.4, 4.6 to 5.1 or 4.8 to 5.0, and the protein concentration is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition.
  • the protein concentration of the 1G is 10% w/v.
  • soluble hyaluronidase and an immune globulin (IG) for treating the disease or condition are subcutaneously administered, and the IG is infused at a rate of 10 ml/hr to 300 ml/hr, such as at or about 10 ml/hr, 20 ml/hr, 30 ml/hr, 40 ml/hr, 50 ml/hr, 60 ml/hr, 70 ml/hr, 80 ml/hr, 90 ml/hr, 100 ml/hr, 150 ml/hr, 200 ml/hr, 250 ml/hr and 300 ml/hr.
  • IG immune globulin
  • the rate can be controlled by a pump or gravity.
  • the IG and hyaluronidase are administered separately, simultaneously or intermittently.
  • the hyaluronidase can be administered prior to administration of IG, such as 0.5 minutes, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes or 30 minutes prior to administration of IG.
  • the IG and hyaluronidase are in a single composition.
  • Soluble hyaluronidase and IG can be administered using the methods and uses provided herein to treat, for example, immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Wohmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic immunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome (including autoimmune haemolytic anaemia with
  • the immunodeficiency can be selected from among common variable immunodeficiency (CVID), congenital agammaglobulinemia, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), primary hypogammaglobulinemia, primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency, X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy, and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies.
  • CVID common variable immunodeficiency
  • congenital agammaglobulinemia Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome
  • SCID severe combined immunodeficiency
  • primary hypogammaglobulinemia primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency
  • XLA X-linked agammaglobulinemia
  • hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies.
  • the IG-treatable disease or condition is acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies
  • the hematological malignancy can be chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM) or non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL).
  • CLL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • MM multiple myeloma
  • NHS non-Hodgkin's lymphoma
  • the inflammatory myopathy can be polymyositis, dermatomyositis or inclusion body myositis.
  • soluble hyaluronidase and IG is administered subcutaneously to treat a bacteria, viral or fungal condition, such as, for example, Haemophilus influenzae type B, Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae types 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, and 23, Adenovirus types 2 and 5, Cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus VCA, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Herpes simplex virus-1, Herpes simplex virus-2, Influenza A, Measles, Parainfluenza types 1, 2 and 3, Polio, Varicella zoster virus, Apergillus and Candida albicans.
  • a bacteria, viral or fungal condition such as, for example, Haemophilus influenzae type B, Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus au
  • compositions containing a first composition containing IG formulated for subcutaneous single dosage administration no more than once per month, and a second composition containing a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration no more than once per month.
  • the compositions can be in a dual chamber container or in single container separated from each other.
  • the hyaluronidase is positioned in the container to be administered before the IG.
  • the container can be a syringe, tube or bottle, and can further contain a needle for injection.
  • compositions provided herein can contain PH20, or a truncated form thereof.
  • ovine, bovine or truncated human PH20 such as a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof, can be included in the combinations of compositions provided herein.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase in the combination is rHuPH20.
  • the IG in the combinations of compositions can be purified from human plasma, and can be lyophilized or a liquid.
  • the volume of liquid in the combinations of compositions provided herein is or is about 100 ml, 150 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml or 700 ml.
  • the IG in the combinations of compositions can have a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v.
  • the IG in the composition is or is about 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g.
  • the hyaluronidase can be a liquid.
  • the volume of the hyaluronidase liquid is or is about 1 ml, 2 ml, 3 ml, 4 ml, 5 ml, 6 ml, 7 ml, 8 ml, 9 ml, 10 ml, 20 ml or 30 ml, and the hyaluronidase is at or about 10 Units to 500,000 Units, 100 Units to 100,000 Units, 500 Units to 50,000 Units, 1000 Units to 10,000 Units, 5000 Units to 7500 Units, 5000 Units to 50,000 Units, or 1,000 Units to 10,000 Units.
  • compositions containing immune globulin (IG) and a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration once a month can be PH20, or a truncated form thereof.
  • ovine, bovine or tamcated human PH20 such as a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof, can be included in the compositions formulated for single dosage administration provided herein.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase in the composition is rHuPH20.
  • the IG in the compositions can be purified from human plasma, and can be a liquid.
  • the IG in the compositions formulated for single dosage administration provided herein has a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v.
  • the IG in the composition is or is about 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g, 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g, and the hyaluronidase is at or about 10 Units to 500,000 Units, 100 Units to 100,000 Units, 500 Units to 50,000 Units, 1000 Units to 10,000 Units, 5000 Units to 7500 Units, 5000 Units to 50,000 Units, or 1,000 Units to 10,000 Units.
  • the volume of liquid in the composition can be at or about 100 ml, 150 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml or 700 ml.
  • kits containing combinations of compositions, containing a first composition containing IG formulated for subcutaneous single dosage administration no more than once per month, and a second composition containing a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration no more than once per month. Also provided herein are compositions containing illumine globulin (IG) and a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration once a month.
  • IG illumine globulin
  • instructions can be included in the kits.
  • immunoglobulin refers to preparations of plasma proteins derived from the pooled plasma of adult donors. IgG antibodies predominate; other antibody subclasses, such as IgA and IgM are present. Therapeutic immune globulin can provide passive immunization by increasing a recipient's serum levels of circulating antibodies.
  • IgG antibodies can, for example, bind to and neutralize bacterial toxins; opsonize pathogens; activate complement; and suppress pathogenic cytokines and phagocytes through interaction with cytokines and receptors thereof, such as CD5, interleukin-1a (IL-1a), interleukin 6 (IL-6), tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha), and T-cell receptors.
  • Therapeutic immune globulin can inhibit the activity of autoantibodies.
  • Immune globulin preparations also include, but are not limited to, immune globulin intravenous (IGIV), immune globulin IV, therapeutic immunoglobulin.
  • Immune globulin preparation are well known, and include brand names, such as BayGam®, Gamimune® N, Gammagard® S/D, Gammar®-P, Iveegam® EN, Panglobulin®, Polygam® S/D, Sandoglobulin®, Venoglobulin®-I, Venoglobulin®-S, WinRho® SDF and others. Immune globulin preparations can be derived from human plasma, or are recombinantly produced.
  • IG-treatable diseases or conditions refer to any disease or condition for which immune globulin preparations are used.
  • diseases and conditions include, but are not limited to, any disease in which an increase in circulating antibodies is ameliorative, such as, for example, immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Woltmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic iinmunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic
  • dosing regime refers to the amount of immune globulin administered and the frequency of administration.
  • the dosing regime is a function of the disease or condition to be treated, and thus can vary.
  • IVIG intravenous IG
  • IG intravenous IG
  • Amounts of IVIG that are effective for treating a particular disease or condition are known or can be empirically determined by one of skill in the art. For example, as exemplified below, 300 mg/kg (i.e. 21 grams assuming the average adult weighs 70 kg) to 600 mg/kg (i.e. 42 grams) is the typical monthly dose of IVIG administered to patients having primary immunodeficiency diseases.
  • IG when administered in combination with hyaluronidase, is administered subcutaneously at doses that are or are about 300 mg/kg to 600 mg/kg for treatment of primary immunodeficiency diseases.
  • frequency of administration refers to the time between successive doses of immune globulin.
  • frequency can be one, two, three, four weeks, and is a function of the particular disease or condition treated.
  • frequency is a least every two or three weeks, and typically no more than once a month.
  • hyaluronidase refers to an enzyme that degrades hyaluronic acid.
  • Hyaluronidases include bacterial hyaluronidases (EC 4.2.99.1), hyaluronidases from leeches, other parasites, and crustaceans (EC 3.2.1.36), and mammalian-type hyaluronidases (EC 3.2.1.35).
  • Hyaluronidases also include any of non-human origin including, but not limited to, murine, canine, feline, leporine, avian, bovine, ovine, porcine, equine, piscine, ranine, bacterial, and any from leeches, other parasites, and crustaceans.
  • Exemplary non-human hyaluronidases include, hyaluronidases from cows (SEQ ID NO:10 and 11), yellow jacket wasp (SEQ ID NOS:12 and 13), honey bee (SEQ ID NO:14), white-face hornet (SEQ ID NO:15), paper wasp (SEQ ID NO:16), mouse (SEQ ID NOS:17-19, 32), pig (SEQ ID NOS:20-21), rat (SEQ ID NOS:22-24, 31), rabbit (SEQ ID NO:25), sheep (SEQ ID NO:26 and 27), orangutan (SEQ ID NO:28), cynomolgus monkey (SEQ ID NO:29), guinea pig (SEQ ID NO: 30), Staphylococcus aureus (SEQ ID NO:33), Streptococcus pyogenes (SEQ ID NO:34), and Clostridium perfringens (SEQ ID NO:35).
  • Hyaluronidases also include those of human origin.
  • Exemplary human hyaluronidases include HYAL1 (SEQ ID NO:36), HYAL2 (SEQ ID NO:37), HYAL3 (SEQ ID NO:38), HYAL4 (SEQ ID NO:39), and PH20 (SEQ ID NO:1).
  • Also included amongst hyaluronidases are soluble hyaluronidases, including, ovine and bovine PH20, soluble human PH20 and soluble rHuPH20.
  • Reference to hyaluronidases includes precursor hyaluronidase polypeptides and mature hyaluronidase polypeptides (such as those in which a signal sequence has been removed), truncated forms thereof that have activity, and includes allelic variants and species variants, variants encoded by splice variants, and other variants, including polypeptides that have at least 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more sequence identity to the precursor polypeptides set forth in SEQ ID NOS: 1 and 10-39, or the mature form thereof.
  • hyaluronidase also includes the human PH20 precursor polypeptide variants set forth in SEQ ID NOS:50-51.
  • Hyaluronidases also include those that contain chemical or posttranslational modifications and those that do not contain chemical or posttranslational modifications. Such modifications include, but are not limited to, pegylation, albumination, glycosylation, farnesylation, carboxylation, hydroxylation, phosphorylation, and other polypeptide modifications known in the art.
  • a soluble hyaluronidase refers to a polypeptide characterized by its solubility under physiologic conditions. Soluble hyaluronidases can be distinguished, for example, by its partitioning into the aqueous phase of a Triton X-114 solution warmed to 37° C. (Bordier et al., (1981) J. Biol. Chem., 256:1604-7). Membrane-anchored, such as lipid anchored hyaluronidases, will partition into the detergent rich phase, but will partition into the detergent-poor or aqueous phase following treatment with Phospholipase-C.
  • soluble hyaluronidases include membrane anchored hyaluronidases in which one or more regions associated with anchoring of the hyaluronidase to the membrane has been removed or modified, where the soluble form retains hyaluronidase activity.
  • Soluble hyaluronidases include recombinant soluble hyaluronidases and those contained in or purified from natural sources, such as, for example, testes extracts from sheep or cows. Exemplary of such soluble hyaluronidases are soluble human PH20.
  • Other soluble hyaluronidases include ovine (SEQ ID NO:27) and bovine (SEQ ID NO:11) PH20.
  • soluble human PH20 or sHuPH20 include mature polypeptides lacking all or a portion of the glycosylphospatidylinositol (GPI) attachment site at the C-tenninus such that upon expression, the polypeptides are soluble.
  • Exemplary sHuPH20 polypeptides include mature polypeptides having an amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NOS:4-9 and 47-48.
  • the precursor polypeptides for such exemplary sHuPH20 polypeptides include a signal sequence. Exemplary of the precursors are those set forth in SEQ ID NOS:3 and 40-46, each of which contains a 35 amino acid signal sequence at amino acid positions 1-35.
  • Soluble HuPH20 polypeptides also include those degraded during or after the production and purification methods described herein.
  • soluble recombinant human PH20 refers to a soluble fonn of human PH20 that is recombinantly expressed in Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells.
  • Soluble rHuPH20 is encoded by nucleic acid that includes the signal sequence and is set forth in SEQ ID NO:49. Also included are DNA molecules that are allelic variants thereof and other soluble variants.
  • the nucleic acid encoding soluble rHuPH20 is expressed in CHO cells which secrete the mature polypeptide. As produced in the culture medium there is heterogeneity at the C-terminus so that the product includes a mixture of species that can include any one or more of SEQ ID NOS: 4-9 in various abundance.
  • allelic variants and other variants also are included, including those corresponding to the precursor human PH20 polypeptides set forth in SEQ ID NOS:50-51.
  • Other variants can have 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more sequence identity with any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9 and 47-48 as long they retain a hyaluronidase activity and are soluble.
  • activity refers to a functional activity or activities of a polypeptide or portion thereof associated with a full-length (complete) protein.
  • Functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, catalytic or enzymatic activity, antigenicity (ability to bind or compete with a polypeptide for binding to an anti-polypeptide antibody), immunogenicity, ability to form multimers, and the ability to specifically bind to a receptor or ligand for the polypeptide.
  • hyaluronidase activity refers to the ability of hyaluronidase to cleave hyaluronic acid.
  • hyaluronidase activity refers to the ability of hyaluronidase to cleave hyaluronic acid.
  • hyaluronidases such as soluble rHuPH20
  • Exemplary assays include the microturbidity assay described below (see e.g. Example 3) that measures cleavage of hyaluronic acid by hyaluronidase indirectly by detecting the insoluble precipitate formed when the uncleaved is hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin.
  • residues of naturally occurring ⁇ -amino acids are the residues of those 20 ⁇ -amino acids found in nature which are incorporated into protein by the specific recognition of the charged tRNA molecule with its cognate mRNA codon in humans.
  • nucleic acids include DNA, RNA and analogs thereof, including peptide nucleic acids (PNA) and mixtures thereof. Nucleic acids can be single or double-stranded. When referring to probes or primers, which are optionally labeled, such as with a detectable label, such as a fluorescent or radiolabel, single-stranded molecules are contemplated. Such molecules are typically of a length such that their target is statistically unique or of low copy number (typically less than 5, generally less than 3) for probing or priming a library. Generally a probe or primer contains at least 14, 16 or 30 contiguous nucleotides of sequence complementary to or identical to a gene of interest. Probes and primers can be 10, 20, 30, 50, 100 or more nucleic acids long.
  • a peptide refers to a polypeptide that is from 2 to 40 amino acids in length.
  • amino acids which occur in the various sequences of amino acids provided herein are identified according to their known, three-letter or one-letter abbreviations (Table 1).
  • the nucleotides which occur in the various nucleic acid fragments are designated with the standard single-letter designations used routinely in the art.
  • amino acid is an organic compound containing an amino group and a carboxylic acid group.
  • a polypeptide contains two or more amino acids.
  • amino acids include the twenty naturally-occurring amino acids, non-natural amino acids and amino acid analogs (i.e., amino acids wherein the ⁇ -carbon has a side chain).
  • amino acid residue refers to an amino acid formed upon chemical digestion (hydrolysis) of a polypeptide at its peptide linkages.
  • the amino acid residues described herein are presumed to be in the “L” isomeric form. Residues in the “D” isomeric form, which are so designated, can be substituted for any L-amino acid residue as long as the desired functional property is retained by the polypeptide.
  • NH 2 refers to the free amino group present at the amino terminus of a polypeptide.
  • COOH refers to the free carboxy group present at the carboxyl terminus of a polypeptide.
  • amino acid residue sequences represented herein by formulae have a left to right orientation in the conventional direction of amino-terminus to carboxyl-terminus.
  • amino acid residue is broadly defined to include the amino acids listed in the Table of Correspondence (Table 1) and modified and unusual amino acids, such as those referred to in 37 C.F.R. ⁇ 1.821-1.822, and incorporated herein by reference.
  • a dash at the beginning or end of an amino acid residue sequence indicates a peptide bond to a further sequence of one or more amino acid residues, to an amino-terminal group such as NH 2 or to a carboxyl-terminal group such as COOH.
  • naturally occurring amino acids refer to the 20 L-amino acids that occur in polypeptides.
  • non-natural amino acid refers to an organic compound that has a structure similar to a natural amino acid but has been modified structurally to mimic the structure and reactivity of a natural amino acid.
  • Non-naturally occurring amino acids thus include, for example, amino acids or analogs of amino acids other than the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids and include, but are not limited to, the D-isostereomers of amino acids. Exemplary non-natural amino acids are described herein and are known to those of skill in the art.
  • DNA construct is a single or double stranded, linear or circular DNA molecule that contains segments of DNA combined and juxtaposed in a manner not found in nature.
  • DNA constructs exist as a result of human manipulation, and include clones and other copies of manipulated molecules.
  • a DNA segment is a portion of a larger DNA molecule having specified attributes.
  • a DNA segment encoding a specified polypeptide is a portion of a longer DNA molecule, such as a plasmid or plasmid fragment, which, when read from the 5′ to 3′ direction, encodes the sequence of amino acids of the specified polypeptide.
  • polynucleotide means a single- or double-stranded polymer of deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotide bases read from the 5′ to the 3′ end.
  • Polynucleotides include RNA and DNA, and can be isolated from natural sources, synthesized in vitro, or prepared from a combination of natural and synthetic molecules.
  • the length of a polynucleotide molecule is given herein in terms of nucleotides (abbreviated “nt”) or base pairs (abbreviated “bp”).
  • nt nucleotides
  • bp base pairs
  • double-stranded molecules When the term is applied to double-stranded molecules it is used to denote overall length and will be understood to be equivalent to the term base pairs. It will be recognized by those skilled in the art that the two strands of a double-stranded polynucleotide can differ slightly in length and that the ends thereof can be staggered; thus all nucleotides within a double-stranded polynucleotide molecule can not be paired. Such unpaired ends will, in general, not exceed 20 nucleotides in length.
  • similarity between two proteins or nucleic acids refers to the relatedness between the sequence of amino acids of the proteins or the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acids. Similarity can be based on the degree of identity and/or homology of sequences of residues and the residues contained therein. Methods for assessing the degree of similarity between proteins or nucleic acids are known to those of skill in the art. For example, in one method of assessing sequence similarity, two amino acid or nucleotide sequences are aligned in a manner that yields a maximal level of identity between the sequences. “Identity” refers to the extent to which the amino acid or nucleotide sequences are invariant.
  • Alignment of amino acid sequences, and to some extent nucleotide sequences, also can take into account conservative differences and/or frequent substitutions in amino acids (or nucleotides). Conservative differences are those that preserve the physico-chemical properties of the residues involved. Alignments can be global (alignment of the compared sequences over the entire length of the sequences and including all residues) or local (the alignment of a portion of the sequences that includes only the most similar region or regions).
  • identity is well known to skilled artisans (Carillo, H. & Lipton, D., SIAM J Applied Math 48:1073 (1988)).
  • homologous means about greater than or equal to 25% sequence homology, typically greater than or equal to 25%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% sequence homology; the precise percentage can be specified if necessary.
  • sequence homology and “identity” are often used interchangeably, unless otherwise indicated.
  • sequences are aligned so that the highest order match is obtained (see, e.g.: Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D.
  • Substantially homologous nucleic acid molecules would hybridize typically at moderate stringency or at high stringency all along the length of the nucleic acid of interest. Also contemplated are nucleic acid molecules that contain degenerate codons in place of codons in the hybridizing nucleic acid molecule.
  • Whether any two molecules have nucleotide sequences or amino acid sequences that are at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% “identical” or “homologous” can be determined using known computer algorithms such as the “FASTA” program, using for example, the default parameters as in Pearson et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (other programs include the GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Research 12(I):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA (Atschul, S.
  • Percent homology or identity of proteins and/or nucleic acid molecules can be determined, for example, by comparing sequence information using a GAP computer program (e.g., Needleman et al. (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, as revised by Smith and Waterman ((1981) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482). Briefly, the GAP program defines similarity as the number of aligned symbols (i.e., nucleotides or amino acids), which are similar, divided by the total number of symbols in the shorter of the two sequences.
  • a GAP computer program e.g., Needleman et al. (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, as revised by Smith and Waterman ((1981) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482).
  • the GAP program defines similarity as the number of aligned symbols (i.e., nucleotides or amino acids), which are similar, divided by the total number of symbols in the shorter of the two sequences.
  • Default parameters for the GAP program can include: (1) a unary comparison matrix (containing a value of 1 for identities and 0 for non-identities) and the weighted corn-parison matrix of Gribskov et al. (1986) Nucl. Acids Res. 14:6745, as described by Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., ATLAS OF PROTEIN SEQUENCE AND STRUCTURE, National Biomedical Research Foundation, pp. 353-358 (1979); (2) a penalty of 3.0 for each gap and an additional 0.10 penalty for each symbol in each gap; and (3) no penalty for end gaps.
  • the term “identity” or “homology” represents a comparison between a test and a reference polypeptide or polynucleotide.
  • the term at least “90% identical to” refers to percent identities from 90 to 99.99 relative to the reference nucleic acid or amino acid sequence of the polypeptide. Identity at a level of 90% or more is indicative of the fact that, assuming for exemplification purposes a test and reference polypeptide length of 100 amino acids are compared. No more than 10% (i.e., 10 out of 100) of the amino acids in the test polypeptide differs from that of the reference polypeptide. Similar comparisons can be made between test and reference polynucleotides.
  • Such differences can be represented as point mutations randomly distributed over the entire length of a polypeptide or they can be clustered in one or more locations of varying length up to the maximum allowable, e.g. 10/100 amino acid difference (approximately 90% identity). Differences are defined as nucleic acid or amino acid substitutions, insertions or deletions. At the level of homologies or identities above about 85-90%, the result should be independent of the program and gap parameters set; such high levels of identity can be assessed readily, often by manual alignment without relying on software.
  • an aligned sequence refers to the use of homology (similarity and/or identity) to align corresponding positions in a sequence of nucleotides or amino acids. Typically, two or more sequences that are related by 50% or more identity are aligned.
  • An aligned set of sequences refers to 2 or more sequences that are aligned at corresponding positions and can include aligning sequences derived from RNAs, such as ESTs and other cDNAs, aligned with genomic DNA sequence.
  • primer refers to a nucleic acid molecule that can act as a point of initiation of template-directed DNA synthesis under appropriate conditions (e.g., in the presence of four different nucleoside triphosphates and a polymerization agent, such as DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase) in an appropriate buffer and at a suitable temperature. It will be appreciated that a certain nucleic acid molecules can serve as a “probe” and as a “primer.” A primer, however, has a 3′ hydroxyl group for extension.
  • a primer can be used in a variety of methods, including, for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), reverse-transcriptase (RT)-PCR, RNA PCR, LCR, multiplex PCR, panhandle PCR, capture PCR, expression PCR, 3′ and 5′ RACE, in situ PCR, ligation-mediated PCR and other amplification protocols.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • RT reverse-transcriptase
  • RNA PCR reverse-transcriptase
  • LCR multiplex PCR
  • panhandle PCR panhandle PCR
  • capture PCR expression PCR
  • 3′ and 5′ RACE in situ PCR
  • ligation-mediated PCR and other amplification protocols.
  • primer pair refers to a set of primers that includes a 5′ (upstream) primer that hybridizes with the 5′ end of a sequence to be amplified (e.g. by PCR) and a 3′ (downstream) primer that hybridizes with the complement of the 3′ end of the sequence to be amplified.
  • “specifically hybridizes” refers to annealing, by complementary base-pairing, of a nucleic acid molecule (e.g. an oligonucleotide) to a target nucleic acid molecule.
  • a nucleic acid molecule e.g. an oligonucleotide
  • Parameters particularly relevant to in vitro hybridization further include annealing and washing temperature, buffer composition and salt concentration. Exemplary washing conditions for removing non-specifically bound nucleic acid molecules at high stringency are 0.1 ⁇ SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 65° C., and at medium stringency are 0.2 ⁇ SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C.
  • Equivalent stringency conditions are known in the art. The skilled person can readily adjust these parameters to achieve specific hybridization of a nucleic acid molecule to a target nucleic acid molecule appropriate for a particular application.
  • Complementary when referring to two nucleotide sequences, means that the two sequences of nucleotides are capable of hybridizing, typically with less than 25%, 15% or 5% mismatches between opposed nucleotides. If necessary, the percentage of complementarity will be specified. Typically the two molecules are selected such that they will hybridize under conditions of high stringency.
  • substantially identical to a product means sufficiently similar so that the property of interest is sufficiently unchanged so that the substantially identical product can be used in place of the product.
  • allelic variant or allelic variation references any of two or more alternative forms of a gene occupying the same chromosomal locus. Allelic variation arises naturally through mutation, and can result in phenotypic polymorphism within populations. Gene mutations can be silent (no change in the encoded polypeptide) or can encode polypeptides having altered amino acid sequence.
  • allelic variant also is used herein to denote a protein encoded by an allelic variant of a gene.
  • allelic variants which include variants between and among species typically have at least 80%, 90% or greater amino acid identity with a wildtype and/or predominant form from the same species; the degree of identity depends upon the gene and whether comparison is interspecies or intraspecies.
  • intraspecies allelic variants have at least about 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identity or greater with a wildtype and/or predominant form, including 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater identity with a wildtype and/or predominant form of a polypeptide.
  • Reference to an allelic variant herein generally refers to variations n proteins among members of the same species.
  • allele which is used interchangeably herein with “allelic variant” refers to alternative forms of a gene or portions thereof. Alleles occupy the same locus or position on homologous chromosomes. When a subject has two identical alleles of a gene, the subject is said to be homozygous for that gene or allele. When a subject has two different alleles of a gene, the subject is said to be heterozygous for the gene. Alleles of a specific gene can differ from each other in a single nucleotide or several nucleotides, and can include substitutions, deletions and insertions of nucleotides. An allele of a gene also can be a form of a gene containing a mutation.
  • species variants refer to variants in polypeptides among different species, including different mammalian species, such as mouse and human.
  • a splice variant refers to a variant produced by differential processing of a primary transcript of genomic DNA that results in more than one type of mRNA.
  • modification is in reference to modification of a sequence of amino acids of a polypeptide or a sequence of nucleotides in a nucleic acid molecule and includes deletions, insertions, and replacements of amino acids and nucleotides, respectively.
  • Methods of modifying a polypeptide are routine to those of skill in the art, such as by using recombinant DNA methodologies.
  • promoter means a portion of a gene containing DNA sequences that provide for the binding of RNA polymerase and initiation of transcription. Promoter sequences are commonly, but not always, found in the 5′ non-coding region of genes.
  • isolated or purified polypeptide or protein or biologically-active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue from which the protein is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. Preparations can be determined to be substantially free if they appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography (TLC), gel electrophoresis and high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), used by those of skill in the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further purification would not detectably alter the physical and chemical properties, such as enzymatic and biological activities, of the substance.
  • TLC thin layer chromatography
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of proteins in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly-produced.
  • the term substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of enzyme proteins having less that about 30% (by dry weight) of non-enzyme proteins (also referred to herein as a contaminating protein), generally less than about 20% of non-enzyme proteins or 10% of non-enzyme proteins or less that about 5% of non-enzyme proteins.
  • non-enzyme proteins also referred to herein as a contaminating protein
  • the enzyme protein is recombinantly produced, it also is substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about or at 20%, 10% or 5% of the volume of the enzyme protein preparation.
  • the term substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals includes preparations of enzyme proteins in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in the synthesis of the protein.
  • the term includes preparations of enzyme proteins having less than about 30% (by dry weight) 20%, 10%, 5% or less of chemical precursors or non-enzyme chemicals or components.
  • synthetic with reference to, for example, a synthetic nucleic acid molecule or a synthetic gene or a synthetic peptide refers to a nucleic acid molecule or polypeptide molecule that is produced by recombinant methods and/or by chemical synthesis methods.
  • production by recombinant means by using recombinant DNA methods means the use of the well known methods of molecular biology for expressing proteins encoded by cloned DNA.
  • vector refers to discrete elements that are used to introduce a heterologous nucleic acid into cells for either expression or replication thereof.
  • the vectors typically remain episomal, but can be designed to effect integration of a gene or portion thereof into a chromosome of the genome.
  • vectors that are artificial chromosomes such as yeast artificial chromosomes and mammalian artificial chromosomes. Selection and use of such vehicles are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • an expression vector includes vectors capable of expressing DNA that is operatively linked with regulatory sequences, such as promoter regions, that are capable of effecting expression of such DNA fragments. Such additional segments can include promoter and terminator sequences, and optionally can include one or more origins of replication, one or more selectable markers, an enhancer, a polyadenylation signal, and the like. Expression vectors are generally derived from plasmid or viral DNA, or can contain elements of both. Thus, an expression vector refers to a recombinant DNA or RNA construct, such as a plasmid, a phage, recombinant virus or other vector that, upon introduction into an appropriate host cell, results in expression of the cloned DNA. Appropriate expression vectors are well known to those of skill in the art and include those that are replicable in eukaryotic cells and/or prokaryotic cells and those that remain episomal or those which integrate into the host cell genome.
  • vector also includes “virus vectors” or “viral vectors.”
  • viral vectors are engineered viruses that are operatively linked to exogenous genes to transfer (as vehicles or shuttles) the exogenous genes into cells.
  • operably or operatively linked when referring to DNA segments means that the segments are arranged so that they function in concert for their intended purposes, e.g., transcription initiates in the promoter and proceeds through the coding segment to the terminator.
  • assessing is intended to include quantitative and qualitative determination in the sense of obtaining an absolute value for the activity of a protease, or a domain thereof, present in the sample, and also of obtaining an index, ratio, percentage, visual or other value indicative of the level of the activity.
  • Assessment can be direct or indirect and the chemical species actually detected need not of course be the proteolysis product itself but can for example be a derivative thereof or some further substance. For example, detection of a cleavage product of a complement protein, such as by SDS-PAGE and protein staining with Coomasie blue.
  • biological activity refers to the in vivo activities of a compound or physiological responses that result upon in vivo administration of a compound, composition or other mixture.
  • Biological activity thus, encompasses therapeutic effects and pharmaceutical activity of such compounds, compositions and mixtures.
  • Biological activities can be observed in in vitro systems designed to test or use such activities.
  • a biological activity of a protease is its catalytic activity in which a polypeptide is hydrolyzed.
  • equivalent when referring to two sequences of nucleic acids, means that the two sequences in question encode the same sequence of amino acids or equivalent proteins.
  • equivalent when equivalent is used in referring to two proteins or peptides, it means that the two proteins or peptides have substantially the same amino acid sequence with only amino acid substitutions that do not substantially alter the activity or function of the protein or peptide.
  • equivalent refers to a property, the property does not need to be present to the same extent (e.g., two peptides can exhibit different rates of the same type of enzymatic activity), but the activities are usually substantially the same.
  • modulate and “modulation” or “alter” refer to a change of an activity of a molecule, such as a protein.
  • exemplary activities include, but are not limited to, biological activities, such as signal transduction.
  • Modulation can include an increase in the activity (i.e., up-regulation or agonist activity) a decrease in activity (i.e., down-regulation or inhibition) or any other alteration in an activity (such as a change in periodicity, frequency, duration, kinetics or other parameter).
  • Modulation can be context dependent and typically modulation is compared to a designated state, for example, the wildtype protein, the protein in a constitutive state, or the protein as expressed in a designated cell type or condition.
  • composition refers to any mixture. It can be a solution, suspension, liquid, powder, paste, aqueous, non-aqueous or any combination thereof.
  • a combination refers to any association between or among two or more items.
  • the combination can be two or more separate items, such as two compositions or two collections, can be a mixture thereof, such as a single mixture of the two or more items, or any variation thereof.
  • the elements of a combination are generally functionally associated or related.
  • kits are packaged combinations that optionally includes other elements, such as additional reagents and instructions for use of the combination or elements thereof.
  • disease or disorder refers to a pathological condition in an organism resulting from cause or condition including, but not limited to, infections, acquired conditions, genetic conditions, and characterized by identifiable symptoms.
  • Diseases and disorders of interest herein are those that are treatable by immune globulin.
  • treating means that the subject's symptoms are partially or totally alleviated, or remain static following treatment.
  • treatment encompasses prophylaxis, therapy and/or cure.
  • Prophylaxis refers to prevention of a potential disease and/or a prevention of worsening of symptoms or progression of a disease.
  • Treatment also encompasses any phannaceutical use of an immune globulin preparation and compositions provided herein.
  • a pharmaceutically effective agent includes any therapeutic agent or bioactive agents, including, but not limited to, for example, anesthetics, vasoconstrictors, dispersing agents, conventional therapeutic drugs, including small molecule dnigs and therapeutic proteins.
  • treatment means any manner in which the symptoms of a condition, disorder or disease or other indication, are ameliorated or otherwise beneficially altered.
  • therapeutic effect means an effect resulting from treatment of a subject that alters, typically improves or ameliorates the symptoms of a disease or condition or that cures a disease or condition.
  • a therapeutically effective amount refers to the amount of a composition, molecule or compound which results in a therapeutic effect following administration to a subject.
  • the term “subject” refers to an animal, including a mammal, such as a human being.
  • a patient refers to a human subject.
  • amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disease or disorder by a treatment refers to any lessening, whether pennanent or temporary, lasting or transient, of the symptoms that can be attributed to or associated with administration of the composition or therapeutic.
  • prevention or prophylaxis refers to methods in which the risk of developing disease or condition is reduced.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” or a “therapeutically effective dose” refers to the quantity of an agent, compound, material, or composition containing a compound that is at least sufficient to produce a therapeutic effect. Hence, it is the quantity necessary for preventing, curing, ameliorating, arresting or partially arresting a symptom of a disease or disorder.
  • unit dose form refers to physically discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art.
  • a single dosage formulation refers to a formulation for direct administration.
  • an “article of manufacture” is a product that is made and sold.
  • the term is intended to encompass IG and hyaluronidase compositions contained in articles of packaging.
  • fluid refers to any composition that can flow. Fluids thus encompass compositions that are in the form of semi-solids, pastes, solutions, aqueous mixtures, gels, lotions, creams and other such compositions.
  • kits refers to a combination of compositions provided herein and another item for a purpose including, but not limited to, activation, administration, diagnosis, and assessment of a biological activity or property. Kits optionally include instructions for use.
  • a cellular extract or lysate refers to a preparation or fraction which is made from a lysed or disrupted cell.
  • animal includes any animal, such as, but are not limited to primates including humans, gorillas and monkeys; rodents, such as mice and rats; fowl, such as chickens; nuninants, such as goats, cows, deer, sheep; ovine, such as pigs and other animals.
  • Non-human animals exclude humans as the contemplated animal.
  • the enzymes provided herein are from any source, animal, plant, prokaryotic and fungal. Most enzymes are of animal origin, including mammalian origin.
  • a control refers to a sample that is substantially identical to the test sample, except that it is not treated with a test parameter, or, if it is a plasma sample, it can be from a normal volunteer not affected with the condition of interest.
  • a control also can be an internal control.
  • ranges and amounts can be expressed as “about” a particular value or range. About also includes the exact amount. Hence “about 5 bases” means “about 5 bases” and also “5 bases.”
  • an optionally substituted group means that the group is unsubstituted or is substituted.
  • IG-treatable diseases and conditions by subcutaneously administering immune globulin (IG) in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase.
  • IG immune globulin
  • a soluble hyaluronidase By virtue of the ability of hyaluronidase to break down hyaluronic acid in the extracellular matrix, hyaluronidase facilitates subcutaneous infusions of therapeutic agents.
  • Immune globulin is a therapeutic that is primarily given by intravenous administration to treat individuals with immune deficiencies, referred to as IVIG therapy.
  • the bioavailability of IG in the presence of hyaluronidase is greater than 90% of the bioavailability of IG following IVIG treatment.
  • the combination therapy of hyaluronidase and IG permits the subcutaneous administration of immune globulin at dosages and frequencies that are similar to IVIG treatment.
  • IG when administered subcutaneously in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase, can be administered once monthly at prevailing IVIG doses for the particular indication.
  • hyaluronidase acts to open flow channels in the skin it can speed infusion rates.
  • methods of subcutaneously administering IG co-formulated and/or co-administered with hyaluronidase increases infusion rates, and thereby decreases time of delivery of IG therapy.
  • Defective antibody formation is the most common abnormality in the majority of primary immunodeficiency (PID) diseases; it is most often reflected by a decrease in serum immunoglobulins, which in turn leads to increased susceptibility to bacterial infections, especially of the sinopulmonary tract.
  • Decreased immunoglobulin levels are found in individuals having antibody defects such as X-linked agammaglobulinemia, immunoglobulin heavy chain deletion, selective immunoglobulin G (IgG) subclass deficiency, common variable immunodeficiency, or X-linked hyperimmunoglobulin M syndrome. Decreased immunoglobulin levels also are found in individuals having combined immunodeficiencies due to defects in T and B cells, such as, but not limited to, severe combined immunodeficiency or Wiskott Aldrich Syndrome (IUIS Scientific Committee, 1999).
  • immunoglobulin preparations presently used are formulated at 16%, compared to IVIG preparations formulated at 5 to 12%.
  • the higher concentration relative to IV preparations allows smaller infusion volumes; such preparations cannot be infused intravenously.
  • Such subcutaneous methods of immunoglobulin replacement therapy is considered to be effective, safe and also highly appreciated by patients as it has a low risk of systemic adverse reactions and leads to higher trough serum IgG concentrations compared to monthly IV infusions (Gardulf et al. (1995) J Adv. Nurs., 21: 917-27; Gardulf et al. (1993) Clin. Exp. Immunol., 92: 200-4; Gardulf et al. (1991) Lancet, 338: 162-6).
  • the bioavailability of immunoglobulin administered subcutaneously generally is less than that infused intravenously. Immunoglobulin is immediately available in the blood, and slowly equilibrates to the extra-vascular compartment over 3 to 5 days (Schiff et al. (1986) J. Clin. Immunol., 6:256-64). Subcutaneously administered immunoglobulin is slowly absorbed from the subcutaneous space into the blood and at the same time equilibrates with the extra-vascular compartment; there is no high IV spike. The bioavailability has not been extensively studied, but in a recent trial of the ZLB-Behring preparation (i.e.
  • Vivaglobin® it was determined by measuring the area under the curve (AUC) that only 67% of the immunoglobulin was absorbed and thus, the recommended dose was 137% of the IV dose (Ochs et al. (2006) J Clin. Immunol., 26:265-73).
  • AUC area under the curve
  • studies of intradermally administered immunoglobulin in rabbits suggests there is decreased bioavailability through the subcutaneous route. This may be due to the mode of absorption of large protein molecules, which cannot readily diffuse through the capillary walls and must be absorbed via the lymphatics (Supersaxo et al. (1990) Pharm. Res., 7: 167-9).
  • SC administration In addition to problems with bioavailability associated with subcutaneous administration of IG, the primary disadvantage of SC administration is that only small volumes can be infused in each site, necessitating the use of multiple sites on a weekly or biweekly (ever other week) basis. Generally, using a 16% solution, approximately 20 ml can be infused per site; and adult patient receiving 400 mg/kg body weight (BW) thus would require at least 3 sites per week or 12 sites per month. Even though weekly or biweekly administration has the added advantage of maintaining better trough levels than monthly IV infusions, the requirement of multiple needle insertions has been a deterrent for many patients.
  • the SC space is formed by a collagen network filled with a gel-like substance, hyaluronic acid.
  • Hyaluronic acid is replaced with a half-life of approximately 5 h, and is largely responsible for the resistance to fluid flow through the tissues.
  • Hyaluronidase temporarily digests the hyaluronic acid, thereby facilitating infusions into the subcutaneous space.
  • the hyaluronic acid is restored within 24 hours, leaving no observable changes.
  • hyaluronidase due to the ability of hyaluronidase to open channels in the interstitial space through degradation of glycosaminoglycans, administration of a soluble hyaluronidase permits the diffusion of molecules, thereby improving the bioavailability, pharmacokinetics and/or pharmacodynamic characteristics of such co-formulated or co-administered molecules.
  • the bioavailability of IG co-administered subcutaneously with hyaluronidase is 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% of the bioavailability of IVIG. Typically, the bioavailability is greater than 90%. Further, co-administration with a soluble hyaluronidase permits infusion of large volumes at a single subcutaneous site.
  • volumes up to 600 ml or greater of IG can be administered at a single site in a single sitting, for example 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500, ml, 600 ml or more can be administered at a single site in a single administration.
  • an IG preparation formulated at or between 5-12% can be co-administered subcutaneously with a soluble hyaluronidase at dosages equivalent to once monthly IVIG doses, for example, at or about 100 mg/kg, 200 mg/kg, 300 mg/kg, 400 mg/kg, 500 mg/kg, 600 mg/kg or more.
  • the dosages can be administered as a single dose or can be divided into multiple doses given daily or weekly, such as once a week or every two, three or four weeks or combinations thereof.
  • IG subcutaneously in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase
  • one or all of the considerations and problems associated with subcutaneous administration of IG are addressed.
  • subcutaneously administering IG in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase permits administration of IVIG doses at once monthly IVIG frequencies, while maintaining IVIG bioavailability.
  • immune globulins also referred to as gamma globulin or IgG
  • IgG immune globulins
  • IgG immune globulins
  • IG acts to strengthen the immune system by modulating the activity of complement, suppressing autoantibody production, saturating or blocking Fc receptors on macrophages and B lymphocytes, and suppressing the production of inflammatory mediators such as cytokines, chemokines and metalloproteinases.
  • IG is a protein fraction found in the plasma of higher animals and contains a large number of antibodies having varying specificities.
  • IG contains serum immunoglobulins that can be any idiotype, such as IgG and various subclasses, IgA, IgM, IgD, IgE.
  • the various immunoglobulins or subclasses can be present at various concentrations and specificities, which can differ between immune globulin preparations depending, for example, on the plasma donor's exposure to antigens (e.g., by way of vaccinations).
  • immunoglobulins are present in amounts normally found in the serum (see Table 2), although purification steps can be employed to alter ratios of particular immunoglobulin class or classes.
  • IG preparations contain 90% or more IgG, such as 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more IgG.
  • the immunoglobulins can be polyclonal or monoclonal.
  • preparations include a high percentage of monomeric IgG and a low IgA content.
  • Immune globulins can be isolated from human or animal blood or produced by other means, for example, by recombinant DNA technology or hybridoma technology.
  • immune globulin can be obtained from tissues, lymphocyte hybridoma cultures, blood plasma or senim, or recombinant cell cultures using any suitable fractionation procedure, e.g., alcohol precipitations or ion exchange separations.
  • IG is prepared from blood plasma by alcohol fractionation, such as was originally employed by Cohn and modified by Oncley (the Cohn-Oncley method, see e.g, Cohn et al. (1946) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 68: 459-475; Oncley et al. (1949) J Am. Chem.
  • IG is manufactured using a primary cold ethanol fractionation and a secondary fractionation that can include any one or more of a chemical modification, incubation at pH 4.0 with or without pepsin, PEG precipitation, ion-exchange chromatography, enzymatic cleavage, solvent detergent treatment and diafiltration and ultrafiltration.
  • IG preparation for fractionating human plasma by means of ethyleneglycol polymers (Polson et al. (1964) Biochim. Biophys. Acta., 82: 463-475); incorporation of a polyethyleneglycol (PEG) as a purification agent starting from a material separated from the Cohn fractionation (fraction II or II+III, see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • PEG polyethyleneglycol
  • the IG preparations should be treated to remove viral load.
  • viral inactivation There are two methods of decreasing viral load: viral inactivation and viral partitioning or removal.
  • Exemplary of viral inactivation methods include, but are not limited to, cold ethanol fractionation, heating (pasterurization), solvent/detergent and acidic environment (low pH).
  • solvent/detergent process has been demonstrated to have virucidal action against VSV (vesicular stomatitits virus), Sindbis virus, HIV, HBV (hepatitis B virus, and HCV (hepatic C virus).
  • viral partitioning or removal include, but are not limited to, cold ethanol fractionation, phase partitioning or PEG precipitation, affinity chromatography, ion exchange or gel exclusion chromatography and filtration.
  • the final purified formulation also must be prepared to avoid excessive aggregation and to stabilize the protein. Aggregation of IG preparation can be minimized by preparing lyophilized preparations for improved stability on storage, for reconstitution with a diluent before use.
  • Another way of increasing the stability of IG preparations that is well known in the art is the addition of protein-stabilizing excipients to the IG preparation.
  • Known excipients include, but are not limited to, sugars, polyols, amino acids, amines, salts, polymers and surfactants. For example, U.S. Pat. No.
  • JP Patent 54020124 discloses the addition of an amino acid to an intramuscular preparation to render it storage stable and safe
  • JP 57031623 and JP 57128635 disclose the use of arginine and/or lysine with NaCl in 5 to 15% IG preparations to achieve long-term stability in an intramuscular preparation
  • JP 4346934 discloses the use of low conductivity (less than mmho), pH 5.3 to 5.7 and optionally one or more stabilizer including PEG, human senun albumin and mannitol;
  • 4,439,421 teaches the addition of a hydrophilic macromolecule, a polyol and another protein to stabilize against anti-complement generation;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,945,098 discloses the stabilization if isotonic solutions by the addition of amino acids (0.1 to 0.3 M glycine) and non-ionic detergents (polysorbate and PEG);
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,186,192 discloses various additives including amino acids;
  • WO 2005/049078 discloses the stabilization with maltose and additionally glycine to 0.1 M;
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,362,661 discloses the use of neutral and basic amino acids to impart stability on a 5% IG preparation.
  • Stable liquid formulations also can be prepared, which use carbohydrates in an aqueous medium having a very low ionic strength and a pH of 4.25 (U.S. Pat. No. 4,396,608) or a weakly acidic pH of 5-6 (EP 0278422).
  • IG preparations particularly liquid preparations, containing one or more amphiphilic stabilizer in order to stabilize against dimer formation.
  • the amphiphilic stabilizers include nicotinic acid and its derivatives, in particular nicotinamide, and mainly in conjunction with the above, amino acids having uncharged lipophilic side chains, e.g., phenylalanine, methionine, leucine, isoleucine, proline and valine.
  • the preparations can be prepared by methods known in the art, such as any described herein. Generally, however, the pH of the final preparation is adjusted to a relatively high but acidic pH, namely in the range of about pH 4.2 to 5.4, such as a pH range of 4.6 to 5.1. It has been found that this pH range is particularly useful for improving the storage of IG preparations.
  • final IG preparations have a protein concentration of about 5 to 25% w/v, generally 6 to 15% w/v, 8 to 12% w/v, and typically 10% w/v.
  • the final protein concentration will depend on various factors, such as the administration route the patient to be treated, and the type of condition to be treated.
  • any IG preparation used for IV administration can be used in the methods provided herein in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase for subcutaneous administration.
  • Preparations include lyophilized and liquid formulations.
  • Immune globulin (IVIG) is commercially available as Carimune® NF, Flebogamma® 5%, Gammagard® Liquid, Gammagard® S/D, Gamunex®, Iveegam® EN, Octagam® and Polygam® S/D.
  • IVIG Immune globulin
  • Such preparations all use a method of cold alcohol fractionation, but use different methods to isolate and purify the immune globulin and different methods to reduce the potential virus contamination.
  • other preparations presently formulated for intramuscular or subcutaneous administration can be used in the combinations and methods provided herein.
  • IG preparation is Immune Globulin Intravenous (Human), 10% (IVIG, 10%, marketed as Gammagard® liquid, Baxter Healthcare Corporation), which is a liquid unmodified IgG preparation with a distribution of IgG subclasses similar to that of normal plasma.
  • the preparation contains intact fragment crystallizable (Fc) and Fab regions.
  • the preparations contains 100 mg/ml proteins, with at least 98% being IgG; IgA is present at a concentration of 37 ⁇ g/ml, and IgM is present only in trace amounts. It has an osmolality that is similar to physiologic osmolality and contains no added sugars, sodium or preservatives.
  • the manufacturing process employs a modified Cohn-Oncley cold alcohol fractionation procedure and further purifications by a continuous process through the use of weak cation exchange chromatography and weak anion exchange chromatography.
  • the manufacturing process also includes 3 independent viral inactivation or removal steps: solvent/detergent (S/D) treatment, nanofiltration and incubation at a low pH and elevated temperature.
  • Hyaluronidases are a family of enzymes that degrade hyaluronic acid, which is an essential component of the extracellular matrix and a major constituent of the interstitial barrier. By catalyzing the hydrolysis of hyaluronic acid, a major constituent of the interstitial barrier, hyaluronidase lowers the viscosity of hyaluronic acid, thereby increasing tissue permeability.
  • hyaluronidases have been used, for example, as a spreading or dispersing agent in conjunction with other agents, drugs and proteins to enhance their dispersion and delivery.
  • hyaluronidases in the combinations and methods provided herein are soluble hyaluronidases.
  • hyaluronidases There are three general classes of hyaluronidases; mammalian hyaluronidase, bacterial hyaluronidase and hyaluronidase from leeches, other parasites and crustaceans.
  • Mammalian-type hyaluronidases (EC 3.2.1.35) are endo- ⁇ -N-acetyl-hexosaminidases that hydrolyze the ⁇ 1 ⁇ 4 glycosidic bond of hyaluronan into various oligosaccharide lengths such as tetrasaccharides and hexasaccharides.
  • Hyaluronidases of this type include, but are not limited to, hyaluronidases from cows (bovine) (SEQ ID NOS:10 and 11), mouse (SEQ ID NOS:17-19, 32), pig (SEQ ID NOS:20-21), rat (SEQ ID NOS:22-24, 31), rabbit (SEQ ID NO:25), sheep (ovine) (SEQ ID NOS:26 and 27), orangutan (SEQ ID NO:28), cynomolgus monkey (SEQ ID NO:29), guinea pig (SEQ ID NO: 30), and human hyaluronidases.
  • Mammalian hyaluronidases can be further subdivided into those that are neutral active, predominantly found in testes extracts, and acid active, predominantly found in organs such as the liver.
  • exemplary neutral active hyaluronidases include PH20, including but not limited to, PH20 derived from different species such as ovine (SEQ ID NO:27), bovine (SEQ ID NO:11) and human (SEQ ID NO:1).
  • Human PH20 also known as SPAM1 or sperm surface protein PH20
  • GPI glycosylphosphatidyl inositol
  • the PH20 mRNA transcript is normally translated to generate a 509 amino acid precursor polypeptide (SEQ ID NO:1) containing a 35 amino acid signal sequence at the N-terminus (amino acid residue positions 1-35) and a 19 amino acid GPI anchor at the C-terminus (amino acid residue positions 491-509)
  • SEQ ID NO:1 The mature PH20 is, therefore, a 474 amino acid polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:2).
  • Bovine PH20 is a 553 amino acid precursor polypeptide (SEQ ID NO:11).
  • HYAL1 human PH20
  • HYAL2 hyaluronidase-like genes
  • HYALP1 is a pseudogene
  • HYAL3 SEQ ID NO:38
  • HYAL4 precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:39
  • HYAL4 is a chondroitinase and exhibits little activity towards hyaluronan.
  • HYAL(precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:36) is the prototypical acid-active enzyme and PH20 (precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:1) is the prototypical neutral-active enzyme.
  • Acid-active hyaluronidases, such as HYAL1 and HYAL2 (precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:37) generally lack catalytic activity at neutral pH (i.e. pH 7).
  • HYAL1 has little catalytic activity in vitro over pH 4.5 (Frost et al. (1997) Anal. Biochemistry, 251:263-269).
  • HYAL2 is an acid-active enzyme with a very low specific activity in vitro.
  • the hyaluronidase-like enzymes can also be characterized by those which are generally locked to the plasma membrane via a glycosylphosphatidyl inositol anchor such as human HYAL2 and human PH20 (Danilkovitch-Miagkova, et al. (2003) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 100(8):4580-5), and those which are generally soluble such as human HYAL1 (Frost et al, (1997) Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 236(1):10-5).
  • a glycosylphosphatidyl inositol anchor such as human HYAL2 and human PH20 (Danilkovitch-Miagkova, et al. (2003) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 100(8):4580-5)
  • human HYAL1 Rost et al, (1997) Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 236(1):10-5.
  • Glycosylation including N- and O-linked glycosylation, of some hyaluronidases can be very important for their catalytic activity and stability. While altering the type of glycan modifying a glycoprotein can have dramatic affects on a protein's antigenicity, structural folding, solubility, and stability, most enzymes are not thought to require glycosylation for optimal enzyme activity.
  • Such hyaluronidases are unique in this regard, in that removal of N-linked glycosylation can result in near complete inactivation of the hyaluronidase activity. For such hyaluronidases, the presence of N-linked glycans is critical for generating an active enzyme.
  • N-linked oligosaccharides fall into several major types (oligomannose, complex, hybrid, sulfated), all of which have (Man) 3-GlcNAc-GlcNAc-cores attached via the amide nitrogen of Asn residues that fall within-Asn-Xaa-Thr/Ser-sequences (where Xaa is not Pro). Glycosylation at an-Asn-Xaa-Cys-site has been reported for coagulation protein C.
  • the hyaluronidase can contain both N-glycosidic and O-glycosidic linkages.
  • PH20 has O-linked oligosaccharides as well as N-linked oligosaccharides.
  • N-linked glycosylation sites there are seven potential N-linked glycosylation sites at N82, N166, N235, N254, N368, N393, N490 of human PH20 exemplified in SEQ ID NO: 1. Disulfide bonds form between the cysteine residues C60 and C351 and between C224 and C238 to form the core hyaluronidase domain. However, additional cysteines are required in the carboxy terminus for neutral enzyme catalytic activity such that amino acids 36 to 464 of SEQ ID NO:1 contains the minimally active human PH20 hyaluronidase domain. Thus, N-linked glycosylation site N-490 is not required for proper hyaluronidase activity.
  • Soluble hyaluronidases include any that exist in soluble form, including, but not limited to, Hyall, bovine PH20 and ovine PH20, allelic variants thereof and other variants. Also included among soluble hyaluronidase are any hyaluronidase that has been modified to be soluble. For example, human PH20, which is normally membrane anchored via a GPI anchor, can be made soluble by truncation of and removal of all or a portion of the GPI anchor at the C-terminus. Soluble hyaluronidases also include neutral active and acid active hyaluronidases, however, neutral active hyaluronidases are contemplated for use herein for purposes of subcutaneous administration.
  • a soluble hyaluronidase is PH20 from any species, such as any set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof lacking all or a portion of the C-terminal GPI anchor, so long as the hyaluronidase is soluble and retains hyaluronidase activity.
  • Also included among soluble hyaluronidases are allelic variants or other variants of any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof.
  • Allelic variants and other variants are known to one of skill in the art, and include polypeptides having 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95% or more sequence identify to any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof.
  • a soluble human PH20 is used for use in the methods herein.
  • PH20 from other animals can be utilized, such preparations are potentially immunogenic, since they are animal proteins. For example, a significant proportion of patients demonstrate prior sensitization secondary to ingested foods, and since these are animal proteins, all patients have a risk of subsequent sensitization. Thus, non-human preparations may not be suitable for chronic use. If non-human preparations are desired, it is contemplated herein that such polypeptides can be prepared to have reduced immunogenicity. Such modifications are within the level of one of skill in the art.
  • Hyaluronidases, including PH20, used in the methods herein can be recombinantly produced or can be purified or partially-purified from natural sources, such as, for example, from testes extracts.
  • Exemplary of a soluble hyaluronidase is soluble human PH20.
  • Soluble forms of recombinant human PH20 have been produced and can be used in the methods described herein for co-administration or co-formulation with immunoglobulin for subcutaneous administration to treat IG-treatable diseases and conditions.
  • the production of such soluble forms of PH20 is described in application Ser. Nos. 11/065,716 and 11/238,171, and in Examples 2-6, below.
  • Soluble forms include, but are not limited to, any having C-terminal truncations to generate polypeptides containing amino acid 1 to amino acid 347, 372, 394, 413, 430, 447, 467, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482 and 483 of the sequence of amino acids set forth in SEQ ID NOS 1.
  • the 35 amino acid N-terminal signal sequence is cleaved during processing, and the mature form of the protein is secreted.
  • the mature soluble polypeptides contain amino acids 36 to 347, 372, 394, 413, 430, 447, 467, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482 and 483 of SEQ ID NO:1.
  • soluble hyaluronidases are those that are 442, 443, 444, 445, 446 or 447 amino acids in length, such as set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic or species variants or other variants thereof.
  • soluble forms of PH20 are produced using protein expression systems that facilitate correct N-glycosylation to ensure the polypeptide retains activity, since glycosylation is important for the catalytic activity and stability of hyaluronidases.
  • Such cells include, for example Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells (e.g. DG44 CHO cells).
  • soluble rHuPH20 Recombinant soluble forms of human PH20 (soluble rHuPH20) have been generated and can be produced and purified using the methods described herein.
  • the generation of such soluble forms of rHuPH20 are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 11/065,716 and 11/238,171 (published as U.S. published patent application Nos. US20050260186 and US 20060104968), and in Examples 2-6, below.
  • Exemplary of such polypeptides are those generated from a nucleic acid molecule encoding amino acids 1-482 set forth in SEQ ID NO:3. Post translational processing removes the 35 amino acid signal sequence, resulting in the secretion of a 447 amino acid soluble rHuPH20 (SEQ ID NO:4).
  • rHuPH20 can be heterogenous due to peptidases present in the culture medium upon production and purification.
  • rHuPH20 is produced in cells that facilitate correct N-glycosylation to retain activity, such as CHO cells (e.g. DG44 CHO cells).
  • Polypeptides of a soluble hyaluronidase set forth herein can be obtained by methods well known in the art for protein purification and recombinant protein expression. Any method known to those of skill in the art for identification of nucleic acids that encode desired genes can be used. Any method available in the art can be used to obtain a full length (i.e., encompassing the entire coding region) cDNA or genomic DNA clone encoding a hyaluronidase, such as from a cell or tissue source. Modified or variant soluble hyaluronidases, can be engineered from a wildtype polypeptide, such as by site-directed mutagenesis.
  • Polypeptides can be cloned or isolated using any available methods known in the art for cloning and isolating nucleic acid molecules. Such methods include PCR amplification of nucleic acids and screening of libraries, including nucleic acid hybridization screening, antibody-based screening and activity-based screening.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding a desired polypeptide can be used to isolate nucleic acid molecules encoding a desired polypeptide, including for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) methods.
  • a nucleic acid containing material can be used as a starting material from which a desired polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule can be isolated.
  • DNA and mRNA preparations, cell extracts, tissue extracts, fluid samples (e.g. blood, serum, saliva), samples from healthy and/or diseased subjects can be used in amplification methods.
  • Nucleic acid libraries also can be used as a source of starting material.
  • Primers can be designed to amplify a desired polypeptide.
  • primers can be designed based on expressed sequences from which a desired polypeptide is generated.
  • Primers can be designed based on back-translation of a polypeptide amino acid sequence.
  • Nucleic acid molecules generated by amplification can be sequenced and confirmed to encode a desired polypeptide.
  • Additional nucleotide sequences can be joined to a polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule, including linker sequences containing restriction endonuclease sites for the purpose of cloning the synthetic gene into a vector, for example, a protein expression vector or a vector designed for the amplification of the core protein coding DNA sequences.
  • additional nucleotide sequences specifying functional DNA elements can be operatively linked to a polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule. Examples of such sequences include, but are not limited to, promoter sequences designed to facilitate intracellular protein expression, and secretion sequences, for example heterologous signal sequences, designed to facilitate protein secretion. Such sequences are known to those of skill in the art.
  • Additional nucleotide residues sequences such as sequences of bases specifying protein binding regions also can be linked to enzyme-encoding nucleic acid molecules.
  • Such regions include, but are not limited to, sequences of residues that facilitate or encode proteins that facilitate uptake of an enzyme into specific target cells, or otherwise alter pharmacokinetics of a product of a synthetic gene.
  • enzymes can be linked to PEG moieties.
  • tags or other moieties can be added, for example, to aid in detection or affinity purification of the polypeptide.
  • additional nucleotide residues sequences such as sequences of bases specifying an epitope tag or other detectable marker also can be linked to enzyme-encoding nucleic acid molecules.
  • Exemplary of such sequences include nucleic acid sequences encoding a His tag (e.g., 6 ⁇ His, HHHHHH; SEQ ID NO:54) or Flag Tag (DYKDDDDK; SEQ ID NO:55).
  • the identified and isolated nucleic acids can then be inserted into an appropriate cloning vector.
  • vector-host systems known in the art can be used. Possible vectors include, but are not limited to, plasmids or modified viruses, but the vector system must be compatible with the host cell used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, bacteriophages such as lambda derivatives, or plasmids such as pCMV4, pBR322 or pUC plasmid derivatives or the Bluescript vector (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.). Other expression vectors include the HZ24 expression vector exemplified herein.
  • the insertion into a cloning vector can, for example, be accomplished by ligating the DNA fragment into a cloning vector which has complementary cohesive termini. Insertion can be effected using TOPO cloning vectors (INVITROGEN, Carlsbad, Calif.). If the complementary restriction sites used to fragment the DNA are not present in the cloning vector, the ends of the DNA molecules can be enzymatically modified. Alternatively, any site desired can be produced by ligating nucleotide sequences (linkers) onto the DNA termini; these ligated linkers can contain specific chemically synthesized oligonucleotides encoding restriction endonuclease recognition sequences.
  • linkers nucleotide sequences
  • the cleaved vector and protein gene can be modified by homopolymeric tailing.
  • Recombinant molecules can be introduced into host cells via, for example, transformation, transfection, infection, electroporation and sonoporation, so that many copies of the gene sequence are generated.
  • transformation of host cells with recombinant DNA molecules that incorporate the isolated protein gene, cDNA, or synthesized DNA sequence enables generation of multiple copies of the gene.
  • the gene can be obtained in large quantities by growing transformants, isolating the recombinant DNA molecules from the transformants and, when necessary, retrieving the inserted gene from the isolated recombinant DNA.
  • the nucleic acid containing all or a portion of the nucleotide sequence encoding the protein can be inserted into an appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector that contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted protein coding sequence.
  • an appropriate expression vector i.e., a vector that contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted protein coding sequence.
  • the necessary transcriptional and translational signals also can be supplied by the native promoter for enzyme genes, and/or their flanking regions.
  • vectors that contain a nucleic acid encoding the enzyme.
  • Cells containing the vectors also are provided.
  • the cells include eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells, and the vectors are any suitable for use therein.
  • Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells including endothelial cells, containing the vectors are provided.
  • Such cells include bacterial cells, yeast cells, fungal cells, Archea, plant cells, insect cells and animal cells.
  • the cells are used to produce a protein thereof by growing the above-described cells under conditions whereby the encoded protein is expressed by the cell, and recovering the expressed protein.
  • the enzyme can be secreted into the medium.
  • vectors that contain a sequence of nucleotides that encodes the soluble hyaluronidase polypeptide coupled to the native or heterologous signal sequence, as well as multiple copies thereof.
  • the vectors can be selected for expression of the enzyme protein in the cell or such that the enzyme protein is expressed as a secreted protein.
  • a variety of host-vector systems can be used to express the protein coding sequence. These include but are not limited to mammalian cell systems infected with virus (e.g. vaccinia virus, adenovirus and other viruses); insect cell systems infected with virus (e.g. baculovirus); microorganisms such as yeast containing yeast vectors; or bacteria transformed with bacteriophage, DNA, plasmid DNA, or cosmid DNA.
  • virus e.g. vaccinia virus, adenovirus and other viruses
  • insect cell systems infected with virus e.g. baculovirus
  • microorganisms such as yeast containing yeast vectors
  • bacteria transformed with bacteriophage, DNA, plasmid DNA, or cosmid DNA e.g. bacteriophage, DNA, plasmid DNA, or cosmid DNA.
  • the expression elements of vectors vary in their strengths and specificities. Depending on the host-vector system used, any one of a number of
  • any methods known to those of skill in the art for the insertion of DNA fragments into a vector can be used to construct expression vectors containing a chimeric gene containing appropriate transcriptional/translational control signals and protein coding sequences. These methods can include in vitro recombinant DNA and synthetic techniques and in vivo recombinants (genetic recombination). Expression of nucleic acid sequences encoding protein, or domains, derivatives, fragments or homologs thereof, can be regulated by a second nucleic acid sequence so that the genes or fragments thereof are expressed in a host transformed with the recombinant DNA molecule(s). For example, expression of the proteins can be controlled by any promoter/enhancer known in the art.
  • the promoter is not native to the genes for a desired protein.
  • Promoters which can be used include but are not limited to the SV40 early promoter (Bemoist and Chambon, Nature 290:304-310 (1981)), the promoter contained in the 3′ long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al. Cell 22:787-797 (1980)), the herpes thymidine kinase promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • promoter elements from yeast and other fungi such as the Ga14 promoter, the alcohol dehydrogenase promoter, the phosphoglycerol kinase promoter, the alkaline phosphatase promoter, and the following animal transcriptional control regions that exhibit tissue specificity and have been used in transgenic animals: elastase I gene control region which is active in pancreatic acinar cells (Swift et al., Cell 38:639-646 (1984); Ornitz et al., Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant.
  • mice mammary tumor virus control region which is active in testicular, breast, lymphoid and mast cells (Leder et al., Cell 45:485-495 (1986)), albumin gene control region which is active in liver (Pinckert et al., Genes and Devel. 1:268-276 (1987)), alpha-fetoprotein gene control region which is active in liver (Krumlauf et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:1639-1648 (1985); Hammer et al., Science 235:53-58 1987)), alpha-1 antitrypsin gene control region which is active in liver (Kelsey et al., Genes and Devel.
  • beta globin gene control region which is active in myeloid cells (Magram et al., Nature 315:338-340 (1985); Kollias et al., Cell 46:89-94 (1986)), myelin basic protein gene control region which is active in oligodendrocyte cells of the brain (Readhead et al., Cell 48:703-712 (1987)), myosin light chain-2 gene control region which is active in skeletal muscle (Shani, Nature 314:283-286 (1985)), and gonadotrophic releasing hormone gene control region which is active in gonadotrophs of the hypothalamus (Mason et al., Science 234:1372-1378 (1986)).
  • a vector in a specific embodiment, contains a promoter operably linked to nucleic acids encoding a desired protein, or a domain, fragment, derivative or homolog, thereof, one or more origins of replication, and optionally, one or more selectable markers (e.g., an antibiotic resistance gene).
  • exemplary plasmid vectors for transformation of E. coli cells include, for example, the pQE expression vectors (available from Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.; see also literature published by Qiagen describing the system).
  • pQE vectors have a phage T5 promoter (recognized by E.
  • coli RNA polymerase and a double lac operator repression module to provide tightly regulated, high-level expression of recombinant proteins in E. coli, a synthetic ribosomal binding site (RBS II) for efficient translation, a 6 ⁇ His tag coding sequence, t 0 and T1 transcriptional tenninators, ColE1 origin of replication, and a beta-lactamase gene for conferring ampicillin resistance.
  • the pQE vectors enable placement of a 6 ⁇ His tag at either the N- or C-terminus of the recombinant protein.
  • Such plasmids include pQE 32, pQE 30, and pQE 31 which provide multiple cloning sites for all three reading frames and provide for the expression of N-terminally 6 ⁇ His-tagged proteins.
  • Other exemplary plasmid vectors for transformation of E. coli cells include, for example, the pET expression vectors (see, U.S. Pat. No. 4,952,496; available from NOVAGEN, Madison, Wis.; see, also literature published by Novagen describing the system).
  • Such plasmids include pET 11 a, which contains the T7lac promoter, T7 terminator, the inducible E. coli lac operator, and the lac repressor gene; pET 12a-c, which contains the T7 promoter, T7 terminator, and the E. coli ompT secretion signal; and pET 15b and pET19b (NOVAGEN, Madison, Wis.), which contain a His-TagTM leader sequence for use in purification with a His column and a thrombin cleavage site that permits cleavage following purification over the column, the T7-lac promoter region and the T7 terminator.
  • pET 11 a which contains the T7lac promoter, T7 terminator, the inducible E. coli lac operator, and the lac repressor gene
  • pET 12a-c which contains the T7 promoter, T7 terminator, and the E. coli ompT secretion signal
  • HZ24 expression vector Exemplary of a vector for mammalian cell expression is the HZ24 expression vector.
  • the HZ24 expression vector was derived from the pCI vector backbone (Promega). It contains DNA encoding the Beta-lactamase resistance gene (AmpR), an F1 origin of replication, a Cytomegalovirus immediate-early enhancer/promoter region (CMV), and an SV40 late polyadenylation signal (SV40).
  • the expression vector also has an internal ribosome entry site (IRES) from the ECMV virus (Clontech) and the mouse dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene.
  • IVS internal ribosome entry site
  • Soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides can be produced by any method known to those of skill in the art including in vivo and in vitro methods. Desired proteins can be expressed in any organism suitable to produce the required amounts and forms of the proteins, such as for example, needed for administration and treatment.
  • Expression hosts include prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms such as E. coli, yeast, plants, insect cells, mammalian cells, including human cell lines and transgenic animals. Expression hosts can differ in their protein production levels as well as the types of post-translational modifications that are present on the expressed proteins. The choice of expression host can be made based on these and other factors, such as regulatory and safety considerations, production costs and the need and methods for purification.
  • expression vectors are available and known to those of skill in the art and can be used for expression of proteins.
  • the choice of expression vector will be influenced by the choice of host expression system.
  • expression vectors can include transcriptional promoters and optionally enhancers, translational signals, and transcriptional and translational termination signals.
  • Expression vectors that are used for stable transformation typically have a selectable marker which allows selection and maintenance of the transformed cells.
  • an origin of replication can be used to amplify the copy number of the vector.
  • Soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides also can be utilized or expressed as protein fusions.
  • an enzyme fusion can be generated to add additional functionality to an enzyme.
  • enzyme fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, fusions of a signal sequence, a tag such as for localization, e.g. a his 6 tag or a myc tag, or a tag for purification, for example, a GST fusion, and a sequence for directing protein secretion and/or membrane association.
  • Prokaryotes especially E. coli, provide a system for producing large amounts of proteins. Transformation of E. coli is simple and rapid technique well known to those of skill in the art.
  • Expression vectors for E. coli can contain inducible promoters, such promoters are useful for inducing high levels of protein expression and for expressing proteins that exhibit some toxicity to the host cells. Examples of inducible promoters include the lac promoter, the trp promoter, the hybrid tac promoter, the T7 and SP6 RNA promoters and the temperature regulated APL promoter.
  • Proteins such as any provided herein, can be expressed in the cytoplasmic environment of E. coli.
  • the cytoplasm is a reducing environment and for some molecules, this can result in the formation of insoluble inclusion bodies.
  • Reducing agents such as dithiothreitol and ⁇ -mercaptoethanol and denaturants, such as guanidine-HCl and urea can be used to resolubilize the proteins.
  • An alternative approach is the expression of proteins in the periplasmic space of bacteria which provides an oxidizing environment and chaperonin-like and disulfide isomerases and can lead to the production of soluble protein.
  • a leader sequence is fused to the protein to be expressed which directs the protein to the periplasm.
  • periplasmic-targeting leader sequences include the pelB leader from the pectate lyase gene and the leader derived from the alkaline phosphatase gene.
  • periplasmic expression allows leakage of the expressed protein into the culture medium. The secretion of proteins allows quick and simple purification from the culture supernatant. Proteins that are not secreted can be obtained from the periplasm by osmotic lysis. Similar to cytoplasmic expression, in some cases proteins can become insoluble and denaturants and reducing agents can be used to facilitate solubilization and refolding. Temperature of induction and growth also can influence expression levels and solubility, typically temperatures between 25° C. and 37° C. are used. Typically, bacteria produce aglycosylated proteins. Thus, if proteins require glycosylation for function, glycosylation can be added in vitro after purification from host cells.
  • Yeasts such as Saccharomyces cerevisae, Schizosaccharomyces pombe, Yarrowia lipolytica, Kluyveromyces lactis and Pichia pastoris are well known yeast expression hosts that can be used for production of proteins, such as any described herein. Yeast can be transformed with episomal replicating vectors or by stable chromosomal integration by homologous recombination. Typically, inducible promoters are used to regulate gene expression. Examples of such promoters include GAL1, GALT and GALS and metallothionein promoters, such as CUP1, AOX1 or other Pichia or other yeast promoter.
  • Expression vectors often include a selectable marker such as LEU2, TRP1, HIS3 and URA3 for selection and maintenance of the transformed DNA.
  • Proteins expressed in yeast are often soluble. Co-expression with chaperonins such as Bip and protein disulfide isomerase can improve expression levels and solubility. Additionally, proteins expressed in yeast can be directed for secretion using secretion signal peptide fusions such as the yeast mating type alpha-factor secretion signal from Saccharomyces cerevisae and fusions with yeast cell surface proteins such as the Aga2p mating adhesion receptor or the Arxula adeninivorans glucoamylase.
  • secretion signal peptide fusions such as the yeast mating type alpha-factor secretion signal from Saccharomyces cerevisae and fusions with yeast cell surface proteins such as the Aga2p mating adhesion receptor or the Arxula adeninivorans glucoamylase.
  • a protease cleavage site such as for the Kex-2 protease can be engineered to remove the fused sequences from the expressed polypeptides as they exit the secretion pathway.
  • Yeast also is capable of glycosylation at Asn-X-Ser/Thr motifs.
  • Insect cells are useful for expressing polypeptides such as hyaluronidase polypeptides.
  • Insect cells express high levels of protein and are capable of most of the post-translational modifications used by higher eukaryotes.
  • Baculovirus have a restrictive host range which improves the safety and reduces regulatory concerns of eukaryotic expression.
  • Typical expression vectors use a promoter for high level expression such as the polyhedrin promoter of baculovirus.
  • baculovirus systems include the baculoviruses such as Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV), and the Bombyx morn nuclear polyhedrosis virus (BmNPV) and an insect cell line such as Sf9 derived from Spodoptera frugiperda, Pseudaletia unipuncta (A7S) and Danaus plexippus (DpN1).
  • AcNPV Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus
  • BmNPV Bombyx morn nuclear polyhedrosis virus
  • Sf9 derived from Spodoptera frugiperda
  • Pseudaletia unipuncta A7S
  • Danaus plexippus Danaus plexippus
  • the nucleotide sequence of the molecule to be expressed is fused immediately downstream of the polyhedrin initiation codon of the virus.
  • Mammalian secretion signals are accurately processed in insect cells and can
  • An alternative expression system in insect cells is the use of stably transformed cells.
  • Cell lines such as the Schneider 2 (S2) and Kc cells (Drosophila melanogaster) and C7 cells (Aedes albopictus) can be used for expression.
  • the Drosophila metallothionein promoter can be used to induce high levels of expression in the presence of heavy metal induction with cadmium or copper.
  • Expression vectors are typically maintained by the use of selectable markers such as neomycin and hygromycin.
  • Mammalian expression systems can be used to express proteins including soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides.
  • Expression constructs can be transferred to mammalian cells by viral infection such as adenovirus or by direct DNA transfer such as liposomes, calcium phosphate, DEAE-dextran and by physical means such as electroporation and microinjection.
  • Expression vectors for mammalian cells typically include an mRNA cap site, a TATA box, a translational initiation sequence (Kozak consensus sequence) and polyadenylation elements. IRES elements also can be added to permit bicistronic expression with another gene, such as a selectable marker.
  • Such vectors often include transcriptional promoter-enhancers for high-level expression, for example the SV40 promoter-enhancer, the human cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter and the long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (RSV). These promoter-enhancers are active in many cell types. Tissue and cell-type promoters and enhancer regions also can be used for expression.
  • CMV human cytomegalovirus
  • RSV Rous sarcoma virus
  • Exemplary promoter/enhancer regions include, but are not limited to, those from genes such as elastase I, insulin, immunoglobulin, mouse mammary tumor virus, albumin, alpha fetoprotein, alpha 1 antitrypsin, beta globin, myelin basic protein, myosin light chain 2, and gonadotropic releasing hormone gene control. Selectable markers can be used to select for and maintain cells with the expression construct.
  • selectable marker genes include, but are not limited to, hygromycin B phosphotransferase, adenosine deaminase, xanthine-guanine phosphoribosyl transferase, aminoglycoside phosphotransferase, dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) and thymidine kinase.
  • expression can be performed in the presence of methotrexate to select for only those cells expressing the DHFR gene.
  • Fusion with cell surface signaling molecules such as TCR- ⁇ and Fc ⁇ RI- ⁇ can direct expression of the proteins in an active state on the cell surface.
  • cell lines are available for mammalian expression including mouse, rat human, monkey, chicken and hamster cells.
  • Exemplary cell lines include but are not limited to CHO, Balb/3T3, HeLa, MT2, mouse NSO (nonsecreting) and other myeloma cell lines, hybridoma and heterohybridoma cell lines, lymphocytes, fibroblasts, Sp2/0, COS, NIH3T3, HEK293, 293S, 2B8, and HKB cells.
  • Cell lines also are available adapted to serum-free media which facilitates purification of secreted proteins from the cell culture media.
  • Examples include CHO-S cells (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif., cat #11619-012) and the serum free EBNA-1 cell line (Pham et al., (2003) Biotechnol. Bioeng. 84:332-42.).
  • Cell lines also are available that are adapted to grow in special mediums optimized for maximal expression. For example, DG44 CHO cells are adapted to grow in suspension culture in a chemically defined, animal product-free medium.
  • Transgenic plant cells and plants can be used to express proteins such as any described herein.
  • Expression constructs are typically transferred to plants using direct DNA transfer such as microprojectile bombardment and PEG-mediated transfer into protoplasts, and with agrobacterium-mediated transformation.
  • Expression vectors can include promoter and enhancer sequences, transcriptional termination elements and translational control elements.
  • Expression vectors and transformation techniques are usually divided between dicot hosts, such as Arabidopsis and tobacco, and monocot hosts, such as corn and rice. Examples of plant promoters used for expression include the cauliflower mosaic virus promoter, the nopaline synthase promoter, the ribose bisphosphate carboxylase promoter and the ubiquitin and UBQ3 promoters.
  • Transformed plant cells can be maintained in culture as cells, aggregates (callus tissue) or regenerated into whole plants.
  • Transgenic plant cells also can include algae engineered to produce hyaluronidase polypeptides. Because plants have different glycosylation patterns than mammalian cells, this can influence the choice of protein produced in these hosts.
  • polypeptides including soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides or other proteins
  • proteins are generally purified from the culture media after removing the cells.
  • cells can be lysed and the proteins purified from the extract.
  • transgenic organisms such as transgenic plants and animals are used for expression, tissues or organs can be used as starting material to make a lysed cell extract.
  • transgenic animal production can include the production of polypeptides in milk or eggs, which can be collected, and if necessary, the proteins can be extracted and further purified using standard methods in the art.
  • Proteins such as soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides, can be purified using standard protein purification techniques known in the art including but not limited to, SDS-PAGE, size fraction and size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate precipitation and ionic exchange chromatography, such as anion exchange. Affinity purification techniques also can be utilized to improve the efficiency and purity of the preparations. For example, antibodies, receptors and other molecules that bind hyaluronidase enzymes can be used in affinity purification. Expression constructs also can be engineered to add an affinity tag to a protein such as a myc epitope, GST fusion or His 6 and affinity purified with myc antibody, glutathione resin and Ni-resin, respectively. Purity can be assessed by any method known in the art including gel electrophoresis and staining and spectrophotometric techniques.
  • compositions of immune globulins and soluble hyaluronidases are provided herein for subcutaneous administration.
  • Formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of soluble hyaluronidases, for example, PH20 are known in the art (see e.g. published U.S. Application Nos. US20040268425, US20050260186 and US20060104968).
  • Soluble hyaluronidases are co-formulated or co-administered with pharmaceutical formulations of immune globulin to enhance the delivery of immune globulins to desired sites within the body by increasing the bioavailability of immune globulins.
  • co-administration or co-formulation of IG with a hyaluronidase can improve the extent and/or rate of absorption and thus bioavailability of an agent by causing more of it to reach the bloodstream and/or less of it being degraded after administration by more rapid permeation.
  • Increased absorption and bioavailability can be achieved, for example, by accelerating interstitial flow and potentially connective transport following administration by applying hydrostatic pressure associated with the volume injection combined with a reduction in impedance to flow associated with degradation of hyaluronan.
  • soluble hyaluronidases can be used to achieve elevated and/or more rapidly achieved concentrations of the immune globulin following subcutaneous administration compared to conventional methods of subcutaneous administration, to provide, for example, a more potent and/or more rapid response for a given dose.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can be used to allow a given response to be achieved with a lower dose of administered IG.
  • the ability of a soluble hyaluronidase to enhance bulk fluid flow at and near a site of injection or infusion also can improve other aspects of associated pharmacologic delivery.
  • the increase in bulk fluid flow can help to allow the volume of fluid injected to be more readily dispersed from the site of injection (reducing potentially painful or other adverse consequences of injection). This is particularly important for subcutaneous infusions to permit higher doses to be administered.
  • co-administration or co-formulation of IG with soluble hyaluronidase provides for a safer or more convenient route of administration compared to conventional intravenous routes of administration.
  • immune globulins can be administered subcutaneously at dosages and frequencies for which current intravenous (IVIG) preparations are prepared and administered.
  • IVIG intravenous
  • the advantages over current subcutaneous formulations of IG is that co-administered or co-formulated hyaluronidase/IG can result in more favorable dosing regimens, for example, less frequent dosing. By less frequent or lower dosing, side effects associated with toxicity can be reduced. Generally, the pharmacokinetic and/or phannacodynamics of subcutaneous IG therapy is improved.
  • subcutaneous administrations of IG also has advantages over current intravenous infusions.
  • subcutaneous infusion permits infusion by the patient or family as opposed to a skilled nurse; infusion can be achieved at higher rates such that IG is infused in 1-3 hours compared to 5-10 hours for conventional IVIG therapies; there is no requirement for functional veins; there is no infusion related side effects such as thrombosis, headache, thrombophlebitis, and nausea and less probability of adverse events; and infusion can be performed at home or anywhere.
  • compositions can be formulated in lyophilized or liquid form. Where the compositions are provided in lyophilized form they can be reconstituted just prior to use by an appropriate buffer, for example, a sterile saline solution.
  • the compositions can be provided together or separately. For purposes herein, such compositions typically are provided separately.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase and IG can be packaged as separate compositions for administration together, sequentially or intermittently.
  • the combinations can be packaged as a kit.
  • the compounds can be formulated into any suitable pharmaceutical preparations for subcutaneous administration such as solutions, suspensions, powders, or sustained release formulations.
  • the compounds are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using techniques and procedures well known in the art (see e.g., Ansel Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Fourth Edition, 1985, 126).
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable compositions are prepared in view of approvals for a regulatory agency or other agency prepared in accordance with generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals and in humans. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • compositions can include carriers such as a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which a hyaluronidase or IG is administered.
  • suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin.
  • Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, generally in purified form or partially purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, and sesame oil. Water is a typical carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • compositions can contain along with an active ingredient: a diluent such as lactose, sucrose, dicalcium phosphate, or carboxymethylcellulose; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate, calcium stearate and talc; and a binder such as starch, natural gums, such as gum acaciagelatin, glucose, molasses, polyvinylpyn- o lidine, celluloses and derivatives thereof, povidone, crospovidones and other such binders known to those of skill in the art.
  • a diluent such as lactose, sucrose, dicalcium phosphate, or carboxymethylcellulose
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate, calcium stearate and talc
  • a binder such as starch, natural gums, such as gum acaciagelatin, glucose, molasses, polyvinylpyn- o lidine, celluloses and derivatives thereof, povidone
  • Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, and ethanol.
  • a composition if desired, also can contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents.
  • compositions typically formulated and administered in unit dosage forms or multiple dosage forms.
  • Each unit dose contains a predetermined quantity of therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent.
  • unit dose forms include ampoules and syringes and individually packaged tablets or capsules.
  • Unit dose forms can be administered in fractions or multiples thereof.
  • a multiple dose form is a plurality of identical unit dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit dose form. Examples of multiple dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pints or gallons.
  • multiple dose form is a multiple of unit doses that are not segregated in packaging.
  • dosage forms or compositions, containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 100% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier can be prepared.
  • compositions provided herein typically are formulated for administration by subcutaneous route, although other routes of administration are contemplated, such as any route known to those of skill in the art including intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intralesional, intraperitoneal injection, epidural, nasal, oral, vaginal, rectal, topical, local, otic, inhalational, buccal (e.g., sublingual), and transdermal administration or any route.
  • routes of administration such as any route known to those of skill in the art including intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intralesional, intraperitoneal injection, epidural, nasal, oral, vaginal, rectal, topical, local, otic, inhalational, buccal (e.g., sublingual), and transdermal administration or any route.
  • Formulations suited for such routes are known to one of skill in the art.
  • Administration can be local, topical or systemic depending upon the locus of treatment.
  • Local administration to an area in need of treatment can be achieved by, for example, but not limited to, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant.
  • Compositions also can be administered with other biologically active agents, either sequentially, intermittently or in the same composition.
  • Administration also can include controlled release systems including controlled release formulations and device controlled release, such as by means of a pump.
  • hyaluronidases are administered so that they reach the interstitium of skin or tissues, thereby degrading the interstitial space for subsequent delivery of immunoglobulin.
  • direct administration under the skin such as by subcutaneous administration methods, is contemplated.
  • local administration can be achieved by injection, such as from a syringe or other article of manufacture containing a injection device such as a needle.
  • local administration can be achieved by infusion, which can be facilitated by the use of a pump or other similar device.
  • Other modes of administration also are contemplated.
  • Pharmaceutical composition can be formulated in dosage forms appropriate for each route of administration.
  • Subcutaneous administration generally characterized by injection or infusion, is contemplated herein.
  • Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions.
  • Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may contain other minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins.
  • Implantation of a slow-release or sustained-release system such that a constant level of dosage is maintained (see, e. g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795) is also contemplated herein.
  • the percentage of active compound contained in such compositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the activity of the compound and the needs of the subject.
  • Injectables are designed for local and systemic administration.
  • local administration is desired for direct administration to the affected interstitium.
  • Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as lyophilized powders, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions.
  • the solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • PBS physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline
  • thickening and solubilizing agents such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances.
  • aqueous vehicles include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection.
  • Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil.
  • Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations can be added to parenteral preparations packaged in multiple-dose containers, which include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride.
  • Isotonic agents include sodium chloride and dextrose.
  • Buffers include phosphate and citrate.
  • Antioxidants include sodium bisulfate.
  • Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride.
  • Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (TWEENs 80).
  • a sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA.
  • Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.
  • the concentration of the pharmaceutically active compound is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect.
  • the exact dose depends on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art.
  • the unit-dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial or a syringe with a needle.
  • the volume of liquid solution or reconstituted powder preparation, containing the pharmaceutically active compound, is a function of the disease to be treated and the particular article of manufacture chosen for package. All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.
  • pharmaceutical preparation can be in liquid form, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions. If provided in liquid form, the pharmaceutical preparations can be provided as a concentrated preparation to be diluted to a therapeutically effective concentration before use.
  • Such liquid preparations can be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid).
  • pharmaceutical preparations can be presented in lyophilized form for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Administration methods can be employed to decrease the exposure of selected compounds to degradative processes, such as proteolytic degradation and immunological intervention via antigenic and immunogenic responses. Examples of such methods include local administration at the site of treatment.
  • Pegylation of therapeutics has been reported to increase resistance to proteolysis, increase plasma half-life, and decrease antigenicity and immunogenicity. Examples of pegylation methodologies are known in the art (see for example, Lu and Felix, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 43: 127-138, 1994; Lu and Felix, Peptide Res., 6: 142-6, 1993; Felix et al., Int. J. Peptide Res., 46: 253-64, 1995; Benhar et al., J. Biol.
  • Pegylation also can be used in the delivery of nucleic acid molecules in vivo.
  • pegylation of adenovirus can increase stability and gene transfer (see, e.g., Cheng et al. (2003) Pharm. Res. 20(9): 1444-51).
  • lyophilized powders which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. They may also be reconstituted and formulated as solids or gels.
  • the sterile, lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving an active compound in a buffer solution.
  • the buffer solution may contain an excipient which improves the stability or other pharmacological component of the powder or reconstituted solution, prepared from the powder. Subsequent sterile filtration of the solution followed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those of skill in the art provides the desired formulation.
  • the lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving an excipient, such as dextrose, sorbital, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent, in a suitable buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art.
  • a selected enzyme is added to the resulting mixture, and stirred until it dissolves.
  • the resulting mixture is sterile filtered or treated to remove particulates and to insure sterility, and apportioned into vials for lyophilization.
  • Each vial will contain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the compound.
  • the lyophilized powder can be stored under appropriate conditions, such as at about 4° C. to room temperature. Reconstitution of this lyophilized powder with a buffer solution provides a formulation for use in parenteral administration.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase provided herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions, typically for single dosage administration, in combination with IG.
  • the selected soluble hyaluronidase is included in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect of the IG in the absence of undesirable side effects on the patient treated.
  • the therapeutically effective concentration can be determined empirically by testing the polypeptides in known in vitro and in vivo systems such as by using the assays provided herein or known in the art (see e.g., Taliani et al. (1996) Anal. Biochem., 240: 60-67; Filocamo et al. (1997) J Virology, 71: 1417-1427; Sudo et al. (1996) Antiviral Res.
  • a therapeutically effective dose is at or about 500 Units to 100,000 Units of a soluble hyaluronidase.
  • soluble hyaluronidase can be administered subcutaneously at or about 500 Units, 1000 Units, 2000 Units, 5000 Units, 10,000 Units, 30,000 Units, 40,000 Units, 50,000 Units, 60,000 Units, 70,000 Units, 80,000 Units, 90,000 Units, 100,000 Units or more.
  • dosages can be provided as a ratio IG administered.
  • hyaluronidase can be administered at 10 U/gram to 500 U/g or more of IG, for example, at or about 10 U/g, 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, 200 U/g, 300 U/g, 400 U/g, 500 U/g or more.
  • volumes of injections or infusions of hyaluronidase contemplated herein are from at or about 0.5 ml, 1 ml, 2 ml, 3 ml, 4 ml, 5 ml, 6 ml, 7 ml, 8 ml, 9 ml, 10 ml, 15 ml, 20 ml, 30 ml, 40 ml, 50 ml or more.
  • the hyaluronidase can be provided as a stock solution at or about 50 U/ml, 100 U/ml, 150 U/ml, 200 U/ml, 400 U/ml or 500 U/ml or can be provided in a more concentrated fonn, for example at or about 1000 U/ml, 1500 Units/ml, 2000 U/ml, 4000 U/ml or 5000 U/ml for use directly or for dilution to the effective concentration prior to use.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can be provided as a liquid or lyophilized formulation. Lyophilized fonnulations are ideal for storage of large Units doses of soluble hyaluronidase.
  • the immune globulin preparations provided herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions for single or multiple dosage use.
  • the IG preparations are formulated in pharmaceutical compositions to achieve dosage regimes (doses and frequencies) for which current intravenous (IVIG) preparations are prepared and administered for particular IG-treatable diseases or conditions.
  • IVIG current intravenous
  • One of skill in the art is familiar with dosage regimes for IVIG administration of particular diseases or conditions.
  • Section H below provides exemplary dosage regimes (doses and frequencies) of IG for particular diseases and conditions.
  • Other dosage regimes are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • the dosage frequency can be daily over an interval of time given over consecutive or alternate days, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more days.
  • the dosage regime is weekly, for example, once every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks or more.
  • immune globulin preparations are formulated for single dose administration in an amount sufficient to provide a once monthly dose, but can be provided in lesser amounts for multiple dosage administrations.
  • once monthly doses of IG preparations can be administered daily, weekly, biweekly or once a month.
  • Dosage regimes can be continued for months or years.
  • the IG preparations can be provided in lyophilized or liquid form as discussed elsewhere herein.
  • the immune globulin is provided in a therapeutically effective dose.
  • Therapeutically effective concentration can be determined empirically by testing the compounds in known in vitro and in vivo systems, such as the assays provided herein.
  • concentration of a selected immune globulin in the composition depends on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the complex, the physicochemical characteristics of the complex, the dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art.
  • the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the tissue being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated.
  • a selected immune globulin preparation to be administered for the treatment of a disease or condition for example an IG-treatable disease or condition
  • concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope thereof.
  • the amount of a selected immune globulin preparation to be administered for the treatment of a disease or condition can be determined by standard clinical techniques.
  • in vitro assays and animal models can be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges.
  • the precise dosage which can be determined empirically, can depend on the particular immune globulin preparation, the regime and dosing schedule with the soluble hyaluronidase, the route of administration, the type of disease to be treated and the seriousness of the disease.
  • the IG preparations have a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v.
  • IG is provided in an amount that permits subcutaneous administration of a dose equivalent to a once monthly IV dose for the particular indication being treated.
  • the particular once monthly IV dose is a function of the disease to be treated, and thus can vary.
  • Exemplary dosages ranges for subcutaneous administration of IG are from at or about 1 gram (g), 5 g, 10 g, 20 g, 30 g, 40 g, 50 g, 60 g, 70 g, 80 g, 90 g, 100 g or 200 g.
  • the particular dosage and formulation thereof depends upon the indication and individual. For example, dosages can be administered at 50 mg/kg body weight (BW), 100 mg/kg BW, 200 mg/kg BW, 300 mg/kg BW, 400 mg/kg BW, 500 mg/kg BW, 600 mg/kg BW, or more. If necessary dosage can be empirically determined.
  • volumes of IG preparations administered subcutaneously can be at or about 50 ml, 100 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml, 700 ml or more.
  • a 10% liquid IG formulation (100 mg/ml) for indications described herein can be administered in a volume of 50 ml to 700 ml to achieve a dosage of 0.5 g to 70 g of IG.
  • Subjects can be dosed at rates of infusion at or about 0.5 ml/kg/BW/h, 1 ml/kg/BW/h, 2 ml/kg/BW/h, 3 ml/kg/BW/h, 4 ml/kg/BW/h, or 5 ml/kg/BW/h.
  • the infusion rate can be empirically determined, and typically is a function of the tolerability of the subject. If an adverse reaction occurs during the infusion, the rate of infusion can be slowed to the rate immediately below that at which the adverse event occurred. If the adverse event resolves in response to the reduction in rate, the infusion rate can be slowly increased at the discretion of the physician.
  • Subcutaneous IG infusion can be facilitated by gravity, pump infusion or injection of a full 20-30 gram dose.
  • intravenous infusion pumps can be employed.
  • IG can be infused at rates at or about 5 ml/h, 10 ml/h, 30 ml/h, 60 ml/h, 120 ml/h, 240 ml/h or 300 ml/h. Infusion rates can be increased during the course of treatment so long as the infusion is tolerated by the patient.
  • time of administration of infusion is at or about 0.5 h, 1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 2.5 h, 3 h, 4 h or more.
  • a second infusion site can be started at the physician and subject's discretion.
  • the second site typically is started at least 10 cm from the initial site.
  • IG infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion-infusion tube.
  • syringes or other containers include, but are not limited to tubes, bottles, syringes or other containers.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can be administered subsequently, intermittently or simultaneously from the IG preparation.
  • the hyaluronidase is administered prior to administration of the IG preparation to permit the hyaluronidase to degrade the hyaluronic acid in the interstitial space.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can be administered 1 minute, 2 minute, 3 minute, 4 minute, 5 minute, 6 minute, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes or 30 minutes prior to administration of the IG preparation.
  • the hyaluronidase is administered together with the immune globulin preparation.
  • the desired proximity of co-administration depends in significant part on the effective half lives of the agents in the particular tissue setting, and the particular disease being treated, and can be readily optimized by testing the effects of administering the agents at varying times in suitable models, such as in suitable animal models. In some situations, the optimal timing of administration of the hyaluronidase will exceed 60 minutes.
  • a soluble hyaluronidase prior to infusion of IG, is injected at a rate of at or about 0.2 ml/min, 0.5 ml/min, 1 ml/min. 2 ml/min, 5 ml/min, 10 ml/min or more.
  • the soluble hyaluronidase can be injected through the same Y-port used for subsequent infusion of IG.
  • the volume of soluble hyaluronidase administered is a function of the dosage required, but can be varied depending on the concentration of a soluble hyaluronidase stock formulation available.
  • soluble hyaluronidase is not administered in volumes greater than about 50 ml, and typically is administered in a volume of 5-30 ml.
  • a syringe pump can be used for the higher volumes, at the discretion of the physician.
  • a second infusion site can be started so that the subject receives the full dosage.
  • An IG preparation can be administered at once, or can be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time.
  • Selected IG preparations can be administered in one or more doses over the course of a treatment time for example over several hours, days, weeks, or months. In some cases, continuous administration is useful. It is understood that the precise dosage and course of administration depends on the indication and patients tolerability.
  • compositions can be administered hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or once. Generally, dosage regimens are chosen to limit toxicity.
  • the attending physician would know how to and when to terminate, interrupt or adjust therapy to lower dosage due to toxicity, or bone marrow, liver or kidney or other tissue dysfunctions. Conversely, the attending physician would also know how to and when to adjust treatment to higher levels if the clinical response is not adequate (precluding toxic side effects).
  • Assays can be used to assess the in vitro and in vivo activities of immune globulin alone or in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase. Included among such assays are those that assess the pharmacokinetic properties of subcutaneously-administered immune globulin, including bioavailability, and tolerability. The biological activity of both immune globulin and hyaluronidase also can be assessed using assays well known in the art. Such assays can be used, for example, to determine appropriate dosages of immune globulin and hyaluronidase, and the frequency of dosing, for treatment.
  • Pharmacokinetic and tolerability studies can be performed using animal models or can be performed during clinical studies with patients.
  • Animal models include, but are not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, dogs, guinea pigs and non-human primate models, such as cynomolgus monkeys or rhesus macaques.
  • pharmacokinetic and tolerability studies are performed using healthy animals.
  • the studies are performed using animal models of a disease for which therapy with immune globulin is considered, such as animal models of any of the diseases and conditions described below.
  • the pharmacokinetics of subcutaneously administered immune globulin can be assessed by measuring such parameters as the maximum (peak) plasma immune globulin concentration (C max ), the peak time (i.e. when maximum plasma immune globulin concentration occurs; T max ), the minimum plasma immune globulin concentration (i.e. the minimum plasma concentration between doses of immune globulin; C min ), the elimination half-life (T 1/2 ) and area under the curve (i.e. the area under the curve generated by plotting time versus plasma inunune globulin concentration; AUC), following administration.
  • C max maximum plasma immune globulin concentration
  • T max peak time
  • minimum plasma immune globulin concentration i.e. the minimum plasma concentration between doses of immune globulin
  • T 1/2 the elimination half-life
  • area under the curve i.e. the area under the curve generated by plotting time versus plasma inunune globulin concentration; AUC
  • the absolute bioavailability of subcutaneously administered immune globulin is determined by comparing the area under the curve of immune globulin following subcutaneous delivery (AUC sc ) with the AUC of immune globulin following intravenous delivery (AUC iv ).
  • the concentration of in globulin in the plasma following subcutaneous administration can be measured using any method known in the art suitable for assessing concentrations of inunune globulin in samples of blood. Exemplary methods include, but are not limited to, ELISA and nephelometry.
  • a range of doses and different dosing frequency of dosing can be administered in the pharmacokinetic studies to assess the effect of increasing or decreasing concentrations of immune globulin and/or hyaluronidase in the dose.
  • Pharmacokinetic properties of subcutaneously administered immune globulin such as bioavailability, also can be assessed with or without co-administration of hyaluronidase.
  • dogs, such as beagles can be administered imnnme globulin subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase, or alone.
  • Intravenous doses of immune globulin also are given to another group of beagles.
  • Blood samples can then be taken at various time points and the amount of immune globulin in the plasma determine, such as by nephelometry.
  • the AUC can then be measured and the bioavailability of subcutaneously administered immune globulin administered with or without hyaluronidase can be determined.
  • Such studies can be performed to assess the effect of co-administration with hyaluronidase on pharmacokinetic properties, such as bioavailability, of subcutaneously administered immune globulin.
  • Adverse reactions can include, but are not limited to, injection site reactions, such as edema or swelling, headache, fever, fatigue, chills, flushing, dizziness, urticaria, wheezing or chest tightness, nausea, vomiting, rigors, back pain, chest pain, muscle cramps, seizures or convulsions, changes in blood pressure and anaphylactic or severe hypersensitivity responses.
  • injection site reactions such as edema or swelling, headache, fever, fatigue, chills, flushing, dizziness, urticaria, wheezing or chest tightness, nausea, vomiting, rigors, back pain, chest pain, muscle cramps, seizures or convulsions, changes in blood pressure and anaphylactic or severe hypersensitivity responses.
  • a range of doses and different dosing frequencies are be administered in the safety and tolerability studies to assess the effect of increasing or decreasing concentrations of immune globulin and/or hyaluronidase in the dose.
  • immune globulin to act as a therapeutic agent can be assessed in vitro or in vivo.
  • in vitro assays can be performed to assess the ability of inunune globulin to neutralize viral or bacterial infectivity (Hiemstra et al., (1994) J Lab Clin Med 123:241-6).
  • Other in vitro assays can be utilized to assess other biological activities of immune globulin.
  • the ability of immune globulin preparations to interact with and modulate complement activation products, bind idiotypic antibody, bind Fc receptors on macrophages, and suppress various inflammatory mediators including cytokines, chemokines, and metalloproteinases can be assessed using any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, ELISA, Western blot, Northern blot, and flow cytometry to assess marker expression.
  • ELISA Western blot
  • Northern blot cytometry
  • the effect of immune globulin on the expression of chemokine receptors on peripheral blood mononuclear cells can be assessed using flow cytomtery (Trebst et al., (2006) Eur J Neurology).
  • the effect of immune globulin on metalloproteinase expression in macrophages can be assessed using Northern blot analysis (Shapiro et al., (2002) Cancer 95:2032-2037).
  • Irnmune globulin can be administered to animal models infected with one or more microorganisms and the effect on progression of infection can be assessed, such as by measuring the number of microorganisms or measuring weight as a marker of morbidity.
  • the therapeutic effect of immune globulin also can be assessed using animal models of the diseases and conditions for which therapy using immune globulin is considered.
  • Such animal models include, but are not limited to, small animal models for X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), SCID, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, Kawasaki disease, Guillain-Barré syndrome, ITP, polymyositis, Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome, Myasthenia gravis and Moersch-Woltmann syndrome (Czitrom et al (1985) J Immunol 134:2276-2280, Ellmeier et al., (2000) J Exp Med.
  • XLA X-linked agammaglobulinemia
  • SCID Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome
  • Kawasaki disease Guillain-Barré syndrome
  • ITP polymyositis
  • Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome Myasthenia gravis
  • Moersch-Woltmann syndrome Crzitrom et al (1985) J Immunol 134:2276-2280, Ellmeier e
  • Hyaluronidase activity can be assessed using methods well known in the art.
  • activity is measured using a microturbidity assay. This is based on the formation of an insoluble precipitate when hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin.
  • the activity is measured by incubating hyaluronidase with sodium hyaluronate (hyaluronic acid) for a set period of time (e.g. 10 minutes) and then precipitating the undigested sodium hyaluronate with the addition of acidified serum albumin.
  • the turbidity of the resulting sample is measured at 640 nm after an additional development period.
  • the decrease in turbidity resulting from hyaluronidase activity on the sodium hyaluronate substrate is a measure of hyaluronidase enzymatic activity.
  • hyaluronidase activity is measured using a microtiter assay in which residual biotinylated hyaluronic acid is measured following incubation with hyaluronidase (see e.g. Frost and Stern (1997) Anal. Biochem. 251:263-269, U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050260186).
  • the free carboxyl groups on the glucuronic acid residues of hyaluronic acid are biotinylated, and the biotinylated hyaluronic acid substrate is covalently couple to a microtiter plate.
  • the residual biotinylated hyaluronic acid substrate is detected using an avidin-peroxidase reaction, and compared to that obtained following reaction with hyaluronidase standards of known activity.
  • Other assays to measure hyaluronidase activity also are known in the art and can be used in the methods herein (see e.g. Delpech et al., (1995) Anal. Biochem. 229:35-41; Takahashi et al., (2003) Anal. Biochem. 322:257-263).
  • hyaluronidase to act as a spreading or diffusing agent
  • trypan blue dye can be injected subcutaneously with or without hyaluronidase into the lateral skin on each side of nude mice. The dye area is then measured, such as with a microcaliper, to determine the ability of hyaluronidase to act as a spreading agent (U.S. Patent No. 20060104968).
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to treat any condition that is amendable to treatment with inunune globulin.
  • This section provides exemplary therapeutic uses of IG.
  • the therapeutic uses described below are exemplary and do not limit the applications of the methods described herein.
  • Therapeutic uses include, but are not limited to, immunoglobulin replacement therapy and immunomodulation therapy for various immunological, hematological, neurological, inflammatory, dermatological and/or infectious diseases and conditions.
  • immune globulin is administered to augment the inumme response in healthy patients, such as following possible exposure to infectious disease (e.g. accidental needle stick injury). It is within the skill of a treating physician to identify such diseases or conditions.
  • Immune globulin can be co-administered with hyaluronidase subcutaneously, in combination with other agents used in the treatment of these diseases and conditions.
  • agents that can be administered include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, chemotherapeutics, steroidal anti-inflammatories, non-steroidal anti-inflammatories, and other immunomodulatory agents such as cytokines, chemokines and growth factors.
  • a particular dosage and duration and treatment protocol can be empirically determined or extrapolated.
  • exemplary doses of intravenously administered immune globulin can be used as a starting point to determine appropriate dosages. Dosage levels can be determined based on a variety of factors, such as body weight of the individual, general health, age, the activity of the specific compound employed, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity and course of the disease, and the patient's disposition to the disease and the judgment of the treating physician.
  • dosages of immune globulin are from or about 100 mg per kg body weight (i.e.
  • dosages of hyaluronidase are from or about 10 U/gram to 500 U/g or more of immune globulin, for example, at or about 10 U/g, 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, 200 U/g, 300 U/g, 400 U/g, 500 U/g or more.
  • the amount to administer will be a function of the indication treated, and possibly side effects that will be tolerated. Dosages can be empirically determined using recognized models for each disorder.
  • a maintenance dose of immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase, if necessary, and the dosage, the dosage form, or frequency of administration, or a combination thereof can be modified.
  • a subject can require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
  • Immune globulin can be used to treat primary immune deficiency with antibody deficiency.
  • Primary immune deficiency encompasses many disorders that are characterized by a deficiency of one or more proteins of the immune system. Typically, primary immune deficiencies are inherited disorders, and many are manifest by failure of protective antibody production. Thus, immune globulin can be administered as immunoglobulin replacement therapy to patients presenting with such diseases.
  • Exemplary of primary immune deficiencies include, but are not limited to, common variable immunodeficiency (CVID), congenital agammaglobulinemia, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, severe combined inummodeficiency (SCID), primary hypogammaglobulinemia, primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency, X-linked agammaglobulinaemia (XLA), hypogammaglobulinaemia of infancy, and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies.
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with primary immune deficiency with antibody deficiency at doses similar to the doses used for intravenous administration of immune globulin.
  • Exemplary doses include, for example, between 100 mg/kg BW and 800 mg/kg BW immune globulin, at four week intervals. The dose can be increased or decreased, as can the frequency of the doses, depending on the clinical response.
  • hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies, such as Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM), non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL) & other relevant malignancies and post-hematopoietic stem cell transplantation, are susceptible to bacterial infections due to.
  • Hypogammaglobulinemia is caused by a lack of B-lymphocytes and a resulting low level of antibodies in the blood, and can occur in patients with CLL, MM, NHL and as a result of both leukemia-related immune dysfunction and therapy-related immunosuppression.
  • the deficiency in humoral immunity is largely responsible for the increased risk of infection-related morbidity and mortality in these patients, especially by encapsulated microorganisms.
  • Streptococcus pneumoniae, Haemophilus influenzae, and Staphyloccus aureus, as well as Legionella and Nocardia spp. are frequent bacterial pathogens that cause pneumonia in patients with CLL.
  • Opportunistic infections such as Pneumocystis carinii, fungi, viruses, and mycobacteria also have been observed.
  • the number and severity of infections in these patients can be significantly reduced by administration of immune globulin (Griffiths et al., (1989) Blood 73:366-368, Chapel et al.
  • Such patients can be administered immune globulin subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase using the methods described herein to prevent recurrent infections.
  • exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies.
  • about 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase can be administered subcutaneously every 3 to 4 weeks.
  • an additional dose of 400 mg/kg BW can be administered in the first month of therapy where the patient's serum IgG is less than 4 g/L.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered, and the frequency of the doses can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
  • Kawasaki disease is an acute, febrile, multi-system disease of children and young infants often involving the coronary arteries. It also is known as lymph node syndrome, mucocutaneous node disease, infantile polyarteritis and Kawasaki syndrome, and is a poorly understood self-limited vasculitis that affects many organs, including the skin and mucous membranes, lymph nodes, blood vessel walls, and the heart. Coronary artery aneurysms can occur from the second week of illness during the convalescent stage.
  • vasculitis results from an immune reaction characterized by T-cell and macrophage activation to an unknown antigen, secretion of cytokines, polyclonal B-cell hyperactivity, and the formation of autoantibodies to endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells.
  • an immune reaction characterized by T-cell and macrophage activation to an unknown antigen, secretion of cytokines, polyclonal B-cell hyperactivity, and the formation of autoantibodies to endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells.
  • one or more uncharacterized common infectious agents possibly with superantigen activity, may trigger the disease.
  • Immune globulin administered early in Kawasaki disease can prevent coronary artery pathology.
  • Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with ongoing inflammation associated with Kawasaki disease can ameliorate symptoms.
  • Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with Kawasaki disease.
  • a patient with Kawasaki disease can be administered about 1-2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin. This can be administered, for example, in four doses of 400 mg/kg BW for four consecutive days. In another example, 1 g/kg BW immune globulin is administered as a single dose over a 10 hour period. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
  • Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy is a neurological disorder characterized by progressive weakness and impaired sensory function in the legs and arms.
  • the disorder which is sometimes called chronic relapsing polyneuropathy, is caused by damage to the myelin sheath of the peripheral nerves.
  • CIDP is more common in young adults and in men more so than women. It often presents with symptoms that include tingling or numbness (beginning in the toes and fingers), weakness of the arms and legs, loss of deep tendon reflexes (areflexia), fatigue, and abnormal sensations.
  • CIDP is closely related to Guillain-Barre syndrome and it is considered the chronic counterpart of that acute disease.
  • immune globulin can be co-administered with hyaluronidase subcutaneously to patients presenting with CIDP using the methods described herein.
  • Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with CIDP.
  • a patient with CIDP is administered about 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase. This can be administered, for example, in five doses of 400 mg/kg BW for five consecutive days.
  • the amount of inunune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
  • Guillain-Barré syndrome is a neurologic autoimmune disorder involving inflammatory demyelination of peripheral nerves.
  • the first symptoms include varying degrees of weakness or tingling sensations in the legs, which can spread to the arms and upper body. These symptoms can increase in intensity until the muscles cannot be used at all and the patient is almost totally paralyzed, resulting in a life-threatening condition. Although recovery is generally good or complete in the majority of patients, persistent disability has been reported to occur in about 20% and death in 4 to 15% of patients.
  • Guillain-Barré syndrome can occur a few days or weeks after symptoms of a respiratory or gastrointestinal viral infection. In some instances, surgery or vaccinations can trigger the syndrome. The disorder can develop over the course of hours or days, or it may take up to 3 to 4 weeks.
  • a nerve conduction velocity (NCV) test can give a doctor clues to aid the diagnosis.
  • a spinal tap can be used in diagnosis as the cerebrospinal fluid in Guillain-Barré syndrome patients typically contains more protein than normal
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients in combination with hyaluronidase at an appropriate dose, such as, for example, a dose similar to the dose use to administer immune globulin intravenously to patients with Guillain-Barre syndrome.
  • a patient with Guillain-Barre syndrome can administered about 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase, subcutaneously. This can be administered, for example, in five doses of 400 mg/kg BW for five consecutive days.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decrease depending on, for example, the severity of the disease and the clinical response to therapy, which can be readily evaluated by one of skill in the art. 6.
  • Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura also known as primary immune thrombocytopenic purpura and autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura
  • ITP Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura
  • platelet count thrombocytopenia
  • thrombocytopenia a reduction in platelet count (thrombocytopenia) resulting from shortened platelet survival due to anti-platelet antibodies.
  • platelet counts are very low (e.g. ⁇ 30 ⁇ 10 9 /L)
  • bleeding into the skin (pura) and mucous membranes can occur.
  • Bone marrow platelet production megakaryopoiesis
  • ITP can present as chronic and acute forms.
  • ITP chronic swine fever
  • women aged 15-50 years although some reports suggest increasing incidence with age.
  • ITP is relatively common in patients with HIV. While ITP can be found at any stage of the infection, its prevalence increases as HIV disease advances.
  • Immune globulin can be used to treat patients with ITP (Godeau et al. (1993) Blood 82(5):1415-21, Godeau et al. (1999) Br J Haematol 1999; 107(4):716-9).
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients in combination with hyaluronidase at a dose similar to the dose use to administer immune globulin intravenously, to treat patients with ITP.
  • a patient with ITP can administered about 1 to 2 g/kg of immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase, subcutaneously. This can be administered over several days, or can be administered in one dose.
  • five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin on consecutive days is administered.
  • 1 g/kg BW is administered for 1-2 consecutive days, depending on platelet count and clinical response.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered, and the frequency of the doses can be increased or decrease depending on, for example, platelet count and the clinical response to therapy, which can be readily evaluated by one of skill in the art.
  • Inflammatory Myopathies Polymyositis, Dermatomyositis and Inclusion Body Myositis
  • Inflammatory myopathies are a group of muscle diseases involving the inflammation and degeneration of skeletal muscle tissues. These disorders are acquired and all present with significant muscle weakness and the presence of an inflammatory response within the muscle. Dermatomyositis (DM) is the most easily recognized of the inflammatory myopathies due to its distinctive rash, which occurs as a patchy, dusky, reddish or lilac rash on the eyelids, cheeks, and bridge of the nose, and on the back or upper chest, elbows, knees and knuckles. In some patients, calcified nodules or hardened bumps develop under the skin. The rash often precedes muscle weakness, which typically develops over a period of weeks but may develop over months or even days.
  • DM Dermatomyositis
  • PM Polymyositis
  • IBM Inclusion body myositis
  • IBM is very similar to polymyositis.
  • Onset of muscle weakness in IBM is usually very gradual, taking place over months or years. It is different from PM in that both proximal and distal muscles are affected, while generally only the proximal muscles are affected in PM.
  • Typical findings include weakness of the wrist flexors and finger flexors. Atrophy of the forearms is characteristic of the disease, and atrophy of the quadriceps muscle is common with varying degrees of weakness in other muscles.
  • Approximately half of the patients afflicted with IBM have difficulty swallowing. Symptoms of IBM usually begin after age 50, although no age group is excluded. IBM occurs more frequently in men than women. About one in ten cases of IBM may be hereditary.
  • Immune globulin can improve muscle strength, reduce inflammation and reduce disease progression and severity (Dalakas et al. (1993) N Engl J Med 329(27):1993-2000; Dalakas et al. (2001) Neurology 56(3):323-7, Dalakas (2004) Pharmacol Ther 102(3):177-93, Walter et al. (2000) J Neurol 247(1):22-8).
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients with DM, PM or IBM in combination with hyaluronidase at a dose similar to the dose used to administer immune globulin intravenously. For example, 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin can be administered, typically over several days, such as, for example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW on consecutive days.
  • Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome is a rare autoimmune disorder of neuromuscular transmission first recognized clinically in association with lung cancer and subsequently in cases in which no neoplasm was detected.
  • Patients with LEMS have a presynaptic neuromuscular junction defect. The disease is characterized clinically by proximal muscle weakness with augmentation of strength after exercise, mild oculomotor signs, depressed deep tendon reflexes and autonomic dysfunction (dry mouth, constipation, erectile failure).
  • Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with LEMS can ameliorate symptoms.
  • Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with LEMS.
  • a patient with LEMS can be administered 2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin over several doses.
  • five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin can be administered on five consecutive days.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
  • Multifocal motor neuropathy with conduction block is an acquired immune-mediated demyelinating neuropathy with slowly progressive weakness, fasciculations, and cramping, without significant sensory involvement.
  • the duration of disease prior to diagnosis ranges from several months to more than 15 years.
  • the precise cause of MMN is unknown.
  • Histopathologic and electrodiagnostic studies demonstrate the presence of both demyelinating and axonal injury. Motor nerves are primarily affected, although mild demyelination has been demonstrated in sensory nerves as well.
  • Efficacy of immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive treatment further supports the immune nature of MMN. Titers of anti-GM1 antibodies are elevated in over half of the patients with MMN. Although the role of the anti-GM1 antibodies in the disease in unknown, their presence can be used as a diagnostic marker for MMN.
  • Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with MMN can to ameliorate symptoms.
  • Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with MMN.
  • a patient with MMN can be administered 2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin over several doses.
  • five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin can be administered on five consecutive days.
  • 1 g/kg BW can be administered on 2 consecutive days.
  • Some patients can be given maintenance therapy, which can include, for example, doses of 400 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW, given every 2-6 weeks.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate, taking into account the patients response.
  • MG Myasthenia gravis
  • AChR acetylcholine receptors
  • MoSK muscle-specific tyrosine kinase
  • the clinical features of MG include fluctuating weakness and fatigability of voluntary muscles, particularly levator palpebrae, extraocular, bulbar, limb and respiratory muscles. Patients usually present with unilateral or bilateral drooping of eyelid (ptosis), double vision (diplopia), difficulty in swallowing (dysphagia) and proximal muscle weakness.
  • Myasthenia gravis occurs in all ethnic groups and both genders. It most commonly affects young adult women under 40 and older men over 60, but it can occur at any age. In some instances, thymectomy is performed to reduce symptoms.
  • Immune globulin can be used, for example, as maintenance therapy for patients with moderate to severe MG, typically when other treatments have been ineffective caused severe side effects, and also can be administered prior to thymectomy or during an acute exacerbation of the disease (myasthemic crisis). Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Myasthenia gravis using the methods described herein. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with MG. For example, a patient with MG can be administered doses of 400 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW every 4-6 weeks for maintenance therapy.
  • 1-2 g/kg BW Prior to thymectomy or during myasthemic crisis, 1-2 g/kg BW can be administered over several doses, such as, for example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW on five consecutive days. In another example, 1 g/kg BW can be administered on 2 consecutive days.
  • Moersch-Woltmann syndrome also known as stiff person syndrome or stiffman syndrome, is a rare neurological disorder with features of an autoimmune disease. Patients present with symptoms related to muscular rigidity and superimposed episodic spasms. Muscle rigidity spreads to involve axial muscles, primarily abdominal and thoracolumbar, as well as proximal limb muscles. Typically, co-contraction of truncal agonist and antagonistic muscles leads to a board-like appearance with hyperlordosis. Less frequently, respiratory muscle involvement leads to breathing difficulty and facial muscle involvement to a mask-like face. Treatment with immune globulin can effect decreased stiffness and heightened sensitivity scores in patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome (Dalakas et al.
  • Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome using the methods described herein.
  • Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome.
  • immune globulin can be administered at doses of 400 mg/kg BW on five consecutive days.
  • Some patients can be given maintenance therapy, which can include, for example, 1-2 g/kg BW immune globulin every 4-6 weeks.
  • the amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
  • IG contains antibodies that bind to beta amyloid (AB), which is a central component of the plaque in the brains of Alzheimer's patients.
  • AB beta amyloid
  • immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Alzheimer's disease using the methods described herein.
  • Subjects to be treated include patients having mild, moderate or advanced Alzheimer's disease. It is within the level of skill of a treating physician to identify patients for treatment.
  • Immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase can be administered every week, every two weeks or once a month. Treatment can continue over the course of months or years.
  • IG can be administered at doses at or between 200 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW every week or every two weeks, and generally at least 200 mg/kg to 2 g/kg BW at least once a month.
  • Treatment with immune globulin can effect an increase in patients' anti-amyloid beta antibody levels compared to levels before treatment.
  • immune globulin can be used in the treatment of many conditions.
  • immune globulin can be used a the primary treatment, while in other cases, it is administered as second-line therapy when standard therapies have proven ineffective, have become intolerable, or are contraindicated. It is within the skill of a treating physician to identify such diseases or conditions.
  • Exemplary of these include, but are not limited to, secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic immunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome (including autoimmune haemolytic anaemia with immune thrombocytopenia); Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Alzheimer's Disease, Haemophagocytic syndrome; High-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion pur
  • Immune globulin also has been shown to have antimicrobial activity against a number of bacterial, viral and fungal infections, including, but not limited to, Haemophilus influenzae type B, Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae types 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, and 23, Adenovirus types 2 and 5, Cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus VCA, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Herpes simplex virus-1, Herpes simplex virus-2, Influenza A, Measles, Parainfluenza types 1, 2 and 3, Polio, Varicella zoster virus, Apergillus and Candida albicans.
  • Haemophilus influenzae type B Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Strepto
  • immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with bacterial, viral and fungal infections to augment the patient's immune system and treat the disease.
  • antibiotics or other antimicrobials also are administered.
  • compositions of immune globulin and a soluble hyaluronidase can be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a pharmaceutical composition which is effective for treating a IG-treatable disease or condition, and a label that indicates that the composition and combinations are to be used for treating a IG-treatable diseases and conditions.
  • Exemplary of articles of manufacture are containers including single chamber and dual chamber containers.
  • the containers include, but are not limited to, tubes, bottles and syringes.
  • the containers can further include a needle for subcutaneous administration.
  • the articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials.
  • Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are well known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,323,907, 5,033,252 and 5,052,558, each of which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment.
  • a wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any IG-treatable disease or condition.
  • Kits can include a pharmaceutical composition described herein and an item for administration.
  • compositions can be supplied with a device for administration, such as a syringe, an inhaler, a dosage cup, a dropper, or an applicator.
  • the kit can, optionally, include instructions for application including dosages, dosing regimens and instructions for modes of administration.
  • Kits also can include a pharmaceutical composition described herein and an item for diagnosis. For example, such kits can include an item for measuring the concentration, amount or activity of IG.
  • Soluble Recombinant Human PH20 (rHuPH20) Facilitates Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin (IG) and Bioavailability
  • Subcutaneous (SQ) administration of immune globulin (IG) results in reduced bioavailability compared to intravenous (IV) administration.
  • SQ immune globulin
  • IV intravenous
  • AUC area under the time-concentration curve
  • 1500 U/ml rHuPH20 was used, it was diluted as follows: a) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 solution needed was 1.5 ml of below, it was diluted 1:10 using normal saline for injection; b) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 needed was above 1.5 ml but below 15 ml, it was diluted to 15 l with normal saline for injection; c) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 solution needed was 15 ml or above, it was used undiluted.
  • the GGL was infused through the same 24-gauge SQ needle beginning at a dose that was 1 ⁇ 4 of the 4-week dose (i.e. 1 week dose) to determine the amount of rHuPH20 needed to give one fourth of the 4-week dose in a single site.
  • Each patient was assessed to determine if the infusion was tolerated; the infusion was deemed not to be tolerated if there were moderate or severe local reactions requiring more than one site of administration or an inability to complete the infusion in less than 3 hours.
  • the one-half dose (two week dose) was administered using rHuPH20 at 100 U/g GGL, and the dose of rHuPH20 was further reduced to 66 U/g GGL, then 50 U/g GGL.
  • the dose of rHuPH20 was repeated, on a per-gram GGL basis, with increased amounts of GGL until a full 4-week dose of GGL in a single site was tolerated. If the amount of rHuPH20 was not tolerated at any point, then that weekly dose of GGL was repeated at the next interval and the amount of rHuPH20 increased until the dose was tolerated. If a subject fails to tolerate a dose for 2 successive increases in rHuPH20 dose (i.e. 3 attempts at a distinct dose of GGL), then the previously tolerated dose was determined to be the maximum tolerated dose.
  • PK pharmacokinetic
  • PK analysis was performed on serum IgG levels.
  • the 7 patients enrolled in the PK assessment phase of this study achieved monthly doses of 27 to 61 grams of GGL in a single site using 50 U of rHuPH20 per gram GGL (see Table 3).
  • the PK study was performed after receiving a second monthly dose infusion of GGL.
  • Serum samples were collected pre-infusion, 1 h post-infusion and on days 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 14, 21 and 28 (if on 28 day schedule) post-infusion.
  • the pharmacokinetic parameters of the 7 patients are depicted in Table 7.
  • the ratio of AUC(SQ) to AUC(IV) for the 7 patients is shown in Table 8.
  • the results show that five of the 7 patients had AUC(SQ) within 90% of AUC (IV).
  • Increasing the dose or rHuPH20 four-fold in the 2 subjects with a ratio less than 90% did not further improve bioavailability.
  • rHuPH20 by injection prior to infusion with GGL made it possible to infuse as much as 600 ml of GGL in a single subcutaneous site at infusion rates up to 300 ml per hour in this study.
  • the rate was limited primarily by the IV pumps that were used, which are designed to alarm and shut off when the IV infiltrates and pressure increases. Although pump shut off did not occur until rates approached the 300 ml/h, the need to restart the pump did increase the time of infusion. Since there is no need to pressure alarms for subcutaneous administration, the problem of shutting off should be eliminated by switching to pumps capable of generating more pressure without alarming.
  • the mean bioavailability of GGL upon subcutaneously administering in combination with rHuPH20 was 92% of the bioavailability of GGL following IV administration.
  • This study suggests that the increased diffusion afforded by the rHuPH20 improved absorption of GGL.
  • the trough levels achieved by monthly subcutaneous dosing of GGL in this study are identical to those achieved by IV administration.
  • subcutaneous administration of GGL in combination with rHuPH20 requires only a single SQ site and can be achieved at rates of infusion up to 300 ml/h.
  • rHuPH20 facilitated administration of a full monthly dose of GGL in a single site at rates up to 300 ml/h in a group of adult immunodeficient subjects.
  • the bioavailability of the combination was 92% of the IV bioavailability, based on AUC of the time versus IgG concentration curve. This suggests that rHuPH20 improves absorption of subcutaneous administered GGL. Most of the local side effects were mild and did not result in slowing or interrupting the infusions.
  • the HZ24 plasmid (set forth in SEQ ID NO:52) was used to transfect Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (see e.g. application Ser. Nos. 10,795,095, 11/065,716 and 11/238,171).
  • the HZ24 plasmid vector for expression of soluble rHuPH20 contains a pCI vector backbone (Promega), DNA encoding amino acids 1-482 of human PH20 hyaluronidase (SEQ ID NO:49), an internal ribosomal entry site (IRES) from the ECMV virus (Clontech), and the mouse dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene.
  • the pCl vector backbone also includes DNA encoding the Beta-lactamase resistance gene (AmpR), an f1 origin of replication, a Cytomegalovirus immediate-early enhancer/promoter region (CMV), a chimeric intron, and an SV40 late polyadenylation signal (SV40).
  • AmpR Beta-lactamase resistance gene
  • CMV Cytomegalovirus immediate-early enhancer/promoter region
  • SV40 late polyadenylation signal SV40 late polyadenylation signal
  • the DNA encoding the soluble rHuPH20 construct contains an Nhel site and a Kozak consensus sequence prior to the DNA encoding the methionine at amino acid position 1 of the native 35 amino acid signal sequence of human PH20, and a stop codon following the DNA encoding the tyrosine corresponding to amino acid position 482 of the human PH20 hyaluronidase set forth in SEQ ID NO:1), followed by a BamHI restriction site.
  • the construct pCI-PH20-IRES-DHER-SV40pa results in a single mRNA species driven by the CMV promoter that encodes amino acids 1-482 of human PH20 (set forth in SEQ ID NO:3) and amino acids 1-186 of mouse dihydrofolate reductase (set forth in SEQ ID NO:53), separated by the internal ribosomal entry site (IRES).
  • the cells were removed from the cuvettes after electroporation and transferred into 5 mL of Modified CD-CHO media for DHFR( ⁇ ) cells, supplemented with 4 mM Glutamine and 18 ml/L Plurionic F68/L (Gibco), and allowed to grow in a well of a 6-well tissue culture plate without selection for 2 days at 37° C. in 5% CO 2 in a humidified incubator.
  • tissue culture media was removed from each well and tested for the presence of hyaluronidase activity, using the microturbidity assay described in Example 3.
  • Clones 3D3, 3E5, 2G8, 2D9, 1E11, and 4D10 were plated into 96-well round bottom tissue culture plates using a two-dimensional infinite dilution strategy in which cells were diluted 1:2 down the plate, and 1:3 across the plate, starting at 5000 cells in the top left hand well.
  • Diluted clones were grown in a background of 500 non-transfected DG44 CHO cells per well, to provide necessary growth factors for the initial days in culture.
  • Ten plates were made per subclone, with 5 plates containing 50 nM methotrexate and 5 plates without methotrexate.
  • Clone 3D3 produced 24 visual subclones (13 from the no methotrexate treatment, and 11 from the 50 nM methotrexate treatment. Significant hyaluronidase activity was measured in the supernatants from 8 of the 24 subclones (>50 Units/mL), and these 8 subclones were expanded into T-25 tissue culture flasks. Clones isolated from the methotrexate treatment protocol were expanded in the presence of 50 nM methotrexate. Clone 3D35M was further expanded in 500 nM methotrexate giving rise to clones producing in excess of 1,000 Units/ml in shaker flasks (clone 3D35M; or Gen1 3D35M). A master cell bank (MCB) of the 3D35M cells was then prepared.
  • MBC master cell bank
  • Hyaluronidase activity of soluble rHuPH20 in samples such as cell cultures, purification fractions and purified solutions was determined using a tubidometric assay, which based on the formation of an insoluble precipitate when hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin.
  • the activity is measured by incubating soluble rHuPH20 with sodium hyaluronate (hyaluronic acid) for a set period of time (10 minutes) and then precipitating the undigested sodium hyaluronate with the addition of acidified serum albumin.
  • the turbidity of the resulting sample is measured at 640 nm after a 30 minute development period.
  • the decrease in turbidity resulting from enzyme activity on the sodium hyaluronate substrate is a measure of the soluble rHuPH20 hyaluronidase activity.
  • the method is performed using a calibration curve generated with dilutions of a soluble rHuPH20 assay working reference standard, and sample activity measurements are made relative to this calibration curve.
  • Enzyme Diluent Solutions Dilutions of the sample were prepared in Enzyme Diluent Solutions.
  • the Enzyme Diluent Solution was prepared by dissolving 33.0 ⁇ 0.05 mg of hydrolyzed gelatin in 25.0 mL of the 50 mM PIPES Reaction Buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM PIPES, pH 5.5) and 25.0 mL of SWFI, and diluting 0.2 mL of 25% Buminate solution into the mixture and vortexing for 30 seconds. This was performed within 2 hours of use and stored on ice until needed.
  • the samples were diluted to an estimated 1-2 U/mL. Generally, the maximum dilution per step did not exceed 1:100 and the initial sample size for the first dilution was not be less than 20 ⁇ L.
  • the minimum sample volumes needed to perform the assay were: In-process Samples, FPLC Fractions: 80 ⁇ L; Tissue Culture Supernatants:1 mL; Concentrated Material 80 ⁇ L; Purified or Final Step Material: 80 ⁇ L.
  • the dilutions were made in in triplicate in a Low Protein Binding 96-well plate, and 30 ⁇ L of each dilution was transferred to Optilux black/clear bottom plates (BD BioSciences).
  • Dilutions of known soluble rHuPH20 with a concentration of 2.5 U/mL were prepared in Enzyme Diluent Solution to generate a standard curve and added to the Optilux plate in triplicate.
  • the dilutions included 0 U/mL, 0.25 U/mL, 0.5 U/mL, 1.0 U/mL, 1.5 U/mL, 2.0 U/mL, and 2.5 U/mL.
  • “Reagent blank” wells that contained 60 ⁇ L of Enzyme Diluent Solution were included in the plate as a negative control.
  • the plate was then covered and warmed on a heat block for 5 minutes at 37° C. The cover was removed and the plate was shaken for 10 seconds.
  • the plate was returned to the plate to the heat block and the MULTIDROP 384 Liquid Handling Device was primed with the warm 0.25 mg/mL sodium hyaluronate solution (prepared by dissolving 100 mg of sodium hyaluronate (LifeCore Biomedical) in 20.0 mL of SWFI. This was mixed by gently rotating and/or rocking at 2-8° C. for 2-4 hours, or until completely dissolved).
  • the reaction plate was transferred to the MULTIDROP 384 and the reaction was initiated by pressing the start key to dispense 30 ⁇ L sodium hyaluronate into each well.
  • the plate was then removed from the MULTIDROP 384 and shaken for 10 seconds before being transferred to a heat block with the plate cover replaced. The plate was incubated at 37° C. for 10 minutes
  • the MULTIDROP 384 was prepared to stop the reaction by priming the machine with Serum Working Solution and changing the volume setting to 240 ⁇ L.
  • 25 mL of Serum Stock Solution [1 volume of Horse Serum (Sigma) was diluted with 9 volumes of 500 mM Acetate Buffer Solution and the pH was adjusted to 3.1 with hydrochloric acid] in 75 mL of 500 mM Acetate Buffer Solution).
  • the plate was removed from the heat block and placed onto the MULTIDROP 384 and 240 ⁇ L of serum Working Solutions was dispensed into the wells. The plate was removed and shaken on a plate reader for 10 seconds. After a further 15 minutes, the turbidity of the samples was measured at 640 nm and the hyaluronidase activity (in U/mL) of each sample was determined by fitting to the standard curve.
  • a vial of 3D35M was thawed and expanded from shaker flasks through 1 L spinner flasks in CD-CHO media (Invitrogen, Carlsbad Calif.) supplemented with 100 nM Methotrexate and GlutaMAXTM-1 (Invitrogen).
  • Cells were transferred from spinner flasks to a 5 L bioreactor (Braun) at an inoculation density of 4 ⁇ 10 5 viable cells per ml. Parameters were temperature Setpoint 37° C., pH 7.2 (starting Setpoint), with Dissolved Oxygen Setpoint 25% and an air overlay of 0-100 cc/min.
  • Feed #1 Medium CD CHO with 50 g/L Glucose
  • Feed #2 Medium CD CHO with 50 g/L Glucose and 10 mM Sodium Butyrate
  • This process resulted in a final productivity of 1600 Units per ml with a maximal cell density of 6 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml.
  • the addition of sodium butyrate was to dramatically enhance the production of soluble rHuPH20 in the final stages of production.
  • Conditioned media from the 3D35M clone was clarified by depth filtration and tangential flow diafiltration into 10 mM Hepes pH 7.0. Soluble rHuPH20 was then purified by sequential chromatography on Q Sepharose (Pharmacia) ion exchange, Phenyl Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography, phenyl boronate (Prometics) and Hydroxapatite Chromatography (Biorad, Richmond, Calif.).
  • the eluate was diluted with 2M ammonium sulfate to a final concentration of 500 mM ammonium sulfate and passed through a Phenyl Sepharose (low sub) column, followed by binding under the same conditions to a phenyl boronate resin.
  • the soluble rHuPH20 was eluted from the phenyl sepharose resin in Hepes pH 6.9 after washing at pH 9.0 in 50 mM bicine without ammonium sulfate.
  • the eluate was loaded onto a ceramic hydroxyapatite resin at pH 6.9 in 5 mM potassium phosphate and 1 mM CaCl 2 and eluted with 80 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4 with 0.1 mM CaCl 2 .
  • the resultant purified soluble rHuPH20 possessed a specific activity in excess of 65,000 USP Units/mg protein by way of the microturbidity assay (Example 16) using the USP reference standard.
  • Purified sPH20 eluted as a single peak from 24 to 26 minutes from a Pharmacia 5RPC styrene divinylbenzene column with a gradient between 0.1% TFA/H 2 O and 0.1% TFA/90% acetonitrile/10% H 2 O and resolved as a single broad 61 kDa band by SDS electrophoresis that reduced to a sharp 51 kDa band upon treatment with PNGASE-F.
  • N-terminal amino acid sequencing revealed that the leader peptide had been efficiently removed.
  • a scaled-up process was used to separately purify soluble rHuPH20 from four different vials of 3D35M cell to produce 4 separate batches of sHuPH20; HUA0406C, HUA0410C, HUA0415C and HUA0420C.
  • Each vial was separately expanded and cultured through a 125 L bioreactor, then purified using column chromatography. Samples were taken throughout the process to assess such parameters as enzyme yield.
  • the description of the process provided below sets forth representative specifications for such things as bioreactor starting and feed media volumes, transfer cell densities, and wash and elution volumes. The exact numbers vary slightly with each batch, and are detailed in Tables 11 to 18.
  • the flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • the culture was expanded into a 250 mL spinner flask in 200 mL culture volume, and the flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • the culture was expanded into a 1 L spinner flask in 800 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • the culture was expanded into a 6 L spinner flask in 5 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • the culture was expanded into a 36 L spinner flask in 20 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • a 125 L reactor was sterilized with steam at 121° C., 20 PSI and 65 L of CD CHO media was added. Before use, the reactor was checked for contamination. When the cell density in the 36 L spinner flasks reached 1.8-2.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL, 20 L cell culture were transferred from the 36 L spinner flasks to the 125 L bioreactor (Braun), resulting a final volume of 85 L and a seeding density of approximately 4 ⁇ 10 5 cells/mL. Parameters were temperature setpoint, 37° C.; pH: 7.2; Dissolved oxygen: 25% ⁇ 10%; Impeller Speed 50 rpm; Vessel Pressure 3 psi; Air Sparge 1 L/min.; Air Overlay: 1 L/min.
  • the reactor was sampled daily for cell counts, pH verification, media analysis, protein production and retention. Nutrient feeds were added during the run.
  • 3.4 L of Feed #1 Medium (CD CHO+50 g/L Glucose+40 mL/L GlutaMAXTM-1) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36.5° C.
  • 3.5 L of Feed #2 (CD CHO+50 g/L Glucose+40 mL/L GlutaMAXTM-1+1.1 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36° C.
  • the one hundred liter bioreactor cell culture harvest was filtered through a series of disposable capsule filters having a polyethersulfone medium (Sartorius): first through a 8.0 ⁇ m depth capsule, a 0.65 ⁇ m depth capsule, a 0.22 ⁇ m capsule, and finally through a 0.22 ⁇ m Sartopore 2000 cm 2 filter and into a 100 L sterile storage bag.
  • the culture was concentrated 10 ⁇ using two TFF with Spiral Polyethersulfone 30 kDa MWCO filters (Millipore), followed by a 6 ⁇ buffer exchange with 10 mM HEPES, 25 mM Na 2 SO 4 , pH 7.0 into a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag.
  • Table 11 provides monitoring data related to the cell culture, harvest, concentration and buffer exchange steps.
  • LAL endotoxin
  • Phenyl-Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography was next performed.
  • the PS-purified protein was the loaded onto an aminophenyl boronate column
  • HAP hydroxyapatite
  • BioRad BioRad
  • 5 mM potassium phosphate 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 pH 7.0. Wash samples were collected and tested for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay).
  • the aminophenyl boronate purified protein was supplemented with potassium phosphate and CaCl 2 to yield final concentrations of 5 mM potassium phosphate and 0.1 mM CaCl 2 and loaded onto the HAP column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr.
  • the column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 , then 10 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 pH.
  • the protein was eluted with 70 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0 and filtered through a 0.22 ⁇ m filter into a 5 L sterile storage bag. The eluate was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
  • the HAP-purified protein was then pumped through a 20 nM viral removal filter via a pressure tank.
  • the protein was added to the DV20 pressure tank and filter (Pall Corporation), passing through an Ultipor DV20 Filter with 20 nm pores (Pall Corporation) into a sterile 20 L storage bag.
  • the filtrate was tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, oligosaccharide, monosaccharide and sialic acid profiling, and process-related impurities.
  • the protein in the filtrate was then concentrated to 1 mg/mL using a 10 kD molecular weight cut off (MWCO) Sartocon Slice tangential flow filtration (TFF) system (Sartorius).
  • MWCO molecular weight cut off
  • FTFF Sartocon Slice tangential flow filtration
  • the filter was first prepared by washing with a Hepes/saline solution (10 mM Hepes, 130 mM NaCl, pH 7.0) and the permeate was sampled for pH and conductivity. Following concentration, the concentrated protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration and enzyme activity. A 6 ⁇ buffer exchange was performed on the concentrated protein into the final buffer: 10 mM Hepes, 130 mM NaCl, pH 7.0. The concentrated protein was passed though a 0.22 ⁇ m filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag. The protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, free sulfhydryl groups, oligosaccharide profiling and osmolarity.
  • Tables 12 to 18 provide monitoring data related to each of the purification steps described above, for each 3D35M cell lot.
  • the purified and concentrated soluble rHuPH20 protein was aseptically filled into sterile vials with 5 mL and 1 mL fill volumes.
  • the protein was passed though a 0.22 ⁇ m filter to an operator controlled pump that was used to fill the vials using a gravimetric readout.
  • the vials were closed with stoppers and secured with crimped caps.
  • the closed vials were visually inspected for foreign particles and then labeled. Following labeling, the vials were flash-frozen by submersion in liquid nitrogen for no longer than 1 minute and stored at ⁇ 15° C. ( ⁇ 20 ⁇ 5° C.).
  • Gen2 3D35M cell line described in Example 2 was adapted to higher methotrexate levels to produce generation 2 (Gen2) clones.
  • 3D35M cells were seeded from established methotrexate-containing cultures into CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1TM and 1.0 ⁇ M methotrexate. The cells were adapted to a higher methotrexate level by growing and passaging them 9 times over a period of 46 days in a 37° C., 7% CO 2 humidified incubator. The amplified population of cells was cloned out by limiting dilution in 96-well tissue culture plates containing medium with 2.0 ⁇ M methotrexate.
  • 3E10B cells were grown in CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1TM and 2.0 ⁇ M methotrexate for 20 passages.
  • a master cell bank (MCB) of the 3E10B cell line was created and frozen and used for subsequent studies.
  • Amplification of the cell line continued by culturing 3E10B cells in CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1TM and 4.0 ⁇ M methotrexate. After the 12 th passage, cells were frozen in vials as a research cell bank (RCB). One vial of the RCB was thawed and cultured in medium containing 8.0 ⁇ M methotrexate. After 5 days, the methotrexate concentration in the medium was increased to 16.0 ⁇ M, then 20.0 ⁇ M 18 days later.
  • RCB research cell bank
  • the resultant 2B2 cells are dihydrofolate reductase deficient (dhfr-) DG44 CHO cells that express soluble recombinant human PH20 (rHuPH20).
  • the soluble PH20 is present in 2B2 cells at a copy number of approximately 206 copies/cell.
  • Southern blot analysis of Spe I-, Xba I- and BamH I/Hind III-digested genomic 2B2 cell DNA using a rHuPH20-specific probe revealed the following restriction digest profile: one major hybridizing band of ⁇ 7.7 kb and four minor hybridizing bands ( ⁇ 13.9, ⁇ 6.6, ⁇ 5.7 and ⁇ 4.6 kb) with DNA digested with Spe I; one major hybridizing band of ⁇ 5.0 kb and two minor hybridizing bands ( ⁇ 13.9 and ⁇ 6.5 kb) with DNA digested with Xba I; and one single hybridizing band of ⁇ 1.4 kb observed using 2B2 DNA digested with BamH I/Hind III.
  • a vial of HZ24-2B2 was thawed and expanded from shaker flasks through 36 L spinner flasks in CD-CHO media (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 20 ⁇ M methotrexate and GlutaMAX-1TM (Invitrogen). Briefly, the a vial of cells was thawed in a 37° C. water bath, media was added and the cells were centrifuged. The cells were resuspended in a 125 mL shake flask with 20 mL of fresh media and placed in a 37° C., 7% CO 2 incubator. The cells were expanded up to 40 mL in the 125 mL shake flask.
  • the culture When the cell density reached greater than 1.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 125 mL spinner flask in a 100 mL culture volume. The flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 . When the cell density reached greater than 1.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 250 mL spinner flask in 200 mL culture volume, and the flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 . When the cell density reached greater than 1.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 1 L spinner flask in 800 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • the culture When the cell density reached greater than 1.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL the culture was expanded into a 6 L spinner flask in 5000 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 . When the cell density reached greater than 1.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL the culture was expanded into a 36 L spinner flask in 32 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO 2 .
  • a 400 L reactor was sterilized and 230 mL of CD-CHO media was added. Before use, the reactor was checked for contamination. Approximately 30 L cells were transferred from the 36 L spinner flasks to the 400 L bioreactor (Braun) at an inoculation density of 4.0 ⁇ 10 5 viable cells per ml and a total volume of 260 L. Parameters were temperature setpoint, 37° C.; Impeller Speed 40-55 RPM; Vessel Pressure: 3 psi; Air Sparge 0.5-1.5 L/Min.; Air Overlay: 3 L/min. The reactor was sampled daily for cell counts, pH verification, media analysis, protein production and retention. Also, during the run nutrient feeds were added.
  • the reactor was harvested at 14 or 15 days or when the viability of the cells dropped below 40%. The process resulted in a final productivity of 17,000 Units per ml with a maximal cell density of 12 million cells/mL.
  • the culture was sampled for mycoplasma, bioburden, endotoxin and viral in vitro and in vivo, Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) and enzyme activity.
  • TEM Transmission Electron Microscopy
  • the culture was pumped by a peristaltic pump through four Millistak filtration system modules (Millipore) in parallel, each containing a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 4-8 ⁇ m and a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 1.4-1.1 ⁇ m, followed by a cellulose membrane, then through a second single Millistak filtration system (Millipore) containing a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 0.4-0.11 ⁇ m and a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ m, followed by a cellulose membrane, and then through a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into a sterile single use flexible bag with a 350 L capacity.
  • Millistak filtration system modules Millistak filtration system modules
  • the harvested cell culture fluid was supplemented with 10 mM EDTA and 10 mM Tris to a pH of 7.5.
  • the culture was concentrated 10 ⁇ with a tangential flow filtration (TFF) apparatus using four Sartoslice TFF 30 kDa molecular weight cut-off (MWCO) polyether sulfone (PES) filter (Sartorious), followed by a 10 ⁇ buffer exchange with 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na 2 SO 4 , pH 7.5 into a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into a 50 L sterile storage bag.
  • TFF tangential flow filtration
  • MWCO molecular weight cut-off
  • PES polyether sulfone
  • the concentrated, diafiltered harvest was inactivated for virus. Prior to viral inactivation, a solution of 10% Triton X-100, 3% tri (n-butyl) phosphate (TNBP) was prepared. The concentrated, diafiltered harvest was exposed to 1% Triton X-100, 0.3% TNBP for 1 hour in a 36 L glass reaction vessel immediately prior to purification on the Q column.
  • the protein was eluted with 10 mM Hepes, 400 mM NaCl, pH 7.0 into a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into sterile bag.
  • the eluate sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and hyaluronidase activity.
  • a 280 absorbance reading were taken at the beginning and end of the exchange.
  • Phenyl-Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography was next performed.
  • the protein eluate from the Q sepharose column was supplemented with 2M anunonium sulfate, 1 M potassium phosphate and 1 M CaCl 2 stock solutions to yield final concentrations of 5 mM, 0.5 M and 0.1 mM, respectively.
  • the protein was loaded onto the PS column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr and the column flow thru collected.
  • the column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate and 0.1 mM CaCl2 pH 7.0 at 100 cm/hr and the wash was added to the collected flow thru. Combined with the column wash, the flow through was passed through a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into a sterile bag. The flow through was sampled for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
  • An aminophenyl boronate column (Promtics) was prepared. The wash was collected and sampled for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate. The PS flow through containing purified protein was loaded onto the aminophenyl boronate column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, pH 7.0. The column was washed with 20 mM bicine, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, pH 9.0.
  • the column was washed with 20 mM bicine, 100 mM sodium chloride, pH 9.0.
  • the protein was eluted with 50 mM Hepes, 100 mM NaCl, pH 6.9 and passed through a sterile filter into a sterile bag.
  • the eluted sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
  • the hydroxyapatite (HAP) column (Biorad) was prepared. The wash was collected and test for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The column was equilibrated with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 , pH 7.0. The aminophenyl boronate purified protein was supplemented to final concentrations of 5 mM potassium phosphate and 0.1 mM CaCl 2 and loaded onto the HAP column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 .
  • the column was next washed with 10 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl 2 .
  • the protein was eluted with 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 and passed through a 0.22 ⁇ m sterile filter into a sterile bag. The eluted sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
  • the HAP purified protein was then passed through a viral removal filter.
  • the sterilized Virosart filter (Sartorius) was first prepared by washing with 2 L of 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0. Before use, the filtered buffer was sampled for pH and conductivity.
  • the HAP purified protein was pumped via a peristaltic pump through the 20 nM viral removal filter.
  • the filtered protein in 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 was passed through a 0.22 ⁇ m final filter into a sterile bag.
  • the viral filtered sample was tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, oligosaccharide, monosaccharide and sialic acid profiling. The sample also was tested for process related impurities.
  • the protein in the filtrate was then concentrated to 10 mg/mL using a 10 kD molecular weight cut off (MWCO) Sartocon Slice tangential flow filtration (TFF) system (Sartorius).
  • the filter was first prepared by washing with 10 mM histidine, 130 mM NaCl, pH 6.0 and the permeate was sampled for pH and conductivity. Following concentration, the concentrated protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration and enzyme activity. A 6 ⁇ buffer exchange was performed on the concentrated protein into the final buffer: 10 mM histidine, 130 mM NaCl, pH 6.0. Following buffer exchange, the concentrated protein was passed though a 0.22 ⁇ m filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag. The protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, free sulfhydryl groups, oligosaccharide profiling and osmolarity.
  • the sterile filtered bulk protein was then aseptically dispensed at 20 mL into 30 mL sterile Teflon vials (Nalgene). The vials were then flash frozen and stored at ⁇ 20 ⁇ 5° C.
  • Gen2 soluble rHuPH20 in a 300 L bioreactor cell culture contained some changes in the protocols compared to the production and purification Gen1 soluble rHuPH20 in a 100 L bioreactor cell culture (described in Example 4.B).
  • Table 19 sets forth exemplary differences, in addition to simple scale up changes, between the methods.
  • 2 nd stage - single module containing a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 0.4-0.11 ⁇ m and a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ m, followed by a cellulose membrane.
  • 3 rd stage - 0.22 ⁇ m polyethersulfone filter 300 L storage bag Harvested cell culture is supplemented with 10 mM EDTA, 10 mM Tris to a pH of 7.5.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Mycology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are combinations, compositions and kits containing a immune globulin (IG) composition and a soluble hyaluronidase composition formulated for subcutaneous administration. Such products can be used in methods of treating IG-treatable diseases or conditions. Also provided are methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin whereby the dosing regimen is substantially the same as for intravenous administration of the same dosage for treatment of the same IG-treatable disease or condition.

Description

RELATED APPLICATIONS
The present application is a reissue of U.S. Pat. No. 10,301,376, which issued on May 28, 2019, which was filed as U.S. application Des. No. 12/381,844 on Mar. 16, 2009. Benefit of priority is claimed to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/069,841, to Richard Schiff, Heinz Leibl and Gregory Frost, entitled “Combinations and Methods for Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin and Hyaluronidase,” filed Mar. 17, 2008. The subject matter of the above-noted application is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
This application is related to International PCT Application Serial No. PCT/US2009/001670, filed the same day herewith, entitled “Combinations and Methods for Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin and Hyaluronidase,” which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 61/069,841. The subject matter of the above-noted related application is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
Provided are combinations, compositions and kits containing an immune globulin (IG) composition and a soluble hyaluronidase composition formulated for subcutaneous administration. Such products can be used in methods of treating IG-treatable diseases or conditions. Also provided are methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin whereby the dosing regimen is substantially the same as for intravenous administration of the same dosage for treatment of the same IG-treatable disease or condition.
BACKGROUND
The intravenous (IV) administration of immune globulin (WIG) is the primary treatment of individuals with immune deficiencies. Although the initial IVIG preparations caused severe side effects, the IVIG preparations available at the present time are well tolerated in the majority of immune deficient patients. Nonetheless, a small proportion of patients continue to have unpleasant, even disabling, reactions such as headache, fatigue, and myalgia. Fever and chills remains a problem, especially when patients have intercurrent infections. The reactions often persist despite trying other IVIG preparations or pre-medicating with acetaminophen, diphenhydramine, and corticosteroids. Further, due to the requirement for IV administration, there are issues with patient compliance.
Subcutaneous (SQ) administration of immune globulin is an alternative to intravenous administration. Compared to IV infusions, SQ administration of immune globulin has several advantages. For example, it reduces the incidence of systemic reactions, does not require sometimes-difficult IV access, improves trough levels, and gives patients more independence. Because of the difficulty in administering large quantities of fluid in a single site, it is necessary to do SQ infusions once or twice a week, using two to as many as 5 sites at a time. Thus, unlike WIG, which is given once a month, subcutaneous administration is usually done weekly. Hence, there is a need for alternative methods for administering immune globulin.
SUMMARY
Provided herein are methods, compositions, combinations and kits for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and for treating IG-treatable diseases or conditions. Provided are methods for treating an IG-treatable disease or condition in a subject by subcutaneously administering to the subject soluble hyaluronidase and an immune globulin (IG) for treating the disease or condition. Co-administration of IG and hyaluronidase increases the bioavailability of subcutaneously administered IG to permit administration of IG subcutaneously using a dosing regime substantially the same as intravenous IG (IVIG) administration for the particular disease or condition. The administration of the IG is effected such that the amount administered and frequency of administration is substantially the same as for IV (intravenous) administration of the same amount via IV for the same disease or condition. The amount administered via IV can be predetermined or is known for a particular disease or condition. Typically, in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase, for subcutaneous administration, the rate of administration can be greater than for IV administration. Hence, the time for administration of a particular dose can be reduced. Rate of administration can be controlled, such as by a pump, or can rely on gravity.
Thus, among the methods provided are methods for treating an IG-treatable disease or condition in a subject in need of such treatment by subcutaneously administering to the subject a soluble hyaluronidase and an amount of immune globulin (IG) effective for treating the disease or condition. The administration is performed with a dosage regimen in which: (a) a quantity of IG; and (b) a dosing frequency for successive administrations of IG to the subject are selected such that the therapeutic effect of the subcutaneous IG administration upon the subject is at least substantially equivalent to intravenous administration of the IG to the subject using the same dosing regimen.
In some examples of the methods provided herein, bioavailability of the subcutaneously administered IG is at least about 90% of the bioavailability of the same dosage administered via IV administration. The amount of soluble hyaluronidase administered can be sufficient to effect subcutaneous administration of the IG at a dosage administered no more than once a month. In other examples, administration of IG is no more than once monthly.
The soluble hyaluronidase used in the methods and uses provided herein can be PH20 or a truncated form thereof. For example, the soluble hyaluronidase can an ovine or bovine or truncated human PH20. In instances where a truncated human PH20 is used in the methods and uses provided herein, the truncated human PH20 can be selected from among polypeptides having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof. In one example, the soluble hyaluronidase is rHuPH20.
The IG administered using the methods and uses herein can be purified from human plasma, such as by alcohol fractionation. In some examples, the IG is further purified by any one or more of a chemical modification, incubation at pH 4.0 with or without pepsin, polyethylene glycol (PEG) precipitation, ion-exchange chromatography, enzymatic cleavage, solvent detergent treatment, diafiltration or ultrafiltration. The methods and uses provided herein can employ IG that contains IgG, IgA and IgM. In some examples, the IG contains greater than 95% IgG. Further, the IgG can be monomeric. Protein-stabilizing excipients, such as one or more of glycine, maltose, a polyol, human serum albumin, mannitol, and non-ionic detergent, also can be present in the IG. In some examples, the pH of the IG preparation is at or about 4.2 to 5.4, 4.6 to 5.1 or 4.8 to 5.0, and the protein concentration is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition. In one example, the protein concentration of the 1G is 10% w/v.
Provided herein are methods and uses for treating an IG-treatable disease or condition, in which soluble hyaluronidase and an immune globulin (IG) for treating the disease or condition are subcutaneously administered, and the IG is infused at a rate of 10 ml/hr to 300 ml/hr, such as at or about 10 ml/hr, 20 ml/hr, 30 ml/hr, 40 ml/hr, 50 ml/hr, 60 ml/hr, 70 ml/hr, 80 ml/hr, 90 ml/hr, 100 ml/hr, 150 ml/hr, 200 ml/hr, 250 ml/hr and 300 ml/hr. The rate can be controlled by a pump or gravity. In some examples, the IG and hyaluronidase are administered separately, simultaneously or intermittently. For example, the hyaluronidase can be administered prior to administration of IG, such as 0.5 minutes, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes or 30 minutes prior to administration of IG. In other examples, the IG and hyaluronidase are in a single composition. In further examples, about or 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g, 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g of IG is administered, and the hyaluronidase is administered at a ratio (units hyaluronidase/grams of IG) at or about 10 U/gram (g), 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 35 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, or 300 U/g.
Soluble hyaluronidase and IG can be administered using the methods and uses provided herein to treat, for example, immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Wohmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic immunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome (including autoimmune haemolytic anaemia with immune thrombocytopenia); Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Haemophagocytic syndrome; High-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion purpura; Toxic epidermal necrolysis/Steven Johnson syndrome (TEN/SJS); Toxic shock syndrome; Alzheimer's Disease; Systemic lupus erythrematosus; multiple myeloma; sepsis; B cell tumors; trauma; and a bacterial, viral or fugal infection. In instances where the IG and hyaluronidase are administered to treat an immunodeficiency, the immunodeficiency can be selected from among common variable immunodeficiency (CVID), congenital agammaglobulinemia, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), primary hypogammaglobulinemia, primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency, X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy, and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies.
In instances where the IG-treatable disease or condition is acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies, and the hematological malignancy can be chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM) or non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL). In instances where the IG-treatable disease or condition is an inflammatory myopathy, the inflammatory myopathy can be polymyositis, dermatomyositis or inclusion body myositis.
In some examples, soluble hyaluronidase and IG is administered subcutaneously to treat a bacteria, viral or fungal condition, such as, for example, Haemophilus influenzae type B, Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae types 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, and 23, Adenovirus types 2 and 5, Cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus VCA, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Herpes simplex virus-1, Herpes simplex virus-2, Influenza A, Measles, Parainfluenza types 1, 2 and 3, Polio, Varicella zoster virus, Apergillus and Candida albicans.
Provided herein are combinations of compositions, containing a first composition containing IG formulated for subcutaneous single dosage administration no more than once per month, and a second composition containing a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration no more than once per month. The compositions can be in a dual chamber container or in single container separated from each other. In some examples, the hyaluronidase is positioned in the container to be administered before the IG. The container can be a syringe, tube or bottle, and can further contain a needle for injection.
The combinations of compositions provided herein can contain PH20, or a truncated form thereof. For example, ovine, bovine or truncated human PH20, such as a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof, can be included in the combinations of compositions provided herein. In some examples, the soluble hyaluronidase in the combination is rHuPH20. Further, the IG in the combinations of compositions can be purified from human plasma, and can be lyophilized or a liquid.
In some examples, the volume of liquid in the combinations of compositions provided herein is or is about 100 ml, 150 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml or 700 ml. The IG in the combinations of compositions can have a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v. In some examples, the IG in the composition is or is about 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g. The hyaluronidase can be a liquid. In some examples, the volume of the hyaluronidase liquid is or is about 1 ml, 2 ml, 3 ml, 4 ml, 5 ml, 6 ml, 7 ml, 8 ml, 9 ml, 10 ml, 20 ml or 30 ml, and the hyaluronidase is at or about 10 Units to 500,000 Units, 100 Units to 100,000 Units, 500 Units to 50,000 Units, 1000 Units to 10,000 Units, 5000 Units to 7500 Units, 5000 Units to 50,000 Units, or 1,000 Units to 10,000 Units. Provided herein are compositions containing immune globulin (IG) and a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration once a month. The soluble hyaluronidase contained in the composition can be PH20, or a truncated form thereof. For example, ovine, bovine or tamcated human PH20, such as a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic variants or other variants thereof, can be included in the compositions formulated for single dosage administration provided herein. In some examples, the soluble hyaluronidase in the composition is rHuPH20. The IG in the compositions can be purified from human plasma, and can be a liquid.
In exemplary embodiments, the IG in the compositions formulated for single dosage administration provided herein has a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v. The IG in the composition is or is about 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g, 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g, and the hyaluronidase is at or about 10 Units to 500,000 Units, 100 Units to 100,000 Units, 500 Units to 50,000 Units, 1000 Units to 10,000 Units, 5000 Units to 7500 Units, 5000 Units to 50,000 Units, or 1,000 Units to 10,000 Units. The volume of liquid in the composition can be at or about 100 ml, 150 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml or 700 ml.
Provided herein are kits containing combinations of compositions, containing a first composition containing IG formulated for subcutaneous single dosage administration no more than once per month, and a second composition containing a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration no more than once per month. Also provided herein are compositions containing illumine globulin (IG) and a soluble hyaluronidase formulated for single dosage administration once a month. Optionally, instructions can be included in the kits.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Outline
A. Definitions
B. Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin (IG)
C. Immune Globulin
D. Hyaluronidase
Soluble Hyaluronidase
    • Soluble Human PH20
      • Soluble Recombinant Human PH20 (rHuPH20)
E. Methods of Producing Nucleic Acids encoding a soluble Hyaluronidase and Polypeptides Thereof
    • 1. Vectors and Cells
    • 2. Expression
      • a. Prokaryotic Cells
      • b. Yeast Cells
      • c. Insect Cells
      • d. Mammalian Cells
      • e. Plants
    • 3. Purification Techniques
F. Preparation, Formulation and Administration of Immune Globulins and Soluble Hyaluronidase Polypeptides
    • 1. Formulations
      • Lyophilized powders
    • 2. Dosage and Administration
G. Methods of Assessing Activity, Bioavailability and Pharmacokinetics
    • 1. Pharmacokinetics and tolerability
    • 2. Biological Activity
      • a. Immune globulin
      • b. Hyaluronidase
H. Therapeutic Uses
    • 1. Primary immune deficiency with antibody deficiency
    • 2. Acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies
    • 3. Kawasaki's disease
    • 4. Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy
    • 5. Guillain-Barre Syndrome
    • 6. Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura
    • 7. Inflammatory myopathies: polymyositis, dermatomyositis and inclusion body myositis
    • 8. Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome
    • 9. Multifocal motor neuropathy
    • 10. Myasthenia Gravis
    • 11. Moersch-Woltmann syndrome
    • 12. Alzheimer's Disease
    • 13. Other diseases and conditions
I. Articles of manufacture and kits
J. Examples
A. Definitions
Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill in the art to which the invention(s) belong. All patents, patent applications, published applications and publications, Genbank sequences, databases, websites and other published materials referred to throughout the entire disclosure herein, unless noted otherwise, are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In the event that there are a plurality of definitions for terms herein, those in this section prevail. Where reference is made to a URL or other such identifier or address, it understood that such identifiers can change and particular information on the internet can come and go, but equivalent information can be found by searching the internet. Reference thereto evidences the availability and public dissemination of such information.
As used herein, “immunoglobulin,” “immune globulin,” “gamma globulin” refer to preparations of plasma proteins derived from the pooled plasma of adult donors. IgG antibodies predominate; other antibody subclasses, such as IgA and IgM are present. Therapeutic immune globulin can provide passive immunization by increasing a recipient's serum levels of circulating antibodies. IgG antibodies can, for example, bind to and neutralize bacterial toxins; opsonize pathogens; activate complement; and suppress pathogenic cytokines and phagocytes through interaction with cytokines and receptors thereof, such as CD5, interleukin-1a (IL-1a), interleukin 6 (IL-6), tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha), and T-cell receptors. Therapeutic immune globulin can inhibit the activity of autoantibodies. Immune globulin preparations also include, but are not limited to, immune globulin intravenous (IGIV), immune globulin IV, therapeutic immunoglobulin. Immune globulin preparation are well known, and include brand names, such as BayGam®, Gamimune® N, Gammagard® S/D, Gammar®-P, Iveegam® EN, Panglobulin®, Polygam® S/D, Sandoglobulin®, Venoglobulin®-I, Venoglobulin®-S, WinRho® SDF and others. Immune globulin preparations can be derived from human plasma, or are recombinantly produced.
As used herein, IG-treatable diseases or conditions refer to any disease or condition for which immune globulin preparations are used. Such diseases and conditions, include, but are not limited to, any disease in which an increase in circulating antibodies is ameliorative, such as, for example, immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Woltmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic iinmunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome (including autoimmune haemolytic anaemia with immune thrombocytopenia); Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Haemophagocytic syndrome; High-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion purpura; Toxic epidermal necrolysis/Steven Johnson syndrome (TEN/SJS); Toxic shock syndrome; Alzheimer's Disease; Systemic lupus erythematosus; multiple myeloma; sepsis; B cell tumors; trauma; and a bacterial viral or fugal infection.
As used herein, dosing regime refers to the amount of immune globulin administered and the frequency of administration. The dosing regime is a function of the disease or condition to be treated, and thus can vary.
As used herein, “substantially the same as an intravenous IG (IVIG) dosing regime” refers to a regimen in which the dose and/or frequency is within an amount that is effective for treating a particular disease or condition, typically is about or 10%, of the IV dose or frequency. Amounts of IVIG that are effective for treating a particular disease or condition are known or can be empirically determined by one of skill in the art. For example, as exemplified below, 300 mg/kg (i.e. 21 grams assuming the average adult weighs 70 kg) to 600 mg/kg (i.e. 42 grams) is the typical monthly dose of IVIG administered to patients having primary immunodeficiency diseases. Hence, IG, when administered in combination with hyaluronidase, is administered subcutaneously at doses that are or are about 300 mg/kg to 600 mg/kg for treatment of primary immunodeficiency diseases.
As used herein, frequency of administration refers to the time between successive doses of immune globulin. For example, frequency can be one, two, three, four weeks, and is a function of the particular disease or condition treated. Generally, frequency is a least every two or three weeks, and typically no more than once a month.
As used herein, hyaluronidase refers to an enzyme that degrades hyaluronic acid. Hyaluronidases include bacterial hyaluronidases (EC 4.2.99.1), hyaluronidases from leeches, other parasites, and crustaceans (EC 3.2.1.36), and mammalian-type hyaluronidases (EC 3.2.1.35). Hyaluronidases also include any of non-human origin including, but not limited to, murine, canine, feline, leporine, avian, bovine, ovine, porcine, equine, piscine, ranine, bacterial, and any from leeches, other parasites, and crustaceans. Exemplary non-human hyaluronidases include, hyaluronidases from cows (SEQ ID NO:10 and 11), yellow jacket wasp (SEQ ID NOS:12 and 13), honey bee (SEQ ID NO:14), white-face hornet (SEQ ID NO:15), paper wasp (SEQ ID NO:16), mouse (SEQ ID NOS:17-19, 32), pig (SEQ ID NOS:20-21), rat (SEQ ID NOS:22-24, 31), rabbit (SEQ ID NO:25), sheep (SEQ ID NO:26 and 27), orangutan (SEQ ID NO:28), cynomolgus monkey (SEQ ID NO:29), guinea pig (SEQ ID NO: 30), Staphylococcus aureus (SEQ ID NO:33), Streptococcus pyogenes (SEQ ID NO:34), and Clostridium perfringens (SEQ ID NO:35). Hyaluronidases also include those of human origin. Exemplary human hyaluronidases include HYAL1 (SEQ ID NO:36), HYAL2 (SEQ ID NO:37), HYAL3 (SEQ ID NO:38), HYAL4 (SEQ ID NO:39), and PH20 (SEQ ID NO:1). Also included amongst hyaluronidases are soluble hyaluronidases, including, ovine and bovine PH20, soluble human PH20 and soluble rHuPH20.
Reference to hyaluronidases includes precursor hyaluronidase polypeptides and mature hyaluronidase polypeptides (such as those in which a signal sequence has been removed), truncated forms thereof that have activity, and includes allelic variants and species variants, variants encoded by splice variants, and other variants, including polypeptides that have at least 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more sequence identity to the precursor polypeptides set forth in SEQ ID NOS: 1 and 10-39, or the mature form thereof. For example, reference to hyaluronidase also includes the human PH20 precursor polypeptide variants set forth in SEQ ID NOS:50-51. Hyaluronidases also include those that contain chemical or posttranslational modifications and those that do not contain chemical or posttranslational modifications. Such modifications include, but are not limited to, pegylation, albumination, glycosylation, farnesylation, carboxylation, hydroxylation, phosphorylation, and other polypeptide modifications known in the art.
As used herein, a soluble hyaluronidase refers to a polypeptide characterized by its solubility under physiologic conditions. Soluble hyaluronidases can be distinguished, for example, by its partitioning into the aqueous phase of a Triton X-114 solution warmed to 37° C. (Bordier et al., (1981) J. Biol. Chem., 256:1604-7). Membrane-anchored, such as lipid anchored hyaluronidases, will partition into the detergent rich phase, but will partition into the detergent-poor or aqueous phase following treatment with Phospholipase-C. Included among soluble hyaluronidases are membrane anchored hyaluronidases in which one or more regions associated with anchoring of the hyaluronidase to the membrane has been removed or modified, where the soluble form retains hyaluronidase activity. Soluble hyaluronidases include recombinant soluble hyaluronidases and those contained in or purified from natural sources, such as, for example, testes extracts from sheep or cows. Exemplary of such soluble hyaluronidases are soluble human PH20. Other soluble hyaluronidases include ovine (SEQ ID NO:27) and bovine (SEQ ID NO:11) PH20.
As used herein, soluble human PH20 or sHuPH20 include mature polypeptides lacking all or a portion of the glycosylphospatidylinositol (GPI) attachment site at the C-tenninus such that upon expression, the polypeptides are soluble. Exemplary sHuPH20 polypeptides include mature polypeptides having an amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NOS:4-9 and 47-48. The precursor polypeptides for such exemplary sHuPH20 polypeptides include a signal sequence. Exemplary of the precursors are those set forth in SEQ ID NOS:3 and 40-46, each of which contains a 35 amino acid signal sequence at amino acid positions 1-35. Soluble HuPH20 polypeptides also include those degraded during or after the production and purification methods described herein.
As used herein, soluble recombinant human PH20 (rHuPH20) refers to a soluble fonn of human PH20 that is recombinantly expressed in Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells. Soluble rHuPH20 is encoded by nucleic acid that includes the signal sequence and is set forth in SEQ ID NO:49. Also included are DNA molecules that are allelic variants thereof and other soluble variants. The nucleic acid encoding soluble rHuPH20 is expressed in CHO cells which secrete the mature polypeptide. As produced in the culture medium there is heterogeneity at the C-terminus so that the product includes a mixture of species that can include any one or more of SEQ ID NOS: 4-9 in various abundance. Corresponding allelic variants and other variants also are included, including those corresponding to the precursor human PH20 polypeptides set forth in SEQ ID NOS:50-51. Other variants can have 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more sequence identity with any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9 and 47-48 as long they retain a hyaluronidase activity and are soluble.
As used herein, activity refers to a functional activity or activities of a polypeptide or portion thereof associated with a full-length (complete) protein. Functional activities include, but are not limited to, biological activity, catalytic or enzymatic activity, antigenicity (ability to bind or compete with a polypeptide for binding to an anti-polypeptide antibody), immunogenicity, ability to form multimers, and the ability to specifically bind to a receptor or ligand for the polypeptide.
As used herein, hyaluronidase activity refers to the ability of hyaluronidase to cleave hyaluronic acid. In vitro assays to determine the hyaluronidase activity of hyaluronidases, such as soluble rHuPH20, are known in the art and described herein. Exemplary assays include the microturbidity assay described below (see e.g. Example 3) that measures cleavage of hyaluronic acid by hyaluronidase indirectly by detecting the insoluble precipitate formed when the uncleaved is hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin.
As used herein, the residues of naturally occurring α-amino acids are the residues of those 20 α-amino acids found in nature which are incorporated into protein by the specific recognition of the charged tRNA molecule with its cognate mRNA codon in humans.
As used herein, nucleic acids include DNA, RNA and analogs thereof, including peptide nucleic acids (PNA) and mixtures thereof. Nucleic acids can be single or double-stranded. When referring to probes or primers, which are optionally labeled, such as with a detectable label, such as a fluorescent or radiolabel, single-stranded molecules are contemplated. Such molecules are typically of a length such that their target is statistically unique or of low copy number (typically less than 5, generally less than 3) for probing or priming a library. Generally a probe or primer contains at least 14, 16 or 30 contiguous nucleotides of sequence complementary to or identical to a gene of interest. Probes and primers can be 10, 20, 30, 50, 100 or more nucleic acids long.
As used herein, a peptide refers to a polypeptide that is from 2 to 40 amino acids in length.
As used herein, the amino acids which occur in the various sequences of amino acids provided herein are identified according to their known, three-letter or one-letter abbreviations (Table 1). The nucleotides which occur in the various nucleic acid fragments are designated with the standard single-letter designations used routinely in the art.
As used herein, an “amino acid” is an organic compound containing an amino group and a carboxylic acid group. A polypeptide contains two or more amino acids. For purposes herein, amino acids include the twenty naturally-occurring amino acids, non-natural amino acids and amino acid analogs (i.e., amino acids wherein the α-carbon has a side chain).
As used herein, “amino acid residue” refers to an amino acid formed upon chemical digestion (hydrolysis) of a polypeptide at its peptide linkages. The amino acid residues described herein are presumed to be in the “L” isomeric form. Residues in the “D” isomeric form, which are so designated, can be substituted for any L-amino acid residue as long as the desired functional property is retained by the polypeptide. NH2 refers to the free amino group present at the amino terminus of a polypeptide. COOH refers to the free carboxy group present at the carboxyl terminus of a polypeptide. In keeping with standard polypeptide nomenclature described in J. Biol. Chem., 243: 3557-3559 (1968), and adopted 37 C.F.R. §§ 1.821-1.822, abbreviations for amino acid residues are shown in Table 1:
TABLE 1
Table of Correspondence
SYMBOL
1-Letter 3-Letter AMINO ACID
Y Tyr Tyrosine
G Gly Glycine
F Phe Phenylalanine
M Met Methionine
A Ala Alanine
S Ser Serine
I Ile Isoleucine
L Leu Leucine
T Thr Threonine
V Val Valine
P Pro proline
K Lys Lysine
H His Histidine
Q Gln Glutamine
E Glu glutamic acid
Z Glx Glu and/or Gln
W Trp Tryptophan
R Arg Arginine
D Asp aspartic acid
N Asn asparagine
B Asx Asn and/or Asp
C Cys Cysteine
X Xaa Unknown or other
It should be noted that all amino acid residue sequences represented herein by formulae have a left to right orientation in the conventional direction of amino-terminus to carboxyl-terminus. In addition, the phrase “amino acid residue” is broadly defined to include the amino acids listed in the Table of Correspondence (Table 1) and modified and unusual amino acids, such as those referred to in 37 C.F.R. §§ 1.821-1.822, and incorporated herein by reference. Furthermore, it should be noted that a dash at the beginning or end of an amino acid residue sequence indicates a peptide bond to a further sequence of one or more amino acid residues, to an amino-terminal group such as NH2 or to a carboxyl-terminal group such as COOH.
As used herein, “naturally occurring amino acids” refer to the 20 L-amino acids that occur in polypeptides.
As used herein, “non-natural amino acid” refers to an organic compound that has a structure similar to a natural amino acid but has been modified structurally to mimic the structure and reactivity of a natural amino acid. Non-naturally occurring amino acids thus include, for example, amino acids or analogs of amino acids other than the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids and include, but are not limited to, the D-isostereomers of amino acids. Exemplary non-natural amino acids are described herein and are known to those of skill in the art.
As used herein, a DNA construct is a single or double stranded, linear or circular DNA molecule that contains segments of DNA combined and juxtaposed in a manner not found in nature. DNA constructs exist as a result of human manipulation, and include clones and other copies of manipulated molecules.
As used herein, a DNA segment is a portion of a larger DNA molecule having specified attributes. For example, a DNA segment encoding a specified polypeptide is a portion of a longer DNA molecule, such as a plasmid or plasmid fragment, which, when read from the 5′ to 3′ direction, encodes the sequence of amino acids of the specified polypeptide.
As used herein, the term polynucleotide means a single- or double-stranded polymer of deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotide bases read from the 5′ to the 3′ end. Polynucleotides include RNA and DNA, and can be isolated from natural sources, synthesized in vitro, or prepared from a combination of natural and synthetic molecules. The length of a polynucleotide molecule is given herein in terms of nucleotides (abbreviated “nt”) or base pairs (abbreviated “bp”). The term nucleotides is used for single- and double-stranded molecules where the context permits. When the term is applied to double-stranded molecules it is used to denote overall length and will be understood to be equivalent to the term base pairs. It will be recognized by those skilled in the art that the two strands of a double-stranded polynucleotide can differ slightly in length and that the ends thereof can be staggered; thus all nucleotides within a double-stranded polynucleotide molecule can not be paired. Such unpaired ends will, in general, not exceed 20 nucleotides in length.
As used herein, “similarity” between two proteins or nucleic acids refers to the relatedness between the sequence of amino acids of the proteins or the nucleotide sequences of the nucleic acids. Similarity can be based on the degree of identity and/or homology of sequences of residues and the residues contained therein. Methods for assessing the degree of similarity between proteins or nucleic acids are known to those of skill in the art. For example, in one method of assessing sequence similarity, two amino acid or nucleotide sequences are aligned in a manner that yields a maximal level of identity between the sequences. “Identity” refers to the extent to which the amino acid or nucleotide sequences are invariant. Alignment of amino acid sequences, and to some extent nucleotide sequences, also can take into account conservative differences and/or frequent substitutions in amino acids (or nucleotides). Conservative differences are those that preserve the physico-chemical properties of the residues involved. Alignments can be global (alignment of the compared sequences over the entire length of the sequences and including all residues) or local (the alignment of a portion of the sequences that includes only the most similar region or regions).
“Identity” per se has an art-recognized meaning and can be calculated using published techniques. (See, e.g.: Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part I, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991). While there exists a number of methods to measure identity between two polynucleotide or polypeptides, the term “identity” is well known to skilled artisans (Carillo, H. & Lipton, D., SIAM J Applied Math 48:1073 (1988)).
As used herein, homologous (with respect to nucleic acid and/or amino acid sequences) means about greater than or equal to 25% sequence homology, typically greater than or equal to 25%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% sequence homology; the precise percentage can be specified if necessary. For purposes herein the terms “homology” and “identity” are often used interchangeably, unless otherwise indicated. In general, for determination of the percentage homology or identity, sequences are aligned so that the highest order match is obtained (see, e.g.: Computational Molecular Biology, Lesk, A. M., ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1988; Biocomputing: Informatics and Genome Projects, Smith, D. W., ed., Academic Press, New York, 1993; Computer Analysis of Sequence Data, Part I, Griffin, A. M., and Griffin, H. G., eds., Humana Press, New Jersey, 1994; Sequence Analysis in Molecular Biology, von Heinje, G., Academic Press, 1987; and Sequence Analysis Primer, Gribskov, M. and Devereux, J., eds., M Stockton Press, New York, 1991; Carillo et al. (1988) SIAM J Applied Math 48:1073). By sequence homology, the number of conserved amino acids is determined by standard alignment algorithms programs, and can be used with default gap penalties established by each supplier. Substantially homologous nucleic acid molecules would hybridize typically at moderate stringency or at high stringency all along the length of the nucleic acid of interest. Also contemplated are nucleic acid molecules that contain degenerate codons in place of codons in the hybridizing nucleic acid molecule.
Whether any two molecules have nucleotide sequences or amino acid sequences that are at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% “identical” or “homologous” can be determined using known computer algorithms such as the “FASTA” program, using for example, the default parameters as in Pearson et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (other programs include the GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Research 12(I):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA (Atschul, S. F., et al., J Molec Biol 215:403 (1990)); Guide to Huge Computers, Martin J. Bishop, ed., Academic Press, San Diego, 1994, and Carillo et al. (1988) SIAM J Applied Math 48:1073). For example, the BLAST function of the National Center for Biotechnology Information database can be used to determine identity. Other commercially or publicly available programs include, DNAStar “MegAlign” program (Madison, Wis.) and the University of Wisconsin Genetics Computer Group (UWG) “Gap” program (Madison Wis.). Percent homology or identity of proteins and/or nucleic acid molecules can be determined, for example, by comparing sequence information using a GAP computer program (e.g., Needleman et al. (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, as revised by Smith and Waterman ((1981) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482). Briefly, the GAP program defines similarity as the number of aligned symbols (i.e., nucleotides or amino acids), which are similar, divided by the total number of symbols in the shorter of the two sequences. Default parameters for the GAP program can include: (1) a unary comparison matrix (containing a value of 1 for identities and 0 for non-identities) and the weighted corn-parison matrix of Gribskov et al. (1986) Nucl. Acids Res. 14:6745, as described by Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., ATLAS OF PROTEIN SEQUENCE AND STRUCTURE, National Biomedical Research Foundation, pp. 353-358 (1979); (2) a penalty of 3.0 for each gap and an additional 0.10 penalty for each symbol in each gap; and (3) no penalty for end gaps. Therefore, as used herein, the term “identity” or “homology” represents a comparison between a test and a reference polypeptide or polynucleotide. As used herein, the term at least “90% identical to” refers to percent identities from 90 to 99.99 relative to the reference nucleic acid or amino acid sequence of the polypeptide. Identity at a level of 90% or more is indicative of the fact that, assuming for exemplification purposes a test and reference polypeptide length of 100 amino acids are compared. No more than 10% (i.e., 10 out of 100) of the amino acids in the test polypeptide differs from that of the reference polypeptide. Similar comparisons can be made between test and reference polynucleotides. Such differences can be represented as point mutations randomly distributed over the entire length of a polypeptide or they can be clustered in one or more locations of varying length up to the maximum allowable, e.g. 10/100 amino acid difference (approximately 90% identity). Differences are defined as nucleic acid or amino acid substitutions, insertions or deletions. At the level of homologies or identities above about 85-90%, the result should be independent of the program and gap parameters set; such high levels of identity can be assessed readily, often by manual alignment without relying on software.
As used herein, an aligned sequence refers to the use of homology (similarity and/or identity) to align corresponding positions in a sequence of nucleotides or amino acids. Typically, two or more sequences that are related by 50% or more identity are aligned. An aligned set of sequences refers to 2 or more sequences that are aligned at corresponding positions and can include aligning sequences derived from RNAs, such as ESTs and other cDNAs, aligned with genomic DNA sequence.
As used herein, “primer” refers to a nucleic acid molecule that can act as a point of initiation of template-directed DNA synthesis under appropriate conditions (e.g., in the presence of four different nucleoside triphosphates and a polymerization agent, such as DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase) in an appropriate buffer and at a suitable temperature. It will be appreciated that a certain nucleic acid molecules can serve as a “probe” and as a “primer.” A primer, however, has a 3′ hydroxyl group for extension. A primer can be used in a variety of methods, including, for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), reverse-transcriptase (RT)-PCR, RNA PCR, LCR, multiplex PCR, panhandle PCR, capture PCR, expression PCR, 3′ and 5′ RACE, in situ PCR, ligation-mediated PCR and other amplification protocols.
As used herein, “primer pair” refers to a set of primers that includes a 5′ (upstream) primer that hybridizes with the 5′ end of a sequence to be amplified (e.g. by PCR) and a 3′ (downstream) primer that hybridizes with the complement of the 3′ end of the sequence to be amplified.
As used herein, “specifically hybridizes” refers to annealing, by complementary base-pairing, of a nucleic acid molecule (e.g. an oligonucleotide) to a target nucleic acid molecule. Those of skill in the art are familiar with in vitro and in vivo parameters that affect specific hybridization, such as length and composition of the particular molecule. Parameters particularly relevant to in vitro hybridization further include annealing and washing temperature, buffer composition and salt concentration. Exemplary washing conditions for removing non-specifically bound nucleic acid molecules at high stringency are 0.1×SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 65° C., and at medium stringency are 0.2×SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C. Equivalent stringency conditions are known in the art. The skilled person can readily adjust these parameters to achieve specific hybridization of a nucleic acid molecule to a target nucleic acid molecule appropriate for a particular application. Complementary, when referring to two nucleotide sequences, means that the two sequences of nucleotides are capable of hybridizing, typically with less than 25%, 15% or 5% mismatches between opposed nucleotides. If necessary, the percentage of complementarity will be specified. Typically the two molecules are selected such that they will hybridize under conditions of high stringency.
As used herein, substantially identical to a product means sufficiently similar so that the property of interest is sufficiently unchanged so that the substantially identical product can be used in place of the product.
As used herein, it also is understood that the terms “substantially identical” or “similar” varies with the context as understood by those skilled in the relevant art. As used herein, an allelic variant or allelic variation references any of two or more alternative forms of a gene occupying the same chromosomal locus. Allelic variation arises naturally through mutation, and can result in phenotypic polymorphism within populations. Gene mutations can be silent (no change in the encoded polypeptide) or can encode polypeptides having altered amino acid sequence. The term “allelic variant” also is used herein to denote a protein encoded by an allelic variant of a gene. Typically the reference form of the gene encodes a wildtype form and/or predominant form of a polypeptide from a population or single reference member of a species. Typically, allelic variants, which include variants between and among species typically have at least 80%, 90% or greater amino acid identity with a wildtype and/or predominant form from the same species; the degree of identity depends upon the gene and whether comparison is interspecies or intraspecies. Generally, intraspecies allelic variants have at least about 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% identity or greater with a wildtype and/or predominant form, including 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater identity with a wildtype and/or predominant form of a polypeptide. Reference to an allelic variant herein generally refers to variations n proteins among members of the same species.
As used herein, “allele,” which is used interchangeably herein with “allelic variant” refers to alternative forms of a gene or portions thereof. Alleles occupy the same locus or position on homologous chromosomes. When a subject has two identical alleles of a gene, the subject is said to be homozygous for that gene or allele. When a subject has two different alleles of a gene, the subject is said to be heterozygous for the gene. Alleles of a specific gene can differ from each other in a single nucleotide or several nucleotides, and can include substitutions, deletions and insertions of nucleotides. An allele of a gene also can be a form of a gene containing a mutation.
As used herein, species variants refer to variants in polypeptides among different species, including different mammalian species, such as mouse and human.
As used herein, a splice variant refers to a variant produced by differential processing of a primary transcript of genomic DNA that results in more than one type of mRNA.
As used herein, modification is in reference to modification of a sequence of amino acids of a polypeptide or a sequence of nucleotides in a nucleic acid molecule and includes deletions, insertions, and replacements of amino acids and nucleotides, respectively. Methods of modifying a polypeptide are routine to those of skill in the art, such as by using recombinant DNA methodologies.
As used herein, the term promoter means a portion of a gene containing DNA sequences that provide for the binding of RNA polymerase and initiation of transcription. Promoter sequences are commonly, but not always, found in the 5′ non-coding region of genes.
As used herein, isolated or purified polypeptide or protein or biologically-active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue from which the protein is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. Preparations can be determined to be substantially free if they appear free of readily detectable impurities as determined by standard methods of analysis, such as thin layer chromatography (TLC), gel electrophoresis and high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), used by those of skill in the art to assess such purity, or sufficiently pure such that further purification would not detectably alter the physical and chemical properties, such as enzymatic and biological activities, of the substance. Methods for purification of the compounds to produce substantially chemically pure compounds are known to those of skill in the art. A substantially chemically pure compound, however, can be a mixture of stereoisomers. In such instances, further purification might increase the specific activity of the compound.
The term substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of proteins in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly-produced. In one embodiment, the term substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of enzyme proteins having less that about 30% (by dry weight) of non-enzyme proteins (also referred to herein as a contaminating protein), generally less than about 20% of non-enzyme proteins or 10% of non-enzyme proteins or less that about 5% of non-enzyme proteins. When the enzyme protein is recombinantly produced, it also is substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about or at 20%, 10% or 5% of the volume of the enzyme protein preparation.
As used herein, the term substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals includes preparations of enzyme proteins in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals that are involved in the synthesis of the protein. The term includes preparations of enzyme proteins having less than about 30% (by dry weight) 20%, 10%, 5% or less of chemical precursors or non-enzyme chemicals or components.
As used herein, synthetic, with reference to, for example, a synthetic nucleic acid molecule or a synthetic gene or a synthetic peptide refers to a nucleic acid molecule or polypeptide molecule that is produced by recombinant methods and/or by chemical synthesis methods.
As used herein, production by recombinant means by using recombinant DNA methods means the use of the well known methods of molecular biology for expressing proteins encoded by cloned DNA.
As used herein, vector (or plasmid) refers to discrete elements that are used to introduce a heterologous nucleic acid into cells for either expression or replication thereof. The vectors typically remain episomal, but can be designed to effect integration of a gene or portion thereof into a chromosome of the genome. Also contemplated are vectors that are artificial chromosomes, such as yeast artificial chromosomes and mammalian artificial chromosomes. Selection and use of such vehicles are well known to those of skill in the art.
As used herein, an expression vector includes vectors capable of expressing DNA that is operatively linked with regulatory sequences, such as promoter regions, that are capable of effecting expression of such DNA fragments. Such additional segments can include promoter and terminator sequences, and optionally can include one or more origins of replication, one or more selectable markers, an enhancer, a polyadenylation signal, and the like. Expression vectors are generally derived from plasmid or viral DNA, or can contain elements of both. Thus, an expression vector refers to a recombinant DNA or RNA construct, such as a plasmid, a phage, recombinant virus or other vector that, upon introduction into an appropriate host cell, results in expression of the cloned DNA. Appropriate expression vectors are well known to those of skill in the art and include those that are replicable in eukaryotic cells and/or prokaryotic cells and those that remain episomal or those which integrate into the host cell genome.
As used herein, vector also includes “virus vectors” or “viral vectors.” Viral vectors are engineered viruses that are operatively linked to exogenous genes to transfer (as vehicles or shuttles) the exogenous genes into cells.
As used herein, operably or operatively linked when referring to DNA segments means that the segments are arranged so that they function in concert for their intended purposes, e.g., transcription initiates in the promoter and proceeds through the coding segment to the terminator.
As used herein the term assessing is intended to include quantitative and qualitative determination in the sense of obtaining an absolute value for the activity of a protease, or a domain thereof, present in the sample, and also of obtaining an index, ratio, percentage, visual or other value indicative of the level of the activity. Assessment can be direct or indirect and the chemical species actually detected need not of course be the proteolysis product itself but can for example be a derivative thereof or some further substance. For example, detection of a cleavage product of a complement protein, such as by SDS-PAGE and protein staining with Coomasie blue.
As used herein, biological activity refers to the in vivo activities of a compound or physiological responses that result upon in vivo administration of a compound, composition or other mixture. Biological activity, thus, encompasses therapeutic effects and pharmaceutical activity of such compounds, compositions and mixtures. Biological activities can be observed in in vitro systems designed to test or use such activities. Thus, for purposes herein a biological activity of a protease is its catalytic activity in which a polypeptide is hydrolyzed.
As used herein equivalent, when referring to two sequences of nucleic acids, means that the two sequences in question encode the same sequence of amino acids or equivalent proteins. When equivalent is used in referring to two proteins or peptides, it means that the two proteins or peptides have substantially the same amino acid sequence with only amino acid substitutions that do not substantially alter the activity or function of the protein or peptide. When equivalent refers to a property, the property does not need to be present to the same extent (e.g., two peptides can exhibit different rates of the same type of enzymatic activity), but the activities are usually substantially the same.
As used herein, “modulate” and “modulation” or “alter” refer to a change of an activity of a molecule, such as a protein. Exemplary activities include, but are not limited to, biological activities, such as signal transduction. Modulation can include an increase in the activity (i.e., up-regulation or agonist activity) a decrease in activity (i.e., down-regulation or inhibition) or any other alteration in an activity (such as a change in periodicity, frequency, duration, kinetics or other parameter). Modulation can be context dependent and typically modulation is compared to a designated state, for example, the wildtype protein, the protein in a constitutive state, or the protein as expressed in a designated cell type or condition.
As used herein, a composition refers to any mixture. It can be a solution, suspension, liquid, powder, paste, aqueous, non-aqueous or any combination thereof.
As used herein, a combination refers to any association between or among two or more items. The combination can be two or more separate items, such as two compositions or two collections, can be a mixture thereof, such as a single mixture of the two or more items, or any variation thereof. The elements of a combination are generally functionally associated or related.
As used herein, a kit is a packaged combination that optionally includes other elements, such as additional reagents and instructions for use of the combination or elements thereof.
As used herein, “disease or disorder” refers to a pathological condition in an organism resulting from cause or condition including, but not limited to, infections, acquired conditions, genetic conditions, and characterized by identifiable symptoms. Diseases and disorders of interest herein are those that are treatable by immune globulin.
As used herein, “treating” a subject with a disease or condition means that the subject's symptoms are partially or totally alleviated, or remain static following treatment. Hence treatment encompasses prophylaxis, therapy and/or cure. Prophylaxis refers to prevention of a potential disease and/or a prevention of worsening of symptoms or progression of a disease. Treatment also encompasses any phannaceutical use of an immune globulin preparation and compositions provided herein.
As used herein, a pharmaceutically effective agent, includes any therapeutic agent or bioactive agents, including, but not limited to, for example, anesthetics, vasoconstrictors, dispersing agents, conventional therapeutic drugs, including small molecule dnigs and therapeutic proteins.
As used herein, treatment means any manner in which the symptoms of a condition, disorder or disease or other indication, are ameliorated or otherwise beneficially altered.
As used herein therapeutic effect means an effect resulting from treatment of a subject that alters, typically improves or ameliorates the symptoms of a disease or condition or that cures a disease or condition. A therapeutically effective amount refers to the amount of a composition, molecule or compound which results in a therapeutic effect following administration to a subject.
As used herein, the term “subject” refers to an animal, including a mammal, such as a human being.
As used herein, a patient refers to a human subject.
As used herein, amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disease or disorder by a treatment, such as by administration of a pharmaceutical composition or other therapeutic, refers to any lessening, whether pennanent or temporary, lasting or transient, of the symptoms that can be attributed to or associated with administration of the composition or therapeutic.
As used herein, prevention or prophylaxis refers to methods in which the risk of developing disease or condition is reduced.
As used herein, a “therapeutically effective amount” or a “therapeutically effective dose” refers to the quantity of an agent, compound, material, or composition containing a compound that is at least sufficient to produce a therapeutic effect. Hence, it is the quantity necessary for preventing, curing, ameliorating, arresting or partially arresting a symptom of a disease or disorder.
As used herein, unit dose form refers to physically discrete units suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individually as is known in the art.
As used herein, a single dosage formulation refers to a formulation for direct administration.
As used herein, an “article of manufacture” is a product that is made and sold.
As used throughout this application, the term is intended to encompass IG and hyaluronidase compositions contained in articles of packaging.
As used herein, fluid refers to any composition that can flow. Fluids thus encompass compositions that are in the form of semi-solids, pastes, solutions, aqueous mixtures, gels, lotions, creams and other such compositions.
As used herein, a “kit” refers to a combination of compositions provided herein and another item for a purpose including, but not limited to, activation, administration, diagnosis, and assessment of a biological activity or property. Kits optionally include instructions for use.
As used herein, a cellular extract or lysate refers to a preparation or fraction which is made from a lysed or disrupted cell.
As used herein, animal includes any animal, such as, but are not limited to primates including humans, gorillas and monkeys; rodents, such as mice and rats; fowl, such as chickens; nuninants, such as goats, cows, deer, sheep; ovine, such as pigs and other animals. Non-human animals exclude humans as the contemplated animal. The enzymes provided herein are from any source, animal, plant, prokaryotic and fungal. Most enzymes are of animal origin, including mammalian origin.
As used herein, a control refers to a sample that is substantially identical to the test sample, except that it is not treated with a test parameter, or, if it is a plasma sample, it can be from a normal volunteer not affected with the condition of interest. A control also can be an internal control.
As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to a compound, comprising “an extracellular domain” includes compounds with one or a plurality of extracellular domains.
As used herein, ranges and amounts can be expressed as “about” a particular value or range. About also includes the exact amount. Hence “about 5 bases” means “about 5 bases” and also “5 bases.”
As used herein, “optional” or “optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance does or does not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not. For example, an optionally substituted group means that the group is unsubstituted or is substituted.
As used herein, the abbreviations for any protective groups, amino acids and other compounds, are, unless indicated otherwise, in accord with their common usage, recognized abbreviations, or the IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (see, (1972) Biochem. 11:1726).
B. Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin (IG)
Provided herein are methods and uses of treating IG-treatable diseases and conditions by subcutaneously administering immune globulin (IG) in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase. Hence, also provided are combinations of IG and a soluble hyaluronidase. By virtue of the ability of hyaluronidase to break down hyaluronic acid in the extracellular matrix, hyaluronidase facilitates subcutaneous infusions of therapeutic agents. Immune globulin is a therapeutic that is primarily given by intravenous administration to treat individuals with immune deficiencies, referred to as IVIG therapy. The bioavailability of IG in the presence of hyaluronidase is greater than 90% of the bioavailability of IG following IVIG treatment. Hence, in the methods and use provided herein, the combination therapy of hyaluronidase and IG permits the subcutaneous administration of immune globulin at dosages and frequencies that are similar to IVIG treatment. Thus, for example, in the methods and uses provided herein, IG, when administered subcutaneously in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase, can be administered once monthly at prevailing IVIG doses for the particular indication. Further, because hyaluronidase acts to open flow channels in the skin it can speed infusion rates. Hence, methods of subcutaneously administering IG co-formulated and/or co-administered with hyaluronidase increases infusion rates, and thereby decreases time of delivery of IG therapy.
Defective antibody formation is the most common abnormality in the majority of primary immunodeficiency (PID) diseases; it is most often reflected by a decrease in serum immunoglobulins, which in turn leads to increased susceptibility to bacterial infections, especially of the sinopulmonary tract. Decreased immunoglobulin levels are found in individuals having antibody defects such as X-linked agammaglobulinemia, immunoglobulin heavy chain deletion, selective immunoglobulin G (IgG) subclass deficiency, common variable immunodeficiency, or X-linked hyperimmunoglobulin M syndrome. Decreased immunoglobulin levels also are found in individuals having combined immunodeficiencies due to defects in T and B cells, such as, but not limited to, severe combined immunodeficiency or Wiskott Aldrich Syndrome (IUIS Scientific Committee, 1999).
Individuals with these diseases require replacement therapy with immunoglobulin products to prevent or reduce the severity of infections. Initially, immunoglobulin replacement therapy was given by the intramuscular route, but starting in 1981 the overwhelming majority of patients have been treated by the intravenous (IV) route. Currently, the majority of immunoglobulin products in the United States are for IV administration. Immune globulin preparations have, however, been developed more recently for subcutaneous administration (Gardulf et al. (2006) Curr. Opin. Allergy Clin. Immunol., 6: 434-42; Gardulf et al. (2006) J Clin. Immunol., 26: 177-85; Ochs et al. (2006) J Clin. Immunol., 26:265-73). At least one product, Vivaglobin®, is approved for subcutaneous administration.
All of the immunoglobulin preparations presently used are formulated at 16%, compared to IVIG preparations formulated at 5 to 12%. The higher concentration relative to IV preparations allows smaller infusion volumes; such preparations cannot be infused intravenously. Such subcutaneous methods of immunoglobulin replacement therapy is considered to be effective, safe and also highly appreciated by patients as it has a low risk of systemic adverse reactions and leads to higher trough serum IgG concentrations compared to monthly IV infusions (Gardulf et al. (1995) J Adv. Nurs., 21: 917-27; Gardulf et al. (1993) Clin. Exp. Immunol., 92: 200-4; Gardulf et al. (1991) Lancet, 338: 162-6).
The bioavailability of immunoglobulin administered subcutaneously generally is less than that infused intravenously. Immunoglobulin is immediately available in the blood, and slowly equilibrates to the extra-vascular compartment over 3 to 5 days (Schiff et al. (1986) J. Clin. Immunol., 6:256-64). Subcutaneously administered immunoglobulin is slowly absorbed from the subcutaneous space into the blood and at the same time equilibrates with the extra-vascular compartment; there is no high IV spike. The bioavailability has not been extensively studied, but in a recent trial of the ZLB-Behring preparation (i.e. Vivaglobin®), it was determined by measuring the area under the curve (AUC) that only 67% of the immunoglobulin was absorbed and thus, the recommended dose was 137% of the IV dose (Ochs et al. (2006) J Clin. Immunol., 26:265-73). Despite the technical difliculties of comparing AUC for 2 different routes and frequency of administration, studies of intradermally administered immunoglobulin in rabbits suggests there is decreased bioavailability through the subcutaneous route. This may be due to the mode of absorption of large protein molecules, which cannot readily diffuse through the capillary walls and must be absorbed via the lymphatics (Supersaxo et al. (1990) Pharm. Res., 7: 167-9).
In addition to problems with bioavailability associated with subcutaneous administration of IG, the primary disadvantage of SC administration is that only small volumes can be infused in each site, necessitating the use of multiple sites on a weekly or biweekly (ever other week) basis. Generally, using a 16% solution, approximately 20 ml can be infused per site; and adult patient receiving 400 mg/kg body weight (BW) thus would require at least 3 sites per week or 12 sites per month. Even though weekly or biweekly administration has the added advantage of maintaining better trough levels than monthly IV infusions, the requirement of multiple needle insertions has been a deterrent for many patients.
The SC space is formed by a collagen network filled with a gel-like substance, hyaluronic acid. Hyaluronic acid is replaced with a half-life of approximately 5 h, and is largely responsible for the resistance to fluid flow through the tissues. Hyaluronidase temporarily digests the hyaluronic acid, thereby facilitating infusions into the subcutaneous space. The hyaluronic acid is restored within 24 hours, leaving no observable changes. Thus, due to the ability of hyaluronidase to open channels in the interstitial space through degradation of glycosaminoglycans, administration of a soluble hyaluronidase permits the diffusion of molecules, thereby improving the bioavailability, pharmacokinetics and/or pharmacodynamic characteristics of such co-formulated or co-administered molecules.
In some examples, the bioavailability of IG co-administered subcutaneously with hyaluronidase is 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or 100% of the bioavailability of IVIG. Typically, the bioavailability is greater than 90%. Further, co-administration with a soluble hyaluronidase permits infusion of large volumes at a single subcutaneous site. For example, volumes up to 600 ml or greater of IG can be administered at a single site in a single sitting, for example 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500, ml, 600 ml or more can be administered at a single site in a single administration. Thus, an IG preparation formulated at or between 5-12% can be co-administered subcutaneously with a soluble hyaluronidase at dosages equivalent to once monthly IVIG doses, for example, at or about 100 mg/kg, 200 mg/kg, 300 mg/kg, 400 mg/kg, 500 mg/kg, 600 mg/kg or more. The dosages can be administered as a single dose or can be divided into multiple doses given daily or weekly, such as once a week or every two, three or four weeks or combinations thereof. Hence, by administering IG subcutaneously in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase, one or all of the considerations and problems associated with subcutaneous administration of IG are addressed. Thus, by virtue of the dispersion properties of hyaluronidase, subcutaneously administering IG in the presence of a soluble hyaluronidase permits administration of IVIG doses at once monthly IVIG frequencies, while maintaining IVIG bioavailability.
The following sections describe exemplary immunoglobulins and soluble hyaluronidases in the combinations herein, methods of making them, and using them to treat IG-treatable diseases and conditions.
C. Immune Globulin
Provided herein are immune globulins (IG, also referred to as gamma globulin or IgG) that can be used for subcutaneous administration in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase. IG acts to strengthen the immune system by modulating the activity of complement, suppressing autoantibody production, saturating or blocking Fc receptors on macrophages and B lymphocytes, and suppressing the production of inflammatory mediators such as cytokines, chemokines and metalloproteinases.
IG is a protein fraction found in the plasma of higher animals and contains a large number of antibodies having varying specificities. Generally, IG contains serum immunoglobulins that can be any idiotype, such as IgG and various subclasses, IgA, IgM, IgD, IgE. The various immunoglobulins or subclasses can be present at various concentrations and specificities, which can differ between immune globulin preparations depending, for example, on the plasma donor's exposure to antigens (e.g., by way of vaccinations). Often, immunoglobulins are present in amounts normally found in the serum (see Table 2), although purification steps can be employed to alter ratios of particular immunoglobulin class or classes. Typically, IG preparations contain 90% or more IgG, such as 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more IgG. The immunoglobulins can be polyclonal or monoclonal. Typically, preparations include a high percentage of monomeric IgG and a low IgA content.
TABLE 2
Serum Immunoglobulin
Ig Class Serum Level mg/ml (%) Function
IgG 1200 (77) Major Ig in Humans
IgA  200 (13) Protects Mucosa
IgM  150 (9) Major Ig for primary
immune responses
IgD   2 (<1) Regulates B cells
IgE  <1 (trace) Major Ig in Allergic
Response
Immune globulins can be isolated from human or animal blood or produced by other means, for example, by recombinant DNA technology or hybridoma technology. For example, immune globulin can be obtained from tissues, lymphocyte hybridoma cultures, blood plasma or senim, or recombinant cell cultures using any suitable fractionation procedure, e.g., alcohol precipitations or ion exchange separations. In general, IG is prepared from blood plasma by alcohol fractionation, such as was originally employed by Cohn and modified by Oncley (the Cohn-Oncley method, see e.g, Cohn et al. (1946) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 68: 459-475; Oncley et al. (1949) J Am. Chem. Soc., 71: 541-550). The use of alcohol in the purification can inactivate potentially contaminating viruses. The Cohn-Oncley method can result in denatured and aggregated proteins, which can result in high molecular weight forms that can act as antibody-antigen complexes having the capacity to freely fix complement.
To prevent such unwanted effects, modified Cohn-Oncley methods have been developed for the preparation and purification of IG. Various such procedures are known and can be adapted and modified for use of IG preparations herein. It is within the skill of the art to prepare IG preparations in view of the detailed methods known and available in the art. Typically, IG is manufactured using a primary cold ethanol fractionation and a secondary fractionation that can include any one or more of a chemical modification, incubation at pH 4.0 with or without pepsin, PEG precipitation, ion-exchange chromatography, enzymatic cleavage, solvent detergent treatment and diafiltration and ultrafiltration.
For example, the separation of IG aggregates by conventional techniques, such as ultra-centrifuging or exclusion chromatography, make it possible to obtain a product having a low anti-complementary activity. Other methods of IG preparation include, but are not limited to, a process for fractionating human plasma by means of ethyleneglycol polymers (Polson et al. (1964) Biochim. Biophys. Acta., 82: 463-475); incorporation of a polyethyleneglycol (PEG) as a purification agent starting from a material separated from the Cohn fractionation (fraction II or II+III, see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,093,606 and 4,165,370); and other similar methods of purification processes with polyethyleneglycol (EP 0246579). In addition, processes have been described for obtaining IG that exhibits low anticomplement activity by treatment with enzymes such as pepsin, plasmin, immobilized trypsin, treatment at a moderate acidic pH, B-propiolactone treatment, fractionation methods which use polyethylene glycol as a precipitating agent, and other techniques described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,093,606, 4,126,605, 3,966,906, and 4,124,576. Other processes are based on chemically and partially modifying the IG molecules by treating them with reducing agents, alchoholization, alkylation and sulphonation (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,875,848). Ion exchange chromatography can be used to eliminate undesirable contaminants from the starting materials used to obtain the IG preparations (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,869,436, EP 91300790 and WO 94/29334). EP0440483 describes a combination of techniques useful for facilitating the intravenous preparation of the product based on ion exchange chromatography and diafiltration at a weak acid pH. Other methods also are described in the art and are known to one of skill in the art (see e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,177,194 and 6,875,848).
The IG preparations should be treated to remove viral load. There are two methods of decreasing viral load: viral inactivation and viral partitioning or removal. Exemplary of viral inactivation methods include, but are not limited to, cold ethanol fractionation, heating (pasterurization), solvent/detergent and acidic environment (low pH). For example, solvent/detergent process has been demonstrated to have virucidal action against VSV (vesicular stomatitits virus), Sindbis virus, HIV, HBV (hepatitis B virus, and HCV (hepatic C virus). Exemplary of viral partitioning or removal include, but are not limited to, cold ethanol fractionation, phase partitioning or PEG precipitation, affinity chromatography, ion exchange or gel exclusion chromatography and filtration.
The final purified formulation also must be prepared to avoid excessive aggregation and to stabilize the protein. Aggregation of IG preparation can be minimized by preparing lyophilized preparations for improved stability on storage, for reconstitution with a diluent before use. Another way of increasing the stability of IG preparations that is well known in the art is the addition of protein-stabilizing excipients to the IG preparation. Known excipients include, but are not limited to, sugars, polyols, amino acids, amines, salts, polymers and surfactants. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,499,073 describes stabilization through the selection of pH and ionic strength; JP Patent 54020124 discloses the addition of an amino acid to an intramuscular preparation to render it storage stable and safe; JP 57031623 and JP 57128635 disclose the use of arginine and/or lysine with NaCl in 5 to 15% IG preparations to achieve long-term stability in an intramuscular preparation; JP 4346934 discloses the use of low conductivity (less than mmho), pH 5.3 to 5.7 and optionally one or more stabilizer including PEG, human senun albumin and mannitol; U.S. Pat. No. 4,439,421 teaches the addition of a hydrophilic macromolecule, a polyol and another protein to stabilize against anti-complement generation; U.S. Pat. No. 5,945,098 discloses the stabilization if isotonic solutions by the addition of amino acids (0.1 to 0.3 M glycine) and non-ionic detergents (polysorbate and PEG); U.S. Pat. No. 4,186,192 discloses various additives including amino acids; WO 2005/049078 discloses the stabilization with maltose and additionally glycine to 0.1 M; U.S. Pat. No. 4,362,661 discloses the use of neutral and basic amino acids to impart stability on a 5% IG preparation. Stable liquid formulations also can be prepared, which use carbohydrates in an aqueous medium having a very low ionic strength and a pH of 4.25 (U.S. Pat. No. 4,396,608) or a weakly acidic pH of 5-6 (EP 0278422).
Dimer formation of IG preparations also can be controlled. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,871,736 discloses IG preparations, particularly liquid preparations, containing one or more amphiphilic stabilizer in order to stabilize against dimer formation. The amphiphilic stabilizers include nicotinic acid and its derivatives, in particular nicotinamide, and mainly in conjunction with the above, amino acids having uncharged lipophilic side chains, e.g., phenylalanine, methionine, leucine, isoleucine, proline and valine.
The preparations can be prepared by methods known in the art, such as any described herein. Generally, however, the pH of the final preparation is adjusted to a relatively high but acidic pH, namely in the range of about pH 4.2 to 5.4, such as a pH range of 4.6 to 5.1. It has been found that this pH range is particularly useful for improving the storage of IG preparations.
Generally, final IG preparations have a protein concentration of about 5 to 25% w/v, generally 6 to 15% w/v, 8 to 12% w/v, and typically 10% w/v. The final protein concentration will depend on various factors, such as the administration route the patient to be treated, and the type of condition to be treated.
It is contemplated herein that any IG preparation used for IV administration can be used in the methods provided herein in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase for subcutaneous administration. Preparations include lyophilized and liquid formulations. Immune globulin (IVIG) is commercially available as Carimune® NF, Flebogamma® 5%, Gammagard® Liquid, Gammagard® S/D, Gamunex®, Iveegam® EN, Octagam® and Polygam® S/D. Typically, such preparations all use a method of cold alcohol fractionation, but use different methods to isolate and purify the immune globulin and different methods to reduce the potential virus contamination. Further, other preparations presently formulated for intramuscular or subcutaneous administration can be used in the combinations and methods provided herein.
Exemplary of an IG preparation is Immune Globulin Intravenous (Human), 10% (IVIG, 10%, marketed as Gammagard® liquid, Baxter Healthcare Corporation), which is a liquid unmodified IgG preparation with a distribution of IgG subclasses similar to that of normal plasma. The preparation contains intact fragment crystallizable (Fc) and Fab regions. The preparations contains 100 mg/ml proteins, with at least 98% being IgG; IgA is present at a concentration of 37 μg/ml, and IgM is present only in trace amounts. It has an osmolality that is similar to physiologic osmolality and contains no added sugars, sodium or preservatives. It is formulated with glycine for stabilization at a pH of 4.6 to 5.1. The manufacturing process employs a modified Cohn-Oncley cold alcohol fractionation procedure and further purifications by a continuous process through the use of weak cation exchange chromatography and weak anion exchange chromatography. The manufacturing process also includes 3 independent viral inactivation or removal steps: solvent/detergent (S/D) treatment, nanofiltration and incubation at a low pH and elevated temperature.
D. Hyaluronidase
Provided herein are combinations containing immunoglobulin and a soluble hyaluronidase, and methods of using such combinations for subcutaneous administration for the treatment of IG-mediated diseases and conditions. Hyaluronidases are a family of enzymes that degrade hyaluronic acid, which is an essential component of the extracellular matrix and a major constituent of the interstitial barrier. By catalyzing the hydrolysis of hyaluronic acid, a major constituent of the interstitial barrier, hyaluronidase lowers the viscosity of hyaluronic acid, thereby increasing tissue permeability. As such, hyaluronidases have been used, for example, as a spreading or dispersing agent in conjunction with other agents, drugs and proteins to enhance their dispersion and delivery. Exemplary of hyaluronidases in the combinations and methods provided herein are soluble hyaluronidases.
There are three general classes of hyaluronidases; mammalian hyaluronidase, bacterial hyaluronidase and hyaluronidase from leeches, other parasites and crustaceans. Mammalian-type hyaluronidases (EC 3.2.1.35) are endo-β-N-acetyl-hexosaminidases that hydrolyze the β1→4 glycosidic bond of hyaluronan into various oligosaccharide lengths such as tetrasaccharides and hexasaccharides. They have both hydrolytic and transglycosidase activities, and can degrade hyaluronan and chondroitin sulfates (CS), generally C4-S and C6-S. Hyaluronidases of this type include, but are not limited to, hyaluronidases from cows (bovine) (SEQ ID NOS:10 and 11), mouse (SEQ ID NOS:17-19, 32), pig (SEQ ID NOS:20-21), rat (SEQ ID NOS:22-24, 31), rabbit (SEQ ID NO:25), sheep (ovine) (SEQ ID NOS:26 and 27), orangutan (SEQ ID NO:28), cynomolgus monkey (SEQ ID NO:29), guinea pig (SEQ ID NO: 30), and human hyaluronidases.
Mammalian hyaluronidases can be further subdivided into those that are neutral active, predominantly found in testes extracts, and acid active, predominantly found in organs such as the liver. Exemplary neutral active hyaluronidases include PH20, including but not limited to, PH20 derived from different species such as ovine (SEQ ID NO:27), bovine (SEQ ID NO:11) and human (SEQ ID NO:1). Human PH20 (also known as SPAM1 or sperm surface protein PH20), is generally locked to the plasma membrane via a glycosylphosphatidyl inositol (GPI) anchor. It is naturally involved in sperm-egg adhesion and aids penetration by sperm of the layer of cumulus cells by digesting hyaluronic acid. The PH20 mRNA transcript is normally translated to generate a 509 amino acid precursor polypeptide (SEQ ID NO:1) containing a 35 amino acid signal sequence at the N-terminus (amino acid residue positions 1-35) and a 19 amino acid GPI anchor at the C-terminus (amino acid residue positions 491-509) The mature PH20 is, therefore, a 474 amino acid polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:2). Bovine PH20 is a 553 amino acid precursor polypeptide (SEQ ID NO:11). Alignment of bovine PH20 with the human PH20 shows only weak homology, with multiple gaps existing from amino acid 470 through to the respective carboxy termini due to the absence of a GPI anchor in the bovine polypeptide (see e.g., Frost GI (2007) Expert Opin. Drug. Deliv. 4: 427-440). In fact, no clear GPI anchor is predicted in any other PH20 species besides humans. Thus, PH20 polypeptides produced from ovine and bovine exist as soluble forms. Though bovine PH20 exists very loosely attached to the plasma membrane, it is not anchored via a phospholipase sensitive anchor (Lalancette et al, Biol Reprod. 2001 August; 65(2):628-36.). This unique feature of bovine hyaluronidase has permitted the use of the soluble bovine testes hyaluronidase enzyme as an extract for clinical use (Wydase™, Hyalase™)
Besides human PH20 (also termed SPAM1), five hyaluronidase-like genes have been identified in the human genome, HYAL1, HYAL2, HYAL3, HYAL4 and HYALP1. HYALP1 is a pseudogene, and HYAL3 (SEQ ID NO:38) has not been shown to possess enzyme activity toward any known substrates. HYAL4 (precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:39) is a chondroitinase and exhibits little activity towards hyaluronan. HYAL(precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:36) is the prototypical acid-active enzyme and PH20 (precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:1) is the prototypical neutral-active enzyme. Acid-active hyaluronidases, such as HYAL1 and HYAL2 (precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:37) generally lack catalytic activity at neutral pH (i.e. pH 7). For example, HYAL1 has little catalytic activity in vitro over pH 4.5 (Frost et al. (1997) Anal. Biochemistry, 251:263-269). HYAL2 is an acid-active enzyme with a very low specific activity in vitro. The hyaluronidase-like enzymes can also be characterized by those which are generally locked to the plasma membrane via a glycosylphosphatidyl inositol anchor such as human HYAL2 and human PH20 (Danilkovitch-Miagkova, et al. (2003) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 100(8):4580-5), and those which are generally soluble such as human HYAL1 (Frost et al, (1997) Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 236(1):10-5).
Glycosylation, including N- and O-linked glycosylation, of some hyaluronidases can be very important for their catalytic activity and stability. While altering the type of glycan modifying a glycoprotein can have dramatic affects on a protein's antigenicity, structural folding, solubility, and stability, most enzymes are not thought to require glycosylation for optimal enzyme activity. Such hyaluronidases are unique in this regard, in that removal of N-linked glycosylation can result in near complete inactivation of the hyaluronidase activity. For such hyaluronidases, the presence of N-linked glycans is critical for generating an active enzyme.
N-linked oligosaccharides fall into several major types (oligomannose, complex, hybrid, sulfated), all of which have (Man) 3-GlcNAc-GlcNAc-cores attached via the amide nitrogen of Asn residues that fall within-Asn-Xaa-Thr/Ser-sequences (where Xaa is not Pro). Glycosylation at an-Asn-Xaa-Cys-site has been reported for coagulation protein C. In some instances, the hyaluronidase can contain both N-glycosidic and O-glycosidic linkages. For example, PH20 has O-linked oligosaccharides as well as N-linked oligosaccharides.
There are seven potential N-linked glycosylation sites at N82, N166, N235, N254, N368, N393, N490 of human PH20 exemplified in SEQ ID NO: 1. Disulfide bonds form between the cysteine residues C60 and C351 and between C224 and C238 to form the core hyaluronidase domain. However, additional cysteines are required in the carboxy terminus for neutral enzyme catalytic activity such that amino acids 36 to 464 of SEQ ID NO:1 contains the minimally active human PH20 hyaluronidase domain. Thus, N-linked glycosylation site N-490 is not required for proper hyaluronidase activity.
Soluble Hyaluronidase
Provided in the combinations and methods herein are soluble hyaluronidases. Soluble hyaluronidases include any that exist in soluble form, including, but not limited to, Hyall, bovine PH20 and ovine PH20, allelic variants thereof and other variants. Also included among soluble hyaluronidase are any hyaluronidase that has been modified to be soluble. For example, human PH20, which is normally membrane anchored via a GPI anchor, can be made soluble by truncation of and removal of all or a portion of the GPI anchor at the C-terminus. Soluble hyaluronidases also include neutral active and acid active hyaluronidases, however, neutral active hyaluronidases are contemplated for use herein for purposes of subcutaneous administration.
Thus, exemplary of a soluble hyaluronidase is PH20 from any species, such as any set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof lacking all or a portion of the C-terminal GPI anchor, so long as the hyaluronidase is soluble and retains hyaluronidase activity. Also included among soluble hyaluronidases are allelic variants or other variants of any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof. Allelic variants and other variants are known to one of skill in the art, and include polypeptides having 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95% or more sequence identify to any of SEQ ID NOS: 1, 2, 11, 25, 27, 30 and 31, or truncated forms thereof.
Typically, for use in the methods herein, a soluble human PH20 is used. Although PH20 from other animals can be utilized, such preparations are potentially immunogenic, since they are animal proteins. For example, a significant proportion of patients demonstrate prior sensitization secondary to ingested foods, and since these are animal proteins, all patients have a risk of subsequent sensitization. Thus, non-human preparations may not be suitable for chronic use. If non-human preparations are desired, it is contemplated herein that such polypeptides can be prepared to have reduced immunogenicity. Such modifications are within the level of one of skill in the art. Hyaluronidases, including PH20, used in the methods herein can be recombinantly produced or can be purified or partially-purified from natural sources, such as, for example, from testes extracts.
Soluble Human PH20
Exemplary of a soluble hyaluronidase is soluble human PH20. Soluble forms of recombinant human PH20 have been produced and can be used in the methods described herein for co-administration or co-formulation with immunoglobulin for subcutaneous administration to treat IG-treatable diseases and conditions. The production of such soluble forms of PH20 is described in application Ser. Nos. 11/065,716 and 11/238,171, and in Examples 2-6, below. Soluble forms include, but are not limited to, any having C-terminal truncations to generate polypeptides containing amino acid 1 to amino acid 347, 372, 394, 413, 430, 447, 467, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482 and 483 of the sequence of amino acids set forth in SEQ ID NOS 1. When expressed in mammalian cells, the 35 amino acid N-terminal signal sequence is cleaved during processing, and the mature form of the protein is secreted. Thus, the mature soluble polypeptides contain amino acids 36 to 347, 372, 394, 413, 430, 447, 467, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482 and 483 of SEQ ID NO:1. Deletion mutants ending at amino acid position 477 to 483 (corresponding to the precursor polypeptide set forth in SEQ ID NO:1) exhibit higher secreted hyaluronidase activity than the full length GPI-anchored form. Hence, exemplary of soluble hyaluronidases are those that are 442, 443, 444, 445, 446 or 447 amino acids in length, such as set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or allelic or species variants or other variants thereof. Generally soluble forms of PH20 are produced using protein expression systems that facilitate correct N-glycosylation to ensure the polypeptide retains activity, since glycosylation is important for the catalytic activity and stability of hyaluronidases. Such cells include, for example Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells (e.g. DG44 CHO cells).
Recombinant Soluble Human PH20 (rHuPH20)
Recombinant soluble forms of human PH20 (soluble rHuPH20) have been generated and can be produced and purified using the methods described herein. The generation of such soluble forms of rHuPH20 are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 11/065,716 and 11/238,171 (published as U.S. published patent application Nos. US20050260186 and US 20060104968), and in Examples 2-6, below. Exemplary of such polypeptides are those generated from a nucleic acid molecule encoding amino acids 1-482 set forth in SEQ ID NO:3. Post translational processing removes the 35 amino acid signal sequence, resulting in the secretion of a 447 amino acid soluble rHuPH20 (SEQ ID NO:4). Resulting purified rHuPH20 can be heterogenous due to peptidases present in the culture medium upon production and purification. Typically, rHuPH20 is produced in cells that facilitate correct N-glycosylation to retain activity, such as CHO cells (e.g. DG44 CHO cells).
E. Methods of Producing Nucleic Acids Encoding a Soluble Hyaluronidase and Polypeptides thereof
Polypeptides of a soluble hyaluronidase set forth herein, can be obtained by methods well known in the art for protein purification and recombinant protein expression. Any method known to those of skill in the art for identification of nucleic acids that encode desired genes can be used. Any method available in the art can be used to obtain a full length (i.e., encompassing the entire coding region) cDNA or genomic DNA clone encoding a hyaluronidase, such as from a cell or tissue source. Modified or variant soluble hyaluronidases, can be engineered from a wildtype polypeptide, such as by site-directed mutagenesis.
Polypeptides can be cloned or isolated using any available methods known in the art for cloning and isolating nucleic acid molecules. Such methods include PCR amplification of nucleic acids and screening of libraries, including nucleic acid hybridization screening, antibody-based screening and activity-based screening.
Methods for amplification of nucleic acids can be used to isolate nucleic acid molecules encoding a desired polypeptide, including for example, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) methods. A nucleic acid containing material can be used as a starting material from which a desired polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule can be isolated. For example, DNA and mRNA preparations, cell extracts, tissue extracts, fluid samples (e.g. blood, serum, saliva), samples from healthy and/or diseased subjects can be used in amplification methods. Nucleic acid libraries also can be used as a source of starting material. Primers can be designed to amplify a desired polypeptide. For example, primers can be designed based on expressed sequences from which a desired polypeptide is generated. Primers can be designed based on back-translation of a polypeptide amino acid sequence. Nucleic acid molecules generated by amplification can be sequenced and confirmed to encode a desired polypeptide.
Additional nucleotide sequences can be joined to a polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule, including linker sequences containing restriction endonuclease sites for the purpose of cloning the synthetic gene into a vector, for example, a protein expression vector or a vector designed for the amplification of the core protein coding DNA sequences. Furthermore, additional nucleotide sequences specifying functional DNA elements can be operatively linked to a polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule. Examples of such sequences include, but are not limited to, promoter sequences designed to facilitate intracellular protein expression, and secretion sequences, for example heterologous signal sequences, designed to facilitate protein secretion. Such sequences are known to those of skill in the art. Additional nucleotide residues sequences such as sequences of bases specifying protein binding regions also can be linked to enzyme-encoding nucleic acid molecules. Such regions include, but are not limited to, sequences of residues that facilitate or encode proteins that facilitate uptake of an enzyme into specific target cells, or otherwise alter pharmacokinetics of a product of a synthetic gene. For example, enzymes can be linked to PEG moieties.
In addition, tags or other moieties can be added, for example, to aid in detection or affinity purification of the polypeptide. For example, additional nucleotide residues sequences such as sequences of bases specifying an epitope tag or other detectable marker also can be linked to enzyme-encoding nucleic acid molecules. Exemplary of such sequences include nucleic acid sequences encoding a His tag (e.g., 6×His, HHHHHH; SEQ ID NO:54) or Flag Tag (DYKDDDDK; SEQ ID NO:55).
The identified and isolated nucleic acids can then be inserted into an appropriate cloning vector. A large number of vector-host systems known in the art can be used. Possible vectors include, but are not limited to, plasmids or modified viruses, but the vector system must be compatible with the host cell used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, bacteriophages such as lambda derivatives, or plasmids such as pCMV4, pBR322 or pUC plasmid derivatives or the Bluescript vector (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.). Other expression vectors include the HZ24 expression vector exemplified herein. The insertion into a cloning vector can, for example, be accomplished by ligating the DNA fragment into a cloning vector which has complementary cohesive termini. Insertion can be effected using TOPO cloning vectors (INVITROGEN, Carlsbad, Calif.). If the complementary restriction sites used to fragment the DNA are not present in the cloning vector, the ends of the DNA molecules can be enzymatically modified. Alternatively, any site desired can be produced by ligating nucleotide sequences (linkers) onto the DNA termini; these ligated linkers can contain specific chemically synthesized oligonucleotides encoding restriction endonuclease recognition sequences. In an alternative method, the cleaved vector and protein gene can be modified by homopolymeric tailing. Recombinant molecules can be introduced into host cells via, for example, transformation, transfection, infection, electroporation and sonoporation, so that many copies of the gene sequence are generated.
In specific embodiments, transformation of host cells with recombinant DNA molecules that incorporate the isolated protein gene, cDNA, or synthesized DNA sequence enables generation of multiple copies of the gene. Thus, the gene can be obtained in large quantities by growing transformants, isolating the recombinant DNA molecules from the transformants and, when necessary, retrieving the inserted gene from the isolated recombinant DNA.
1. Vectors and Cells
For recombinant expression of one or more of the desired proteins, such as any described herein, the nucleic acid containing all or a portion of the nucleotide sequence encoding the protein can be inserted into an appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector that contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted protein coding sequence. The necessary transcriptional and translational signals also can be supplied by the native promoter for enzyme genes, and/or their flanking regions.
Also provided are vectors that contain a nucleic acid encoding the enzyme. Cells containing the vectors also are provided. The cells include eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells, and the vectors are any suitable for use therein.
Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells, including endothelial cells, containing the vectors are provided. Such cells include bacterial cells, yeast cells, fungal cells, Archea, plant cells, insect cells and animal cells. The cells are used to produce a protein thereof by growing the above-described cells under conditions whereby the encoded protein is expressed by the cell, and recovering the expressed protein. For purposes herein, for example, the enzyme can be secreted into the medium.
Provided are vectors that contain a sequence of nucleotides that encodes the soluble hyaluronidase polypeptide coupled to the native or heterologous signal sequence, as well as multiple copies thereof. The vectors can be selected for expression of the enzyme protein in the cell or such that the enzyme protein is expressed as a secreted protein.
A variety of host-vector systems can be used to express the protein coding sequence. These include but are not limited to mammalian cell systems infected with virus (e.g. vaccinia virus, adenovirus and other viruses); insect cell systems infected with virus (e.g. baculovirus); microorganisms such as yeast containing yeast vectors; or bacteria transformed with bacteriophage, DNA, plasmid DNA, or cosmid DNA. The expression elements of vectors vary in their strengths and specificities. Depending on the host-vector system used, any one of a number of suitable transcription and translation elements can be used.
Any methods known to those of skill in the art for the insertion of DNA fragments into a vector can be used to construct expression vectors containing a chimeric gene containing appropriate transcriptional/translational control signals and protein coding sequences. These methods can include in vitro recombinant DNA and synthetic techniques and in vivo recombinants (genetic recombination). Expression of nucleic acid sequences encoding protein, or domains, derivatives, fragments or homologs thereof, can be regulated by a second nucleic acid sequence so that the genes or fragments thereof are expressed in a host transformed with the recombinant DNA molecule(s). For example, expression of the proteins can be controlled by any promoter/enhancer known in the art. In a specific embodiment, the promoter is not native to the genes for a desired protein. Promoters which can be used include but are not limited to the SV40 early promoter (Bemoist and Chambon, Nature 290:304-310 (1981)), the promoter contained in the 3′ long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (Yamamoto et al. Cell 22:787-797 (1980)), the herpes thymidine kinase promoter (Wagner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1441-1445 (1981)), the regulatory sequences of the metallothionein gene (Brinster et al., Nature 296:39-42 (1982)); prokaryotic expression vectors such as the β-lactamase promoter (Jay et al., (1981) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:5543) or the tac promoter (DeBoer et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80:21-25 (1983)); see also “Useful Proteins from Recombinant Bacteria”: in Scientific American 242:79-94 (1980)); plant expression vectors containing the nopaline synthetase promoter (Herrara-Estrella et al., Nature 303:209-213 (1984)) or the cauliflower mosaic virus 35S RNA promoter (Garder et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 9:2871 (1981)), and the promoter of the photosynthetic enzyme ribulose bisphosphate carboxylase (Herrera-Estrella et al., Nature 310:115-120 (1984)); promoter elements from yeast and other fungi such as the Ga14 promoter, the alcohol dehydrogenase promoter, the phosphoglycerol kinase promoter, the alkaline phosphatase promoter, and the following animal transcriptional control regions that exhibit tissue specificity and have been used in transgenic animals: elastase I gene control region which is active in pancreatic acinar cells (Swift et al., Cell 38:639-646 (1984); Ornitz et al., Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol. 50:399-409 (1986); MacDonald, Hepatology 7:425-515 (1987)); insulin gene control region which is active in pancreatic beta cells (Hanahan et al., Nature 315:115-122 (1985)), immunoglobulin gene control region which is active in lymphoid cells (Grosschedl et al., Cell 38:647-658 (1984); Adams et al., Nature 318:533-538 (1985); Alexander et al., Mol. Cell Biol. 7:1436-1444 (1987)), mouse mammary tumor virus control region which is active in testicular, breast, lymphoid and mast cells (Leder et al., Cell 45:485-495 (1986)), albumin gene control region which is active in liver (Pinckert et al., Genes and Devel. 1:268-276 (1987)), alpha-fetoprotein gene control region which is active in liver (Krumlauf et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:1639-1648 (1985); Hammer et al., Science 235:53-58 1987)), alpha-1 antitrypsin gene control region which is active in liver (Kelsey et al., Genes and Devel. 1:161-171 (1987)), beta globin gene control region which is active in myeloid cells (Magram et al., Nature 315:338-340 (1985); Kollias et al., Cell 46:89-94 (1986)), myelin basic protein gene control region which is active in oligodendrocyte cells of the brain (Readhead et al., Cell 48:703-712 (1987)), myosin light chain-2 gene control region which is active in skeletal muscle (Shani, Nature 314:283-286 (1985)), and gonadotrophic releasing hormone gene control region which is active in gonadotrophs of the hypothalamus (Mason et al., Science 234:1372-1378 (1986)).
In a specific embodiment, a vector is used that contains a promoter operably linked to nucleic acids encoding a desired protein, or a domain, fragment, derivative or homolog, thereof, one or more origins of replication, and optionally, one or more selectable markers (e.g., an antibiotic resistance gene). Exemplary plasmid vectors for transformation of E. coli cells, include, for example, the pQE expression vectors (available from Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.; see also literature published by Qiagen describing the system). pQE vectors have a phage T5 promoter (recognized by E. coli RNA polymerase) and a double lac operator repression module to provide tightly regulated, high-level expression of recombinant proteins in E. coli, a synthetic ribosomal binding site (RBS II) for efficient translation, a 6× His tag coding sequence, t0 and T1 transcriptional tenninators, ColE1 origin of replication, and a beta-lactamase gene for conferring ampicillin resistance. The pQE vectors enable placement of a 6× His tag at either the N- or C-terminus of the recombinant protein. Such plasmids include pQE 32, pQE 30, and pQE 31 which provide multiple cloning sites for all three reading frames and provide for the expression of N-terminally 6× His-tagged proteins. Other exemplary plasmid vectors for transformation of E. coli cells, include, for example, the pET expression vectors (see, U.S. Pat. No. 4,952,496; available from NOVAGEN, Madison, Wis.; see, also literature published by Novagen describing the system).
Such plasmids include pET 11 a, which contains the T7lac promoter, T7 terminator, the inducible E. coli lac operator, and the lac repressor gene; pET 12a-c, which contains the T7 promoter, T7 terminator, and the E. coli ompT secretion signal; and pET 15b and pET19b (NOVAGEN, Madison, Wis.), which contain a His-Tag™ leader sequence for use in purification with a His column and a thrombin cleavage site that permits cleavage following purification over the column, the T7-lac promoter region and the T7 terminator.
Exemplary of a vector for mammalian cell expression is the HZ24 expression vector. The HZ24 expression vector was derived from the pCI vector backbone (Promega). It contains DNA encoding the Beta-lactamase resistance gene (AmpR), an F1 origin of replication, a Cytomegalovirus immediate-early enhancer/promoter region (CMV), and an SV40 late polyadenylation signal (SV40). The expression vector also has an internal ribosome entry site (IRES) from the ECMV virus (Clontech) and the mouse dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene.
2. Expression
Soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides can be produced by any method known to those of skill in the art including in vivo and in vitro methods. Desired proteins can be expressed in any organism suitable to produce the required amounts and forms of the proteins, such as for example, needed for administration and treatment. Expression hosts include prokaryotic and eukaryotic organisms such as E. coli, yeast, plants, insect cells, mammalian cells, including human cell lines and transgenic animals. Expression hosts can differ in their protein production levels as well as the types of post-translational modifications that are present on the expressed proteins. The choice of expression host can be made based on these and other factors, such as regulatory and safety considerations, production costs and the need and methods for purification.
Many expression vectors are available and known to those of skill in the art and can be used for expression of proteins. The choice of expression vector will be influenced by the choice of host expression system. In general, expression vectors can include transcriptional promoters and optionally enhancers, translational signals, and transcriptional and translational termination signals. Expression vectors that are used for stable transformation typically have a selectable marker which allows selection and maintenance of the transformed cells. In some cases, an origin of replication can be used to amplify the copy number of the vector.
Soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides also can be utilized or expressed as protein fusions. For example, an enzyme fusion can be generated to add additional functionality to an enzyme. Examples of enzyme fusion proteins include, but are not limited to, fusions of a signal sequence, a tag such as for localization, e.g. a his6 tag or a myc tag, or a tag for purification, for example, a GST fusion, and a sequence for directing protein secretion and/or membrane association.
a. Prokaryotic Cells
Prokaryotes, especially E. coli, provide a system for producing large amounts of proteins. Transformation of E. coli is simple and rapid technique well known to those of skill in the art. Expression vectors for E. coli can contain inducible promoters, such promoters are useful for inducing high levels of protein expression and for expressing proteins that exhibit some toxicity to the host cells. Examples of inducible promoters include the lac promoter, the trp promoter, the hybrid tac promoter, the T7 and SP6 RNA promoters and the temperature regulated APL promoter.
Proteins, such as any provided herein, can be expressed in the cytoplasmic environment of E. coli. The cytoplasm is a reducing environment and for some molecules, this can result in the formation of insoluble inclusion bodies. Reducing agents such as dithiothreitol and β-mercaptoethanol and denaturants, such as guanidine-HCl and urea can be used to resolubilize the proteins. An alternative approach is the expression of proteins in the periplasmic space of bacteria which provides an oxidizing environment and chaperonin-like and disulfide isomerases and can lead to the production of soluble protein. Typically, a leader sequence is fused to the protein to be expressed which directs the protein to the periplasm. The leader is then removed by signal peptidases inside the periplasm. Examples of periplasmic-targeting leader sequences include the pelB leader from the pectate lyase gene and the leader derived from the alkaline phosphatase gene. In some cases, periplasmic expression allows leakage of the expressed protein into the culture medium. The secretion of proteins allows quick and simple purification from the culture supernatant. Proteins that are not secreted can be obtained from the periplasm by osmotic lysis. Similar to cytoplasmic expression, in some cases proteins can become insoluble and denaturants and reducing agents can be used to facilitate solubilization and refolding. Temperature of induction and growth also can influence expression levels and solubility, typically temperatures between 25° C. and 37° C. are used. Typically, bacteria produce aglycosylated proteins. Thus, if proteins require glycosylation for function, glycosylation can be added in vitro after purification from host cells.
b. Yeast Cells
Yeasts such as Saccharomyces cerevisae, Schizosaccharomyces pombe, Yarrowia lipolytica, Kluyveromyces lactis and Pichia pastoris are well known yeast expression hosts that can be used for production of proteins, such as any described herein. Yeast can be transformed with episomal replicating vectors or by stable chromosomal integration by homologous recombination. Typically, inducible promoters are used to regulate gene expression. Examples of such promoters include GAL1, GALT and GALS and metallothionein promoters, such as CUP1, AOX1 or other Pichia or other yeast promoter. Expression vectors often include a selectable marker such as LEU2, TRP1, HIS3 and URA3 for selection and maintenance of the transformed DNA. Proteins expressed in yeast are often soluble. Co-expression with chaperonins such as Bip and protein disulfide isomerase can improve expression levels and solubility. Additionally, proteins expressed in yeast can be directed for secretion using secretion signal peptide fusions such as the yeast mating type alpha-factor secretion signal from Saccharomyces cerevisae and fusions with yeast cell surface proteins such as the Aga2p mating adhesion receptor or the Arxula adeninivorans glucoamylase. A protease cleavage site such as for the Kex-2 protease, can be engineered to remove the fused sequences from the expressed polypeptides as they exit the secretion pathway. Yeast also is capable of glycosylation at Asn-X-Ser/Thr motifs.
c. Insect Cells
Insect cells, particularly using baculovirus expression, are useful for expressing polypeptides such as hyaluronidase polypeptides. Insect cells express high levels of protein and are capable of most of the post-translational modifications used by higher eukaryotes. Baculovirus have a restrictive host range which improves the safety and reduces regulatory concerns of eukaryotic expression. Typical expression vectors use a promoter for high level expression such as the polyhedrin promoter of baculovirus. Commonly used baculovirus systems include the baculoviruses such as Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV), and the Bombyx morn nuclear polyhedrosis virus (BmNPV) and an insect cell line such as Sf9 derived from Spodoptera frugiperda, Pseudaletia unipuncta (A7S) and Danaus plexippus (DpN1). For high-level expression, the nucleotide sequence of the molecule to be expressed is fused immediately downstream of the polyhedrin initiation codon of the virus. Mammalian secretion signals are accurately processed in insect cells and can be used to secrete the expressed protein into the culture medium. In addition, the cell lines Pseudaletia unipuncta (A7S) and Danaus plexippus (DpN1) produce proteins with glycosylation patterns similar to mammalian cell systems.
An alternative expression system in insect cells is the use of stably transformed cells. Cell lines such as the Schneider 2 (S2) and Kc cells (Drosophila melanogaster) and C7 cells (Aedes albopictus) can be used for expression. The Drosophila metallothionein promoter can be used to induce high levels of expression in the presence of heavy metal induction with cadmium or copper. Expression vectors are typically maintained by the use of selectable markers such as neomycin and hygromycin.
d. Mammalian Cells
Mammalian expression systems can be used to express proteins including soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides. Expression constructs can be transferred to mammalian cells by viral infection such as adenovirus or by direct DNA transfer such as liposomes, calcium phosphate, DEAE-dextran and by physical means such as electroporation and microinjection. Expression vectors for mammalian cells typically include an mRNA cap site, a TATA box, a translational initiation sequence (Kozak consensus sequence) and polyadenylation elements. IRES elements also can be added to permit bicistronic expression with another gene, such as a selectable marker. Such vectors often include transcriptional promoter-enhancers for high-level expression, for example the SV40 promoter-enhancer, the human cytomegalovirus (CMV) promoter and the long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus (RSV). These promoter-enhancers are active in many cell types. Tissue and cell-type promoters and enhancer regions also can be used for expression. Exemplary promoter/enhancer regions include, but are not limited to, those from genes such as elastase I, insulin, immunoglobulin, mouse mammary tumor virus, albumin, alpha fetoprotein, alpha 1 antitrypsin, beta globin, myelin basic protein, myosin light chain 2, and gonadotropic releasing hormone gene control. Selectable markers can be used to select for and maintain cells with the expression construct. Examples of selectable marker genes include, but are not limited to, hygromycin B phosphotransferase, adenosine deaminase, xanthine-guanine phosphoribosyl transferase, aminoglycoside phosphotransferase, dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) and thymidine kinase. For example, expression can be performed in the presence of methotrexate to select for only those cells expressing the DHFR gene. Fusion with cell surface signaling molecules such as TCR-ζ and FcϵRI-γ can direct expression of the proteins in an active state on the cell surface.
Many cell lines are available for mammalian expression including mouse, rat human, monkey, chicken and hamster cells. Exemplary cell lines include but are not limited to CHO, Balb/3T3, HeLa, MT2, mouse NSO (nonsecreting) and other myeloma cell lines, hybridoma and heterohybridoma cell lines, lymphocytes, fibroblasts, Sp2/0, COS, NIH3T3, HEK293, 293S, 2B8, and HKB cells. Cell lines also are available adapted to serum-free media which facilitates purification of secreted proteins from the cell culture media. Examples include CHO-S cells (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif., cat #11619-012) and the serum free EBNA-1 cell line (Pham et al., (2003) Biotechnol. Bioeng. 84:332-42.). Cell lines also are available that are adapted to grow in special mediums optimized for maximal expression. For example, DG44 CHO cells are adapted to grow in suspension culture in a chemically defined, animal product-free medium.
e. Plants
Transgenic plant cells and plants can be used to express proteins such as any described herein. Expression constructs are typically transferred to plants using direct DNA transfer such as microprojectile bombardment and PEG-mediated transfer into protoplasts, and with agrobacterium-mediated transformation. Expression vectors can include promoter and enhancer sequences, transcriptional termination elements and translational control elements. Expression vectors and transformation techniques are usually divided between dicot hosts, such as Arabidopsis and tobacco, and monocot hosts, such as corn and rice. Examples of plant promoters used for expression include the cauliflower mosaic virus promoter, the nopaline synthase promoter, the ribose bisphosphate carboxylase promoter and the ubiquitin and UBQ3 promoters. Selectable markers such as hygromycin, phosphomannose isomerase and neomycin phosphotransferase are often used to facilitate selection and maintenance of transformed cells. Transformed plant cells can be maintained in culture as cells, aggregates (callus tissue) or regenerated into whole plants. Transgenic plant cells also can include algae engineered to produce hyaluronidase polypeptides. Because plants have different glycosylation patterns than mammalian cells, this can influence the choice of protein produced in these hosts.
3. Purification Techniques
Method for purification of polypeptides, including soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides or other proteins, from host cells will depend on the chosen host cells and expression systems. For secreted molecules, proteins are generally purified from the culture media after removing the cells. For intracellular expression, cells can be lysed and the proteins purified from the extract. When transgenic organisms such as transgenic plants and animals are used for expression, tissues or organs can be used as starting material to make a lysed cell extract. Additionally, transgenic animal production can include the production of polypeptides in milk or eggs, which can be collected, and if necessary, the proteins can be extracted and further purified using standard methods in the art.
Proteins, such as soluble hyaluronidase polypeptides, can be purified using standard protein purification techniques known in the art including but not limited to, SDS-PAGE, size fraction and size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate precipitation and ionic exchange chromatography, such as anion exchange. Affinity purification techniques also can be utilized to improve the efficiency and purity of the preparations. For example, antibodies, receptors and other molecules that bind hyaluronidase enzymes can be used in affinity purification. Expression constructs also can be engineered to add an affinity tag to a protein such as a myc epitope, GST fusion or His6 and affinity purified with myc antibody, glutathione resin and Ni-resin, respectively. Purity can be assessed by any method known in the art including gel electrophoresis and staining and spectrophotometric techniques.
F. Preparation, Formulation and Administration of Immune Globulins and Soluble Hyaluronidase Polypeptides
Pharmaceutical compositions of immune globulins and soluble hyaluronidases are provided herein for subcutaneous administration. Formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of soluble hyaluronidases, for example, PH20, are known in the art (see e.g. published U.S. Application Nos. US20040268425, US20050260186 and US20060104968). Soluble hyaluronidases are co-formulated or co-administered with pharmaceutical formulations of immune globulin to enhance the delivery of immune globulins to desired sites within the body by increasing the bioavailability of immune globulins. For example, co-administration or co-formulation of IG with a hyaluronidase can improve the extent and/or rate of absorption and thus bioavailability of an agent by causing more of it to reach the bloodstream and/or less of it being degraded after administration by more rapid permeation. Increased absorption and bioavailability can be achieved, for example, by accelerating interstitial flow and potentially connective transport following administration by applying hydrostatic pressure associated with the volume injection combined with a reduction in impedance to flow associated with degradation of hyaluronan. Thus, soluble hyaluronidases can be used to achieve elevated and/or more rapidly achieved concentrations of the immune globulin following subcutaneous administration compared to conventional methods of subcutaneous administration, to provide, for example, a more potent and/or more rapid response for a given dose. Alternatively, the soluble hyaluronidase can be used to allow a given response to be achieved with a lower dose of administered IG. The ability of a soluble hyaluronidase to enhance bulk fluid flow at and near a site of injection or infusion also can improve other aspects of associated pharmacologic delivery. For example, the increase in bulk fluid flow can help to allow the volume of fluid injected to be more readily dispersed from the site of injection (reducing potentially painful or other adverse consequences of injection). This is particularly important for subcutaneous infusions to permit higher doses to be administered. In addition to increased bioavailability, co-administration or co-formulation of IG with soluble hyaluronidase provides for a safer or more convenient route of administration compared to conventional intravenous routes of administration.
Thus, by virtue of the increased bioavailability, immune globulins can be administered subcutaneously at dosages and frequencies for which current intravenous (IVIG) preparations are prepared and administered. The advantages over current subcutaneous formulations of IG is that co-administered or co-formulated hyaluronidase/IG can result in more favorable dosing regimens, for example, less frequent dosing. By less frequent or lower dosing, side effects associated with toxicity can be reduced. Generally, the pharmacokinetic and/or phannacodynamics of subcutaneous IG therapy is improved. In addition, subcutaneous administrations of IG also has advantages over current intravenous infusions. For example, subcutaneous infusion permits infusion by the patient or family as opposed to a skilled nurse; infusion can be achieved at higher rates such that IG is infused in 1-3 hours compared to 5-10 hours for conventional IVIG therapies; there is no requirement for functional veins; there is no infusion related side effects such as thrombosis, headache, thrombophlebitis, and nausea and less probability of adverse events; and infusion can be performed at home or anywhere.
The compositions can be formulated in lyophilized or liquid form. Where the compositions are provided in lyophilized form they can be reconstituted just prior to use by an appropriate buffer, for example, a sterile saline solution. The compositions can be provided together or separately. For purposes herein, such compositions typically are provided separately. The soluble hyaluronidase and IG can be packaged as separate compositions for administration together, sequentially or intermittently. The combinations can be packaged as a kit.
1. Formulations
The compounds can be formulated into any suitable pharmaceutical preparations for subcutaneous administration such as solutions, suspensions, powders, or sustained release formulations. Typically, the compounds are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions using techniques and procedures well known in the art (see e.g., Ansel Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Fourth Edition, 1985, 126). Pharmaceutically acceptable compositions are prepared in view of approvals for a regulatory agency or other agency prepared in accordance with generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals and in humans. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.
Pharmaceutical compositions can include carriers such as a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or vehicle with which a hyaluronidase or IG is administered. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the compound, generally in purified form or partially purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, and sesame oil. Water is a typical carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions also can be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Compositions can contain along with an active ingredient: a diluent such as lactose, sucrose, dicalcium phosphate, or carboxymethylcellulose; a lubricant, such as magnesium stearate, calcium stearate and talc; and a binder such as starch, natural gums, such as gum acaciagelatin, glucose, molasses, polyvinylpyn-olidine, celluloses and derivatives thereof, povidone, crospovidones and other such binders known to those of skill in the art. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, and ethanol. A composition, if desired, also can contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents, for example, acetate, sodium citrate, cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodium acetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents.
Pharmaceutically therapeutically active compounds and derivatives thereof are typically formulated and administered in unit dosage forms or multiple dosage forms. Each unit dose contains a predetermined quantity of therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit dose forms include ampoules and syringes and individually packaged tablets or capsules. Unit dose forms can be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. A multiple dose form is a plurality of identical unit dosage forms packaged in a single container to be administered in segregated unit dose form. Examples of multiple dose forms include vials, bottles of tablets or capsules or bottles of pints or gallons. Hence, multiple dose form is a multiple of unit doses that are not segregated in packaging. Generally, dosage forms or compositions, containing active ingredient in the range of 0.005% to 100% with the balance made up from non-toxic carrier can be prepared.
Compositions provided herein typically are formulated for administration by subcutaneous route, although other routes of administration are contemplated, such as any route known to those of skill in the art including intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intralesional, intraperitoneal injection, epidural, nasal, oral, vaginal, rectal, topical, local, otic, inhalational, buccal (e.g., sublingual), and transdermal administration or any route. Formulations suited for such routes are known to one of skill in the art. Administration can be local, topical or systemic depending upon the locus of treatment. Local administration to an area in need of treatment can be achieved by, for example, but not limited to, local infusion during surgery, topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery, by injection, by means of a catheter, by means of a suppository, or by means of an implant. Compositions also can be administered with other biologically active agents, either sequentially, intermittently or in the same composition. Administration also can include controlled release systems including controlled release formulations and device controlled release, such as by means of a pump.
The most suitable route in any given case depends on a variety of factors, such as the nature of the disease, the progress of the disease, the severity of the disease the particular composition which is used. For purposes herein, it is desired that hyaluronidases are administered so that they reach the interstitium of skin or tissues, thereby degrading the interstitial space for subsequent delivery of immunoglobulin. Thus, direct administration under the skin, such as by subcutaneous administration methods, is contemplated. Thus, in one example, local administration can be achieved by injection, such as from a syringe or other article of manufacture containing a injection device such as a needle. In another example, local administration can be achieved by infusion, which can be facilitated by the use of a pump or other similar device. Other modes of administration also are contemplated. Pharmaceutical composition can be formulated in dosage forms appropriate for each route of administration.
Subcutaneous administration, generally characterized by injection or infusion, is contemplated herein. Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection, or as emulsions. Suitable excipients are, for example, water, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol. The pharmaceutical compositions may contain other minor amounts of non-toxic auxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, such as for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate and cyclodextrins. Implantation of a slow-release or sustained-release system, such that a constant level of dosage is maintained (see, e. g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795) is also contemplated herein. The percentage of active compound contained in such compositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as well as the activity of the compound and the needs of the subject.
Injectables are designed for local and systemic administration. For purposes herein, local administration is desired for direct administration to the affected interstitium. Preparations for parenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection, sterile dry soluble products, such as lyophilized powders, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, including hypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dry insoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to use and sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous or nonaqueous. If administered intravenously, suitable carriers include physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, such as glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixtures thereof.
Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers used in parenteral preparations include aqueous vehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents, buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and other pharmaceutically acceptable substances. Examples of aqueous vehicles include Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection, Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection. Nonaqueous parenteral vehicles include fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesame oil and peanut oil. Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations can be added to parenteral preparations packaged in multiple-dose containers, which include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride. Isotonic agents include sodium chloride and dextrose. Buffers include phosphate and citrate. Antioxidants include sodium bisulfate. Local anesthetics include procaine hydrochloride. Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcelluose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Emulsifying agents include Polysorbate 80 (TWEENs 80). A sequestering or chelating agent of metal ions include EDTA. Pharmaceutical carriers also include ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles and sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pH adjustment.
The concentration of the pharmaceutically active compound is adjusted so that an injection provides an effective amount to produce the desired pharmacological effect. The exact dose depends on the age, weight and condition of the patient or animal as is known in the art. The unit-dose parenteral preparations are packaged in an ampoule, a vial or a syringe with a needle. The volume of liquid solution or reconstituted powder preparation, containing the pharmaceutically active compound, is a function of the disease to be treated and the particular article of manufacture chosen for package. All preparations for parenteral administration must be sterile, as is known and practiced in the art.
In one example, pharmaceutical preparation can be in liquid form, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions. If provided in liquid form, the pharmaceutical preparations can be provided as a concentrated preparation to be diluted to a therapeutically effective concentration before use. Such liquid preparations can be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl-p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). In another example, pharmaceutical preparations can be presented in lyophilized form for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
Administration methods can be employed to decrease the exposure of selected compounds to degradative processes, such as proteolytic degradation and immunological intervention via antigenic and immunogenic responses. Examples of such methods include local administration at the site of treatment. Pegylation of therapeutics has been reported to increase resistance to proteolysis, increase plasma half-life, and decrease antigenicity and immunogenicity. Examples of pegylation methodologies are known in the art (see for example, Lu and Felix, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 43: 127-138, 1994; Lu and Felix, Peptide Res., 6: 142-6, 1993; Felix et al., Int. J. Peptide Res., 46: 253-64, 1995; Benhar et al., J. Biol. Chem., 269: 13398-404, 1994; Brumeanu et al., J Immunol., 154: 3088-95, 1995; see also, Caliceti et al. (2003) Adv. Drug Deily. Rev. 55(10):1261-77 and Molineux (2003) Pharmacotherapy 23 (8 Pt 2):3S-8S). Pegylation also can be used in the delivery of nucleic acid molecules in vivo. For example, pegylation of adenovirus can increase stability and gene transfer (see, e.g., Cheng et al. (2003) Pharm. Res. 20(9): 1444-51).
Lyophilized Powders
Of interest herein are lyophilized powders, which can be reconstituted for administration as solutions, emulsions and other mixtures. They may also be reconstituted and formulated as solids or gels.
The sterile, lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving an active compound in a buffer solution. The buffer solution may contain an excipient which improves the stability or other pharmacological component of the powder or reconstituted solution, prepared from the powder. Subsequent sterile filtration of the solution followed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those of skill in the art provides the desired formulation. Briefly, the lyophilized powder is prepared by dissolving an excipient, such as dextrose, sorbital, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose or other suitable agent, in a suitable buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or other such buffer known to those of skill in the art. Then, a selected enzyme is added to the resulting mixture, and stirred until it dissolves. The resulting mixture is sterile filtered or treated to remove particulates and to insure sterility, and apportioned into vials for lyophilization. Each vial will contain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the compound. The lyophilized powder can be stored under appropriate conditions, such as at about 4° C. to room temperature. Reconstitution of this lyophilized powder with a buffer solution provides a formulation for use in parenteral administration.
2. Dosage and Administration
The soluble hyaluronidase provided herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions, typically for single dosage administration, in combination with IG. The selected soluble hyaluronidase is included in an amount sufficient to exert a therapeutically useful effect of the IG in the absence of undesirable side effects on the patient treated. The therapeutically effective concentration can be determined empirically by testing the polypeptides in known in vitro and in vivo systems such as by using the assays provided herein or known in the art (see e.g., Taliani et al. (1996) Anal. Biochem., 240: 60-67; Filocamo et al. (1997) J Virology, 71: 1417-1427; Sudo et al. (1996) Antiviral Res. 32: 9-18; Buffard et al. (1995) Virology, 209:52-59; Bianchi et al. (1996) Anal. Biochem., 237: 239-244; Hamatake et al. (1996) Intervirology 39:249-258; Steinkuhler et al. (1998) Biochem., 37:8899-8905; D'Souza et al. (1995) J Gen. Virol., 76:1729-1736; Takeshita et al. (1997) Anal. Biochem., 247:242-246; see also e.g, Shimizu et al. (1994) J. Virol. 68:8406-8408; Mizutani et al. (1996) J. Virol. 70:7219-7223; Mizutani et al. (1996) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Conunun., 227:822-826; Lu et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci (USA), 93:1412-1417; Hahm et al., (1996) Virology, 226:318-326; Ito et al. (1996) J. Gen. Virol., 77:1043-1054; Mizutani et al. (1995) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 212:906-911; Cho et al. (1997) J. Virol. Meth. 65:201-207 and then extrapolated therefrom for dosages for humans.
Typically, a therapeutically effective dose is at or about 500 Units to 100,000 Units of a soluble hyaluronidase. For example, soluble hyaluronidase can be administered subcutaneously at or about 500 Units, 1000 Units, 2000 Units, 5000 Units, 10,000 Units, 30,000 Units, 40,000 Units, 50,000 Units, 60,000 Units, 70,000 Units, 80,000 Units, 90,000 Units, 100,000 Units or more. In some examples, dosages can be provided as a ratio IG administered. For example, hyaluronidase can be administered at 10 U/gram to 500 U/g or more of IG, for example, at or about 10 U/g, 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, 200 U/g, 300 U/g, 400 U/g, 500 U/g or more. Typically, volumes of injections or infusions of hyaluronidase contemplated herein are from at or about 0.5 ml, 1 ml, 2 ml, 3 ml, 4 ml, 5 ml, 6 ml, 7 ml, 8 ml, 9 ml, 10 ml, 15 ml, 20 ml, 30 ml, 40 ml, 50 ml or more. The hyaluronidase can be provided as a stock solution at or about 50 U/ml, 100 U/ml, 150 U/ml, 200 U/ml, 400 U/ml or 500 U/ml or can be provided in a more concentrated fonn, for example at or about 1000 U/ml, 1500 Units/ml, 2000 U/ml, 4000 U/ml or 5000 U/ml for use directly or for dilution to the effective concentration prior to use. The soluble hyaluronidase can be provided as a liquid or lyophilized formulation. Lyophilized fonnulations are ideal for storage of large Units doses of soluble hyaluronidase.
The immune globulin preparations provided herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions for single or multiple dosage use. Generally, the IG preparations are formulated in pharmaceutical compositions to achieve dosage regimes (doses and frequencies) for which current intravenous (IVIG) preparations are prepared and administered for particular IG-treatable diseases or conditions. One of skill in the art is familiar with dosage regimes for IVIG administration of particular diseases or conditions. For example, Section H below provides exemplary dosage regimes (doses and frequencies) of IG for particular diseases and conditions. Other dosage regimes are well known to those of skill in the art. In some examples, the dosage frequency can be daily over an interval of time given over consecutive or alternate days, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more days. In other examples, the dosage regime is weekly, for example, once every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks or more. Typically, immune globulin preparations are formulated for single dose administration in an amount sufficient to provide a once monthly dose, but can be provided in lesser amounts for multiple dosage administrations. For example, once monthly doses of IG preparations can be administered daily, weekly, biweekly or once a month. Dosage regimes can be continued for months or years. The IG preparations can be provided in lyophilized or liquid form as discussed elsewhere herein.
The immune globulin is provided in a therapeutically effective dose. Therapeutically effective concentration can be determined empirically by testing the compounds in known in vitro and in vivo systems, such as the assays provided herein. The concentration of a selected immune globulin in the composition depends on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the complex, the physicochemical characteristics of the complex, the dosage schedule, and amount administered as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. For example, it is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the tissue being treated and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the formulations, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope thereof. The amount of a selected immune globulin preparation to be administered for the treatment of a disease or condition, for example an IG-treatable disease or condition, can be determined by standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vitro assays and animal models can be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges.
Hence, the precise dosage, which can be determined empirically, can depend on the particular immune globulin preparation, the regime and dosing schedule with the soluble hyaluronidase, the route of administration, the type of disease to be treated and the seriousness of the disease. Generally, the IG preparations have a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition, such as, for example, 10% w/v. For example, IG is provided in an amount that permits subcutaneous administration of a dose equivalent to a once monthly IV dose for the particular indication being treated. The particular once monthly IV dose is a function of the disease to be treated, and thus can vary. Exemplary dosages ranges for subcutaneous administration of IG are from at or about 1 gram (g), 5 g, 10 g, 20 g, 30 g, 40 g, 50 g, 60 g, 70 g, 80 g, 90 g, 100 g or 200 g. The particular dosage and formulation thereof depends upon the indication and individual. For example, dosages can be administered at 50 mg/kg body weight (BW), 100 mg/kg BW, 200 mg/kg BW, 300 mg/kg BW, 400 mg/kg BW, 500 mg/kg BW, 600 mg/kg BW, or more. If necessary dosage can be empirically determined. To achieve such dosages, volumes of IG preparations administered subcutaneously can be at or about 50 ml, 100 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml, 700 ml or more. For example, a 10% liquid IG formulation (100 mg/ml) for indications described herein can be administered in a volume of 50 ml to 700 ml to achieve a dosage of 0.5 g to 70 g of IG.
Where large volumes are administered, administration is typically by infusion. Subjects can be dosed at rates of infusion at or about 0.5 ml/kg/BW/h, 1 ml/kg/BW/h, 2 ml/kg/BW/h, 3 ml/kg/BW/h, 4 ml/kg/BW/h, or 5 ml/kg/BW/h. The infusion rate can be empirically determined, and typically is a function of the tolerability of the subject. If an adverse reaction occurs during the infusion, the rate of infusion can be slowed to the rate immediately below that at which the adverse event occurred. If the adverse event resolves in response to the reduction in rate, the infusion rate can be slowly increased at the discretion of the physician. Subcutaneous IG infusion can be facilitated by gravity, pump infusion or injection of a full 20-30 gram dose. Generally, for infusions intravenous infusion pumps can be employed. IG can be infused at rates at or about 5 ml/h, 10 ml/h, 30 ml/h, 60 ml/h, 120 ml/h, 240 ml/h or 300 ml/h. Infusion rates can be increased during the course of treatment so long as the infusion is tolerated by the patient. Generally, time of administration of infusion is at or about 0.5 h, 1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 2.5 h, 3 h, 4 h or more. Due to the high rate of infusion achieved by subcutaneous administration of IG coformulated and/or co-administered with hyaluronidase, the time of infusion is significantly less than for conventional IVIG therapies. Where infusion time exceeds the desired limit, a second infusion site can be started at the physician and subject's discretion. The second site typically is started at least 10 cm from the initial site.
Techniques for infusion are known to one of skill in the art, and are within the skill of a treating physician. Generally, the appropriate dose of IG can be pooled into a standard IV bag. For example, a non-vented infusion set can be used that has a Y-port near its terminus. A 24-gauge subcutaneous infusion needle can be inserted at a site of the subject's preferences, but the abdomen and secondarily the thighs are recommended because of the volume of solution to be infused. The hyaluronidase and IG can be provided in the same Y port apparatus. Other articles of manufacture also can be used herein for purposes of infusion by gravity or a pump, and include, but are not limited to tubes, bottles, syringes or other containers.
The soluble hyaluronidase can be administered subsequently, intermittently or simultaneously from the IG preparation. Generally, the hyaluronidase is administered prior to administration of the IG preparation to permit the hyaluronidase to degrade the hyaluronic acid in the interstitial space. For example, the soluble hyaluronidase can be administered 1 minute, 2 minute, 3 minute, 4 minute, 5 minute, 6 minute, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes or 30 minutes prior to administration of the IG preparation. In some examples, the hyaluronidase is administered together with the immune globulin preparation. As will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, the desired proximity of co-administration depends in significant part on the effective half lives of the agents in the particular tissue setting, and the particular disease being treated, and can be readily optimized by testing the effects of administering the agents at varying times in suitable models, such as in suitable animal models. In some situations, the optimal timing of administration of the hyaluronidase will exceed 60 minutes.
Generally, prior to infusion of IG, a soluble hyaluronidase is injected at a rate of at or about 0.2 ml/min, 0.5 ml/min, 1 ml/min. 2 ml/min, 5 ml/min, 10 ml/min or more. For example, the soluble hyaluronidase can be injected through the same Y-port used for subsequent infusion of IG. As noted above, the volume of soluble hyaluronidase administered is a function of the dosage required, but can be varied depending on the concentration of a soluble hyaluronidase stock formulation available. For example, it is contemplated herein that soluble hyaluronidase is not administered in volumes greater than about 50 ml, and typically is administered in a volume of 5-30 ml. A syringe pump can be used for the higher volumes, at the discretion of the physician.
In the event that an infusion is not tolerated (e.g., it causes moderate to severe local reactions), a second infusion site can be started so that the subject receives the full dosage.
An IG preparation can be administered at once, or can be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time. Selected IG preparations can be administered in one or more doses over the course of a treatment time for example over several hours, days, weeks, or months. In some cases, continuous administration is useful. It is understood that the precise dosage and course of administration depends on the indication and patients tolerability.
Also, it is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment is a function of the disease being treated and can be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations and dosage values also can vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or use of compositions and combinations containing them. The compositions can be administered hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or once. Generally, dosage regimens are chosen to limit toxicity. It should be noted that the attending physician would know how to and when to terminate, interrupt or adjust therapy to lower dosage due to toxicity, or bone marrow, liver or kidney or other tissue dysfunctions. Conversely, the attending physician would also know how to and when to adjust treatment to higher levels if the clinical response is not adequate (precluding toxic side effects).
G. Methods of Assessing Activity, Bioavailability and Pharmacokinetics
Assays can be used to assess the in vitro and in vivo activities of immune globulin alone or in combination with a soluble hyaluronidase. Included among such assays are those that assess the pharmacokinetic properties of subcutaneously-administered immune globulin, including bioavailability, and tolerability. The biological activity of both immune globulin and hyaluronidase also can be assessed using assays well known in the art. Such assays can be used, for example, to determine appropriate dosages of immune globulin and hyaluronidase, and the frequency of dosing, for treatment.
1. Pharmacokinetics and Tolerability
Pharmacokinetic and tolerability studies, such as those described in Examples 1, below, can be performed using animal models or can be performed during clinical studies with patients. Animal models include, but are not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, dogs, guinea pigs and non-human primate models, such as cynomolgus monkeys or rhesus macaques. In some instances, pharmacokinetic and tolerability studies are performed using healthy animals. In other examples, the studies are performed using animal models of a disease for which therapy with immune globulin is considered, such as animal models of any of the diseases and conditions described below.
The pharmacokinetics of subcutaneously administered immune globulin can be assessed by measuring such parameters as the maximum (peak) plasma immune globulin concentration (Cmax), the peak time (i.e. when maximum plasma immune globulin concentration occurs; Tmax), the minimum plasma immune globulin concentration (i.e. the minimum plasma concentration between doses of immune globulin; Cmin), the elimination half-life (T1/2) and area under the curve (i.e. the area under the curve generated by plotting time versus plasma inunune globulin concentration; AUC), following administration. The absolute bioavailability of subcutaneously administered immune globulin is determined by comparing the area under the curve of immune globulin following subcutaneous delivery (AUCsc) with the AUC of immune globulin following intravenous delivery (AUCiv). Absolute bioavailability (F), can be calculated using the formula: F=([AUC]sc×dosesc)/([AUC]iv×doseiv). The concentration of in globulin in the plasma following subcutaneous administration can be measured using any method known in the art suitable for assessing concentrations of inunune globulin in samples of blood. Exemplary methods include, but are not limited to, ELISA and nephelometry.
A range of doses and different dosing frequency of dosing can be administered in the pharmacokinetic studies to assess the effect of increasing or decreasing concentrations of immune globulin and/or hyaluronidase in the dose. Pharmacokinetic properties of subcutaneously administered immune globulin, such as bioavailability, also can be assessed with or without co-administration of hyaluronidase. For example, dogs, such as beagles, can be administered imnnme globulin subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase, or alone. Intravenous doses of immune globulin also are given to another group of beagles. Blood samples can then be taken at various time points and the amount of immune globulin in the plasma determine, such as by nephelometry. The AUC can then be measured and the bioavailability of subcutaneously administered immune globulin administered with or without hyaluronidase can be determined. Such studies can be performed to assess the effect of co-administration with hyaluronidase on pharmacokinetic properties, such as bioavailability, of subcutaneously administered immune globulin.
Studies to assess safety and tolerability also are known in the art and can be used herein. Following subcutaneous administration of immune globulin, with or without co-administration of hyaluronidase, the development of any adverse reactions can be monitored. Adverse reactions can include, but are not limited to, injection site reactions, such as edema or swelling, headache, fever, fatigue, chills, flushing, dizziness, urticaria, wheezing or chest tightness, nausea, vomiting, rigors, back pain, chest pain, muscle cramps, seizures or convulsions, changes in blood pressure and anaphylactic or severe hypersensitivity responses. Typically, a range of doses and different dosing frequencies are be administered in the safety and tolerability studies to assess the effect of increasing or decreasing concentrations of immune globulin and/or hyaluronidase in the dose.
2. Biological Activity
a. Immune Globulin
The ability of immune globulin to act as a therapeutic agent can be assessed in vitro or in vivo. For example, in vitro assays can be performed to assess the ability of inunune globulin to neutralize viral or bacterial infectivity (Hiemstra et al., (1994) J Lab Clin Med 123:241-6). Other in vitro assays can be utilized to assess other biological activities of immune globulin. For example, the ability of immune globulin preparations to interact with and modulate complement activation products, bind idiotypic antibody, bind Fc receptors on macrophages, and suppress various inflammatory mediators including cytokines, chemokines, and metalloproteinases, can be assessed using any method known in the art, including, but not limited to, ELISA, Western blot, Northern blot, and flow cytometry to assess marker expression. For example, the effect of immune globulin on the expression of chemokine receptors on peripheral blood mononuclear cells can be assessed using flow cytomtery (Trebst et al., (2006) Eur J Neurology). In another example, the effect of immune globulin on metalloproteinase expression in macrophages can be assessed using Northern blot analysis (Shapiro et al., (2002) Cancer 95:2032-2037).
In vivo studies using animal models also can be performed to assess the therapeutic activity of immune globulin. Irnmune globulin can be administered to animal models infected with one or more microorganisms and the effect on progression of infection can be assessed, such as by measuring the number of microorganisms or measuring weight as a marker of morbidity. The therapeutic effect of immune globulin also can be assessed using animal models of the diseases and conditions for which therapy using immune globulin is considered. Such animal models are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, small animal models for X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), SCID, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, Kawasaki disease, Guillain-Barré syndrome, ITP, polymyositis, Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome, Myasthenia gravis and Moersch-Woltmann syndrome (Czitrom et al (1985) J Immunol 134:2276-2280, Ellmeier et al., (2000) J Exp Med. 192: 1611-1624, Ohno (2006) Drug Discovery Today: Disease Models 3:83-89, Oyaizu et al (1988) J Exp Med 2017-2022, Hansen et al., (2002) Blood 100:2087-2093, Strongwater et al., (1984) Arthritis Rheum. 27:433-42, Kim et al. (1998) Annals NY Acad Sci 841:670-676, Christadoss et al. (2000) 94:75-87, Sommer et al., (2005)
Lancet 365:1406-1411, U.S. Pat. No. 7,309,810)
b. Hyaluronidase
Hyaluronidase activity can be assessed using methods well known in the art. In one example, activity is measured using a microturbidity assay. This is based on the formation of an insoluble precipitate when hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin. The activity is measured by incubating hyaluronidase with sodium hyaluronate (hyaluronic acid) for a set period of time (e.g. 10 minutes) and then precipitating the undigested sodium hyaluronate with the addition of acidified serum albumin. The turbidity of the resulting sample is measured at 640 nm after an additional development period. The decrease in turbidity resulting from hyaluronidase activity on the sodium hyaluronate substrate is a measure of hyaluronidase enzymatic activity. In another example, hyaluronidase activity is measured using a microtiter assay in which residual biotinylated hyaluronic acid is measured following incubation with hyaluronidase (see e.g. Frost and Stern (1997) Anal. Biochem. 251:263-269, U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050260186). The free carboxyl groups on the glucuronic acid residues of hyaluronic acid are biotinylated, and the biotinylated hyaluronic acid substrate is covalently couple to a microtiter plate. Following incubation with hyaluronidase, the residual biotinylated hyaluronic acid substrate is detected using an avidin-peroxidase reaction, and compared to that obtained following reaction with hyaluronidase standards of known activity. Other assays to measure hyaluronidase activity also are known in the art and can be used in the methods herein (see e.g. Delpech et al., (1995) Anal. Biochem. 229:35-41; Takahashi et al., (2003) Anal. Biochem. 322:257-263).
The ability of hyaluronidase to act as a spreading or diffusing agent also can be assessed. For example, trypan blue dye can be injected subcutaneously with or without hyaluronidase into the lateral skin on each side of nude mice. The dye area is then measured, such as with a microcaliper, to determine the ability of hyaluronidase to act as a spreading agent (U.S. Patent No. 20060104968).
H. Therapeutic Uses
The methods described herein can be used for treatment of any condition for which immune globulin is employed. Immune globulin (IG) can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to treat any condition that is amendable to treatment with inunune globulin. This section provides exemplary therapeutic uses of IG. The therapeutic uses described below are exemplary and do not limit the applications of the methods described herein. Therapeutic uses include, but are not limited to, immunoglobulin replacement therapy and immunomodulation therapy for various immunological, hematological, neurological, inflammatory, dermatological and/or infectious diseases and conditions. In some examples, immune globulin is administered to augment the inumme response in healthy patients, such as following possible exposure to infectious disease (e.g. accidental needle stick injury). It is within the skill of a treating physician to identify such diseases or conditions.
Immune globulin can be co-administered with hyaluronidase subcutaneously, in combination with other agents used in the treatment of these diseases and conditions. For example, other agents that can be administered include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, chemotherapeutics, steroidal anti-inflammatories, non-steroidal anti-inflammatories, and other immunomodulatory agents such as cytokines, chemokines and growth factors.
If necessary, a particular dosage and duration and treatment protocol can be empirically determined or extrapolated. For example, exemplary doses of intravenously administered immune globulin can be used as a starting point to determine appropriate dosages. Dosage levels can be determined based on a variety of factors, such as body weight of the individual, general health, age, the activity of the specific compound employed, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity and course of the disease, and the patient's disposition to the disease and the judgment of the treating physician. Generally, dosages of immune globulin are from or about 100 mg per kg body weight (i.e. 100 mg/kg BW) to 2 g/kg BW, and dosages of hyaluronidase are from or about 10 U/gram to 500 U/g or more of immune globulin, for example, at or about 10 U/g, 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, 200 U/g, 300 U/g, 400 U/g, 500 U/g or more. It is understood that the amount to administer will be a function of the indication treated, and possibly side effects that will be tolerated. Dosages can be empirically determined using recognized models for each disorder.
Upon improvement of a patient's condition, a maintenance dose of immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase, if necessary, and the dosage, the dosage form, or frequency of administration, or a combination thereof can be modified. In some cases, a subject can require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
1. Primary Immune Deficiency with Antibody Deficiency
Immune globulin can be used to treat primary immune deficiency with antibody deficiency. Primary immune deficiency encompasses many disorders that are characterized by a deficiency of one or more proteins of the immune system. Typically, primary immune deficiencies are inherited disorders, and many are manifest by failure of protective antibody production. Thus, immune globulin can be administered as immunoglobulin replacement therapy to patients presenting with such diseases. Exemplary of primary immune deficiencies include, but are not limited to, common variable immunodeficiency (CVID), congenital agammaglobulinemia, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, severe combined inummodeficiency (SCID), primary hypogammaglobulinemia, primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency, X-linked agammaglobulinaemia (XLA), hypogammaglobulinaemia of infancy, and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies. Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with primary immune deficiency with antibody deficiency at doses similar to the doses used for intravenous administration of immune globulin. Exemplary doses include, for example, between 100 mg/kg BW and 800 mg/kg BW immune globulin, at four week intervals. The dose can be increased or decreased, as can the frequency of the doses, depending on the clinical response.
2. Acquired Hypogammaglobulinemia Secondary to Hematological Malignancies
Patients with acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies, such as Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM), non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL) & other relevant malignancies and post-hematopoietic stem cell transplantation, are susceptible to bacterial infections due to. Hypogammaglobulinemia is caused by a lack of B-lymphocytes and a resulting low level of antibodies in the blood, and can occur in patients with CLL, MM, NHL and as a result of both leukemia-related immune dysfunction and therapy-related immunosuppression. The deficiency in humoral immunity is largely responsible for the increased risk of infection-related morbidity and mortality in these patients, especially by encapsulated microorganisms. For example, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Haemophilus influenzae, and Staphyloccus aureus, as well as Legionella and Nocardia spp. are frequent bacterial pathogens that cause pneumonia in patients with CLL. Opportunistic infections such as Pneumocystis carinii, fungi, viruses, and mycobacteria also have been observed. The number and severity of infections in these patients can be significantly reduced by administration of immune globulin (Griffiths et al., (1989) Blood 73:366-368, Chapel et al. (1994) Lancet 343:1059-1063). Such patients, therefore, can be administered immune globulin subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase using the methods described herein to prevent recurrent infections. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies. For example, about 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase, can be administered subcutaneously every 3 to 4 weeks. In a further example, an additional dose of 400 mg/kg BW can be administered in the first month of therapy where the patient's serum IgG is less than 4 g/L. The amount of immune globulin administered, and the frequency of the doses, can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
3. Kawasaki's Disease
Kawasaki disease is an acute, febrile, multi-system disease of children and young infants often involving the coronary arteries. It also is known as lymph node syndrome, mucocutaneous node disease, infantile polyarteritis and Kawasaki syndrome, and is a poorly understood self-limited vasculitis that affects many organs, including the skin and mucous membranes, lymph nodes, blood vessel walls, and the heart. Coronary artery aneurysms can occur from the second week of illness during the convalescent stage. Although the cause of the condition is unknown, there is evidence that the characteristic vasculitis results from an immune reaction characterized by T-cell and macrophage activation to an unknown antigen, secretion of cytokines, polyclonal B-cell hyperactivity, and the formation of autoantibodies to endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells. In genetically susceptible individuals, one or more uncharacterized common infectious agents, possibly with superantigen activity, may trigger the disease. Immune globulin administered early in Kawasaki disease can prevent coronary artery pathology. Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with ongoing inflammation associated with Kawasaki disease can ameliorate symptoms. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with Kawasaki disease. For example, a patient with Kawasaki disease can be administered about 1-2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin. This can be administered, for example, in four doses of 400 mg/kg BW for four consecutive days. In another example, 1 g/kg BW immune globulin is administered as a single dose over a 10 hour period. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
4. Chronic Inflammatory Demyelinating Polyneuropathy
Chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP) is a neurological disorder characterized by progressive weakness and impaired sensory function in the legs and arms. The disorder, which is sometimes called chronic relapsing polyneuropathy, is caused by damage to the myelin sheath of the peripheral nerves. Although it can occur at any age and in both genders, CIDP is more common in young adults and in men more so than women. It often presents with symptoms that include tingling or numbness (beginning in the toes and fingers), weakness of the arms and legs, loss of deep tendon reflexes (areflexia), fatigue, and abnormal sensations. CIDP is closely related to Guillain-Barre syndrome and it is considered the chronic counterpart of that acute disease. There is no specific diagnostic test but characteristic clinical and laboratory findings help distinguish this disorder from other immune mediated neuropathic syndromes. Studies indicate that treatment with immune globulin reduces symptoms (van Schaik et al., (2002) Lancet Neurol. 1:497-498). Thus, immune globulin can be co-administered with hyaluronidase subcutaneously to patients presenting with CIDP using the methods described herein. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with CIDP. In one example, a patient with CIDP is administered about 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase. This can be administered, for example, in five doses of 400 mg/kg BW for five consecutive days. The amount of inunune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
5. Guillain-Barré Syndrome
Guillain-Barré syndrome is a neurologic autoimmune disorder involving inflammatory demyelination of peripheral nerves. The first symptoms include varying degrees of weakness or tingling sensations in the legs, which can spread to the arms and upper body. These symptoms can increase in intensity until the muscles cannot be used at all and the patient is almost totally paralyzed, resulting in a life-threatening condition. Although recovery is generally good or complete in the majority of patients, persistent disability has been reported to occur in about 20% and death in 4 to 15% of patients. Guillain-Barré syndrome can occur a few days or weeks after symptoms of a respiratory or gastrointestinal viral infection. In some instances, surgery or vaccinations can trigger the syndrome. The disorder can develop over the course of hours or days, or it may take up to 3 to 4 weeks. A nerve conduction velocity (NCV) test can give a doctor clues to aid the diagnosis. In some instances, a spinal tap can be used in diagnosis as the cerebrospinal fluid in Guillain-Barré syndrome patients typically contains more protein than normal subjects.
Although there is no known cure for Guillain-Barre syndrome, treatment with immune globulin can lessen the severity of the illness and accelerate recovery. Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients in combination with hyaluronidase at an appropriate dose, such as, for example, a dose similar to the dose use to administer immune globulin intravenously to patients with Guillain-Barre syndrome. For example, a patient with Guillain-Barre syndrome can administered about 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase, subcutaneously. This can be administered, for example, in five doses of 400 mg/kg BW for five consecutive days. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decrease depending on, for example, the severity of the disease and the clinical response to therapy, which can be readily evaluated by one of skill in the art. 6. Idiopathic Thrombocytopenic Purpura
Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP), also known as primary immune thrombocytopenic purpura and autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura, is a reduction in platelet count (thrombocytopenia) resulting from shortened platelet survival due to anti-platelet antibodies. When platelet counts are very low (e.g. <30×109/L), bleeding into the skin (purpura) and mucous membranes can occur. Bone marrow platelet production (megakaryopoiesis) in patients with ITP is morphologically normal. In some instances, there is additional impainnent of platelet function related to antibody binding to glycoproteins on the platelet surface. ITP can present as chronic and acute forms. Approximately 80% of adults with ITP have the chronic form of disease. The highest incidence of chronic ITP is in women aged 15-50 years, although some reports suggest increasing incidence with age. ITP is relatively common in patients with HIV. While ITP can be found at any stage of the infection, its prevalence increases as HIV disease advances.
Studies have demonstrated that immune globulin can be used to treat patients with ITP (Godeau et al. (1993) Blood 82(5):1415-21, Godeau et al. (1999) Br J Haematol 1999; 107(4):716-9). Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients in combination with hyaluronidase at a dose similar to the dose use to administer immune globulin intravenously, to treat patients with ITP. For example, a patient with ITP can administered about 1 to 2 g/kg of immune globulin, in combination with hyaluronidase, subcutaneously. This can be administered over several days, or can be administered in one dose. In some examples, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin on consecutive days is administered. In another example, 1 g/kg BW is administered for 1-2 consecutive days, depending on platelet count and clinical response. The amount of immune globulin administered, and the frequency of the doses, can be increased or decrease depending on, for example, platelet count and the clinical response to therapy, which can be readily evaluated by one of skill in the art.
7. Inflammatory Myopathies: Polymyositis, Dermatomyositis and Inclusion Body Myositis
Inflammatory myopathies are a group of muscle diseases involving the inflammation and degeneration of skeletal muscle tissues. These disorders are acquired and all present with significant muscle weakness and the presence of an inflammatory response within the muscle. Dermatomyositis (DM) is the most easily recognized of the inflammatory myopathies due to its distinctive rash, which occurs as a patchy, dusky, reddish or lilac rash on the eyelids, cheeks, and bridge of the nose, and on the back or upper chest, elbows, knees and knuckles. In some patients, calcified nodules or hardened bumps develop under the skin. The rash often precedes muscle weakness, which typically develops over a period of weeks but may develop over months or even days. Dennatomyositis can occur at any age from childhood to adulthood and is more common in females than males. Approximately one third of DM patients report difficulty swallowing. Muscle pain and tenderness generally occurs in less than 25% of adults with DM, but more than 50% of children with DM complain of muscle pain and tenderness.
Polymyositis (PM) does not have the characteristic rash of dermatomyositis, and the onset of muscle weakness usually progresses slower than DM. Many PM patients present have difficulty in swallowing. In some instances, the patients also have difficulty breathing due to muscle failure. As many as one third of PM patients have muscle pain. PM. The disease affects more women than men, and rarely affects people under the age of 20, although cases of childhood and infant polymyositis have been reported.
Inclusion body myositis (IBM) is very similar to polymyositis. Onset of muscle weakness in IBM is usually very gradual, taking place over months or years. It is different from PM in that both proximal and distal muscles are affected, while generally only the proximal muscles are affected in PM. Typical findings include weakness of the wrist flexors and finger flexors. Atrophy of the forearms is characteristic of the disease, and atrophy of the quadriceps muscle is common with varying degrees of weakness in other muscles. Approximately half of the patients afflicted with IBM have difficulty swallowing. Symptoms of IBM usually begin after age 50, although no age group is excluded. IBM occurs more frequently in men than women. About one in ten cases of IBM may be hereditary.
Studies indicate that administration of immune globulin can benefit patients with these inflammatory myopathies. Immune globulin can improve muscle strength, reduce inflammation and reduce disease progression and severity (Dalakas et al. (1993) N Engl J Med 329(27):1993-2000; Dalakas et al. (2001) Neurology 56(3):323-7, Dalakas (2004) Pharmacol Ther 102(3):177-93, Walter et al. (2000) J Neurol 247(1):22-8). Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously to patients with DM, PM or IBM in combination with hyaluronidase at a dose similar to the dose used to administer immune globulin intravenously. For example, 2 g/kg BW of immune globulin can be administered, typically over several days, such as, for example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW on consecutive days.
8. Lambert-Eaton Myasthenic Syndrome
Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome (LEMS) is a rare autoimmune disorder of neuromuscular transmission first recognized clinically in association with lung cancer and subsequently in cases in which no neoplasm was detected. Patients with LEMS have a presynaptic neuromuscular junction defect. The disease is characterized clinically by proximal muscle weakness with augmentation of strength after exercise, mild oculomotor signs, depressed deep tendon reflexes and autonomic dysfunction (dry mouth, constipation, erectile failure). Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with LEMS can ameliorate symptoms. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with LEMS. For example, a patient with LEMS can be administered 2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin over several doses. For example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin can be administered on five consecutive days. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
9. Multifocal Motor Neuropathy
Multifocal motor neuropathy (MMN) with conduction block is an acquired immune-mediated demyelinating neuropathy with slowly progressive weakness, fasciculations, and cramping, without significant sensory involvement. The duration of disease prior to diagnosis ranges from several months to more than 15 years. The precise cause of MMN is unknown. Histopathologic and electrodiagnostic studies demonstrate the presence of both demyelinating and axonal injury. Motor nerves are primarily affected, although mild demyelination has been demonstrated in sensory nerves as well. Efficacy of immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive treatment further supports the immune nature of MMN. Titers of anti-GM1 antibodies are elevated in over half of the patients with MMN. Although the role of the anti-GM1 antibodies in the disease in unknown, their presence can be used as a diagnostic marker for MMN.
Subcutaneous administration of immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with MMN can to ameliorate symptoms. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with MMN. For example, a patient with MMN can be administered 2 g per kg patient body weight of immune globulin over several doses. For example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW immune globulin can be administered on five consecutive days. In another example, 1 g/kg BW can be administered on 2 consecutive days. Some patients can be given maintenance therapy, which can include, for example, doses of 400 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW, given every 2-6 weeks. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate, taking into account the patients response.
10. Myasthenia Gravis
Myasthenia gravis (MG) is a chronic autoimmune neuromuscular disease characterized by varying degrees of weakness of the skeletal muscles of the body. It is associated with the presence of antibodies to acetylcholine receptors (AChR) or to muscle-specific tyrosine kinase (MuSK) at the neuromuscular junction, although some patients are antibody negative. The clinical features of MG include fluctuating weakness and fatigability of voluntary muscles, particularly levator palpebrae, extraocular, bulbar, limb and respiratory muscles. Patients usually present with unilateral or bilateral drooping of eyelid (ptosis), double vision (diplopia), difficulty in swallowing (dysphagia) and proximal muscle weakness. Weakness of respiratory muscles can result in respiratory failure in severe cases or in acute severe exacerbations (myasthenic crisis). Myasthenia gravis occurs in all ethnic groups and both genders. It most commonly affects young adult women under 40 and older men over 60, but it can occur at any age. In some instances, thymectomy is performed to reduce symptoms.
Immune globulin can be used, for example, as maintenance therapy for patients with moderate to severe MG, typically when other treatments have been ineffective caused severe side effects, and also can be administered prior to thymectomy or during an acute exacerbation of the disease (myasthemic crisis). Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Myasthenia gravis using the methods described herein. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with MG. For example, a patient with MG can be administered doses of 400 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW every 4-6 weeks for maintenance therapy. Prior to thymectomy or during myasthemic crisis, 1-2 g/kg BW can be administered over several doses, such as, for example, five doses of 400 mg/kg BW on five consecutive days. In another example, 1 g/kg BW can be administered on 2 consecutive days.
11. Moersch-Woltmann Syndrome
Moersch-Woltmann syndrome, also known as stiff person syndrome or stiffman syndrome, is a rare neurological disorder with features of an autoimmune disease. Patients present with symptoms related to muscular rigidity and superimposed episodic spasms. Muscle rigidity spreads to involve axial muscles, primarily abdominal and thoracolumbar, as well as proximal limb muscles. Typically, co-contraction of truncal agonist and antagonistic muscles leads to a board-like appearance with hyperlordosis. Less frequently, respiratory muscle involvement leads to breathing difficulty and facial muscle involvement to a mask-like face. Treatment with immune globulin can effect decreased stiffness and heightened sensitivity scores in patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome (Dalakas et al. (2001) N Engl J Med 345(26):1870-6). Immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome using the methods described herein. Exemplary dosages include those used for intravenous administration of immune globulin to patients with Moersch-Woltmann syndrome. For example, immune globulin can be administered at doses of 400 mg/kg BW on five consecutive days. Some patients can be given maintenance therapy, which can include, for example, 1-2 g/kg BW immune globulin every 4-6 weeks. The amount of immune globulin administered can be increased or decreased as appropriate.
12. Alzheimer's Disease
Treatment for Alzheimer's disease includes treatment with intravenous inuminoglobulin (see e.g. Dodel et al. (2004) J Neural Neurosurg. Psychiatry, 75:1472-4; Solomon et al. (2007) Curr. Opin. Mol. Ther., 9:79-85; Relkin et al. (2008) Neurobiol Aging). IG contains antibodies that bind to beta amyloid (AB), which is a central component of the plaque in the brains of Alzheimer's patients. Thus, IG can help to promote the clearance of AB from the brain and block AB's toxic effects on brain cells. Hence, immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously, in combination with hyaluronidase, to patients with Alzheimer's disease using the methods described herein. Subjects to be treated include patients having mild, moderate or advanced Alzheimer's disease. It is within the level of skill of a treating physician to identify patients for treatment. Immune globulin in combination with hyaluronidase can be administered every week, every two weeks or once a month. Treatment can continue over the course of months or years. IG can be administered at doses at or between 200 mg/kg BW to 2 g/kg BW every week or every two weeks, and generally at least 200 mg/kg to 2 g/kg BW at least once a month. Treatment with immune globulin can effect an increase in patients' anti-amyloid beta antibody levels compared to levels before treatment.
13. Other Diseases and Conditions
Clinical data indicate that immune globulin can be used in the treatment of many conditions. In some instances, immune globulin can be used a the primary treatment, while in other cases, it is administered as second-line therapy when standard therapies have proven ineffective, have become intolerable, or are contraindicated. It is within the skill of a treating physician to identify such diseases or conditions. Exemplary of these include, but are not limited to, secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia (including iatrogenic immunodeficiency); specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome (including autoimmune haemolytic anaemia with immune thrombocytopenia); Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Alzheimer's Disease, Haemophagocytic syndrome; High-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion purpura; Toxic epidermal necrolysis/Steven Johnson syndrome (TEN/SJS); Toxic shock syndrome; Systemic lupus erythematosus; multiple myeloma; sepsis; bone marrow transplantation, B cell tumors; and trauma.
Immune globulin also has been shown to have antimicrobial activity against a number of bacterial, viral and fungal infections, including, but not limited to, Haemophilus influenzae type B, Psuedomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae types 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, and 23, Adenovirus types 2 and 5, Cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus VCA, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Herpes simplex virus-1, Herpes simplex virus-2, Influenza A, Measles, Parainfluenza types 1, 2 and 3, Polio, Varicella zoster virus, Apergillus and Candida albicans. Thus, immune globulin can be administered subcutaneously in combination with hyaluronidase to patients with bacterial, viral and fungal infections to augment the patient's immune system and treat the disease. In some examples, antibiotics or other antimicrobials also are administered.
I. Articles of Manufacture and Kits
Pharmaceutical compositions of immune globulin and a soluble hyaluronidase, provided together or separately, can be packaged as articles of manufacture containing packaging material, a pharmaceutical composition which is effective for treating a IG-treatable disease or condition, and a label that indicates that the composition and combinations are to be used for treating a IG-treatable diseases and conditions. Exemplary of articles of manufacture are containers including single chamber and dual chamber containers. The containers include, but are not limited to, tubes, bottles and syringes. The containers can further include a needle for subcutaneous administration.
The articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials. Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical products are well known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,323,907, 5,033,252 and 5,052,558, each of which is incorporated herein in its entirety. Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are not limited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials, containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for a selected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment. A wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions provided herein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any IG-treatable disease or condition.
Compositions of immune globulin and a soluble hyaluronidase, provided together or separately, also can be provided as kits. Kits can include a pharmaceutical composition described herein and an item for administration. For example compositions can be supplied with a device for administration, such as a syringe, an inhaler, a dosage cup, a dropper, or an applicator. The kit can, optionally, include instructions for application including dosages, dosing regimens and instructions for modes of administration. Kits also can include a pharmaceutical composition described herein and an item for diagnosis. For example, such kits can include an item for measuring the concentration, amount or activity of IG.
J. Examples
The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
Example 1
Soluble Recombinant Human PH20 (rHuPH20) Facilitates Subcutaneous Administration of Immune Globulin (IG) and Bioavailability
Subcutaneous (SQ) administration of immune globulin (IG) results in reduced bioavailability compared to intravenous (IV) administration. One study reported 63% bioavailability compared to IV administration, thereby requiring an SQ dose of 137% of the IV does to be used to achieve an equivalent bioavailability, i.e. area under the time-concentration curve (AUC) (Ochs et al. (2006) J Clin. Iminunol., 26:265-273). Thus, experiments were performed to determine if subcutaneous administration of IG (GAMMAGARD LIQUID (GGL), Baxter Biosciences) in the presence of soluble recombinant human PH20 (rHuPH20) increased the bioavailability of IG upon SQ administration, obviating the need for increased doses. The experimental study was designed to assess 1) the ability of subjects to tolerate a monthly dose of GGL in a single site via subcutaneous (SQ) route; 2) the dose of rHuPH20 per gram of GGL required to tolerate a monthly dose of GGL with no more than mild local adverse drug reactions; 3) the time required for SC administration; and 3) a comparison of the bioavailability measured by area under the curve (AUC) of GGL IV versus SQ.
Briefly, eleven adult immunodeficient patients who were on stable doses of intravenous gammaglobulin (WIG) were enrolled in the study. All patients remained on the same monthly doses of IVIG as they received prior to the study. For subcutaneous administration, patients that were receiving up to 600 mg/kg body weight of GGL every four weeks IV, received SQ infusions in a single site beginning at a dose that was ¼ of the 4-week IV dose, i.e. a 1-week dose, to determine the dose of rHuPH20 required to tolerate the 1-week dose. Subsequently, dosages of rHuPH20 were reduced and patients received the 2, 3, and finally a full four-week dose of GGL to determine the minimum rHuPH20 required to tolerate a once monthly infusion of GGL SQ.
Initial infusions were conducted using 150 U of rHuPH20 per gram of GGL. The rHuPH20 was administered through a 24-gauge SQ needle at a concentration of 150 U/ml or 1500 U/ml at a rate of 1-2 ml/min., prior to the infusion of the GGL. If 1500 U/ml rHuPH20 was used, it was diluted as follows: a) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 solution needed was 1.5 ml of below, it was diluted 1:10 using normal saline for injection; b) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 needed was above 1.5 ml but below 15 ml, it was diluted to 15 l with normal saline for injection; c) if the volume of the concentrated (1500 U/ml) rHuPH20 solution needed was 15 ml or above, it was used undiluted.
Immediately after the infusion of rHuPH20 (and within 5 minutes), the GGL was infused through the same 24-gauge SQ needle beginning at a dose that was ¼ of the 4-week dose (i.e. 1 week dose) to determine the amount of rHuPH20 needed to give one fourth of the 4-week dose in a single site. Each patient was assessed to determine if the infusion was tolerated; the infusion was deemed not to be tolerated if there were moderate or severe local reactions requiring more than one site of administration or an inability to complete the infusion in less than 3 hours. If the weekly dose of GGL was tolerated, the one-half dose (two week dose) was administered using rHuPH20 at 100 U/g GGL, and the dose of rHuPH20 was further reduced to 66 U/g GGL, then 50 U/g GGL. The dose of rHuPH20 was repeated, on a per-gram GGL basis, with increased amounts of GGL until a full 4-week dose of GGL in a single site was tolerated. If the amount of rHuPH20 was not tolerated at any point, then that weekly dose of GGL was repeated at the next interval and the amount of rHuPH20 increased until the dose was tolerated. If a subject fails to tolerate a dose for 2 successive increases in rHuPH20 dose (i.e. 3 attempts at a distinct dose of GGL), then the previously tolerated dose was determined to be the maximum tolerated dose.
The first 4 patients were evaluated for tolerability only; the last 7 patients had an IV infusion, followed by a pharmacokinetic (PK) study to compare the IV infusion to the subsequent SQ infusions. For the SQ infusions, after a monthly dose administration of GGL was achieved, the same monthly dose was repeated and a PK study performed to evaluate the T1/2, Tmax, and AUC. If AUC(SQ) was not within 90% of the AUC(IV), the dose of rHuPH20 was increased 4-fold at the next infusion, and the PK assessment was repeated.
Ten of the 11 patients achieved monthly doses of 25.5 to 61.2 grams of GGL (255 to 612 ml) in a single SQ site, at rates of 120 to 300 ml/hour. The eleventh patient withdrew following the 1-week infusion citing local discomfort. For the first patient (39001), the initial infusions were done by gravity, however, the rates were not acceptable despite increasing the dose of rHuPH20 from 150 to 300 U/g GGL. Therefore, all subsequent infusions were done using an IV peristaltic pump. The remaining 9 patients achieved the GGL monthly dose without the need to repeat doses or increase the concentration of rHuPH20. Thus, all 9 patients in whom an attempt was made to reduce the dose of rHuPH20 completed the study and were able to tolerate the infusions using 50 U/g GGL. To determine if 50 U/g GGL was the minimum rHuPH20 that could be administered, a dose of 25 U/g GGL was attempted in two patients without success: one had discomfort and the other had reduced tolerability and required administration at two sites. Thus, the minimum amount of rHuPH20 that permitted a monthly dose administration of GGL SQ was 50 U/g GGL. The results are summarized in Table 3 below. The results show that all but the first two patients were infused at rates up to 300 ml/hr with infusion times of 1.64 h (270 ml) to 3.55 h (537 ml). The rate of administration was limited primarily by the type of pump used. The IV pump frequently alarmed at rapid infusion rates. One infusion was slowed and one was interrupted due to mild infusion-site pain. Both infusions resumed and were completed.
TABLE 3
Infusion Parameters for Patients Successfully Completing Monthly SC
Infusions
Number of
monthly- Dose IgG Volume (mL) Final Max infusion Time (hrs)
Subjects dose (g) infused IgG infused rHuPH20 conc. rate to infuse
(N = 10) infusions (mean) (mean) (U/g) (mL/hr) (mean)
390001 1 25.5 255 305.9 175 2.13
390003 1 30.1 301 46.9 200 2.38
400001 1 44.5 445 49.8 300 3.05
340001 3 30.3 303 52.5 300 3.02
340002 4 39.9 399 50.0 300 3.20
390004 4 29.3 293 50.8 300 1.92
390005 3 27.2 272 50.6 300 1.64
390006 3 61.4 614 50.0 300 2.75
400002 3 53.7 537 51.5 300 3.55
400003 3 42.1 421 48.8 300 2.29
1. Tolerability Assessment
The subjects were assessed for their tolerability to the SQ infusions. Most infusions were associated with only mild infusion-related reactions (Table 4). Most common mild reactions were infusion site erythema, pain, swelling, warmth and pruritus. Moderate infusion site reactions included three cases of pain, and one case each of pruritus, swelling and warmth. No severe reactions were reported. There were complaints of transient burning during the infusion of the rHuPH20 in 10 of the infusions, with five occurring in one patient.
TABLE 4
Adverse events, regardless of causality, by periods corresponding to
dose categories
SC SC SC SC
MeDRA System Organ Class ¼ dose ½ dose ¾ dose full dose
Ear and labyrinth disorders 0 0 0 1
Eye disorders 0 1 0 3
Gastrointestinal disorders 0 1 0 2
General disorders and 26 15 20 29
administration site conditions
Immune system disorders 0 0 0 1
Infections and infestations 1 1 1 3
Musculoskeletal and connective 1 1 1 0
tissue disorders
Nervous system disorders 2 1 0 0
Respiratory, thoracic and 0 0 0 4
mediastinal disorders
Skin and subcutaneous tissue 0 0 3 1
disorders
Total 30 20 25 44
Systemic adverse events considered to be possibly or probably related to the infusions are listed in Table 5. Three were moderate and none were severe. Only the episode of mild chest pain was associated with interruption of the infusion, but the infusion was completed and subsequent infusions were well tolerated. Table 6 depicts the proportion of subcutaneous infusions that were completed without interruption for an adverse event.
One serious adverse event, an anaphylactic reaction, occurred in one patient, unrelated to study therapy. The patient, who had a history of previous allergic reactions to antibiotics, received an antibiotic on the day following her infusion with GGL/rHuPH20, and subsequently developed anaphylaxis. This patient recovered completely and was able to successfully complete the study.
There were no documented bacterial infections during this trial of PID patients. There were 9 reported cases of viral infections, all deemed not related to study therapy: 2 cases of viral gastroenteritis, 1 case of herpetic keratitis, 2 cases of sinusitis, 1 case of conjunctivitis, and 3 cases (in one patient) of influenza-like illness.
TABLE 5
Systemic non-serious, related adverse events
Adverse events by
MEDRA term Mild Mod Severe Total
Dry eye 1 0 0 1
Night sweats 1 0 0 1
Musculoskeletal discomfort 0 1 0 1
Headache 1 2 0 3
Lethargy 1 0 0 1
Chest pain 1 0 0 1
Oedema peripheral 1 0 0 1
Pain 1 0 0 1
Back pain 2 0 0 2
Total related adverse events 9 3 0 12
TABLE 6
Proportion of SC infusions completed without interruption for an
adverse event
Without Percent Inter- Percent Total
Patient interruption (%) rupted Stopped % infusions
390001 4 80 1* 0 20 5
390002 2 100 0 0 0 2
390003 4 100 0 0 0 4
400001 4 100 0 0 0 4
340001 6 100 0 0 0 6
340002 6 86 1† 0 14 7
390004 7 100 0 0 0 7
390005 7 100. 0 0 0 7
390006 6 100. 0 0 0 6
400002 6 100. 0 0 0 6
400003 7 100. 0 0 0 7
Total 59 N/A 2 0 N/A 61
*interrupted due to mild infusion-site pain
†interrupted due to mild transient chest pain
2. Pharmacokinetic Assessment
Pharmacokinetic (PK) analysis was performed on serum IgG levels. The 7 patients enrolled in the PK assessment phase of this study achieved monthly doses of 27 to 61 grams of GGL in a single site using 50 U of rHuPH20 per gram GGL (see Table 3). The PK study was performed after receiving a second monthly dose infusion of GGL. Serum samples were collected pre-infusion, 1 h post-infusion and on days 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 14, 21 and 28 (if on 28 day schedule) post-infusion. The pharmacokinetic parameters of the 7 patients are depicted in Table 7. The ratio of AUC(SQ) to AUC(IV) for the 7 patients is shown in Table 8. The results show that five of the 7 patients had AUC(SQ) within 90% of AUC (IV). Increasing the dose or rHuPH20 four-fold in the 2 subjects with a ratio less than 90% did not further improve bioavailability.
TABLE 7
Pharmacokinetic parameters of individual subjects
Patients AUC (days * g/L) T1/2 (days) Tmax (days) Cmin (g/L)
34001 461.2 61.3 3.0 12.9
34002* 387.1 114.1 4.9 11.3
356.7 43.9 4.0 11.3
39004* 256.9 113.8 5.0 7.9
264.2 44.3 6.9 7.7
39005 369.6 59.3 3.1 10.9
39006 368.9 40.3 4.8 10.8
40002 375.2 33.7 6.8 10.6
40003 356.2 37.9 4.9 9.7
Median 368.9 43.93 4.8 10.8
*Patients with repeated PK assessments following administration with an increased dose of rHuPH20.
TABLE 8
Ratio AUC(SQ) to AUC(IV) (%)
rHuPH20 concentration
Patient 50 U/g 200 U/g
34001 101.0 N/A
34002 86.5 79.6
39004 75.8 77.8
39005 102.7 N/A
39006 94.7 N/A
40002 97.3 N/A
40003 90.5 N/A
Mean 92.6 N/A
3. Summary of Results
The use of rHuPH20 by injection prior to infusion with GGL made it possible to infuse as much as 600 ml of GGL in a single subcutaneous site at infusion rates up to 300 ml per hour in this study. The rate was limited primarily by the IV pumps that were used, which are designed to alarm and shut off when the IV infiltrates and pressure increases. Although pump shut off did not occur until rates approached the 300 ml/h, the need to restart the pump did increase the time of infusion. Since there is no need to pressure alarms for subcutaneous administration, the problem of shutting off should be eliminated by switching to pumps capable of generating more pressure without alarming.
Although most of the infusions were associated with some swelling, redness, or occasionally pain or itching, all but a few were mild. Two of the six moderate reactions occurred in infusions where the rHuPH20 was reduced in an effort to find the minimum effective dose; the rHuPH20 dose of 50 U/g GGL was tolerated by 10 of the 11 subjects. One subject, who had not previously experienced subcutaneous infusions, withdrew after the first one week dose citing discomfort at the site of the lower abdomen. All other infusions were completed despite the mild reactions, with 97% of the infusions being completed without interruption. Most reactions were treated with cool packs and only a few required acetaminophen or diphenhydramine.
The mean bioavailability of GGL upon subcutaneously administering in combination with rHuPH20 was 92% of the bioavailability of GGL following IV administration. This study suggests that the increased diffusion afforded by the rHuPH20 improved absorption of GGL. Further, the trough levels achieved by monthly subcutaneous dosing of GGL in this study are identical to those achieved by IV administration. Thus, there is no need to increase the frequency of administration of GGL by subcutaneous dosing versus IV dosing; subcutaneous administration of GGL in combination with rHuPH20 requires only a single SQ site and can be achieved at rates of infusion up to 300 ml/h.
In conclusion, rHuPH20 facilitated administration of a full monthly dose of GGL in a single site at rates up to 300 ml/h in a group of adult immunodeficient subjects. The bioavailability of the combination was 92% of the IV bioavailability, based on AUC of the time versus IgG concentration curve. This suggests that rHuPH20 improves absorption of subcutaneous administered GGL. Most of the local side effects were mild and did not result in slowing or interrupting the infusions.
Example 2
Generation of a Soluble rHuPH20-Expressing Cell Line
The HZ24 plasmid (set forth in SEQ ID NO:52) was used to transfect Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO cells) (see e.g. application Ser. Nos. 10,795,095, 11/065,716 and 11/238,171). The HZ24 plasmid vector for expression of soluble rHuPH20 contains a pCI vector backbone (Promega), DNA encoding amino acids 1-482 of human PH20 hyaluronidase (SEQ ID NO:49), an internal ribosomal entry site (IRES) from the ECMV virus (Clontech), and the mouse dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) gene. The pCl vector backbone also includes DNA encoding the Beta-lactamase resistance gene (AmpR), an f1 origin of replication, a Cytomegalovirus immediate-early enhancer/promoter region (CMV), a chimeric intron, and an SV40 late polyadenylation signal (SV40). The DNA encoding the soluble rHuPH20 construct contains an Nhel site and a Kozak consensus sequence prior to the DNA encoding the methionine at amino acid position 1 of the native 35 amino acid signal sequence of human PH20, and a stop codon following the DNA encoding the tyrosine corresponding to amino acid position 482 of the human PH20 hyaluronidase set forth in SEQ ID NO:1), followed by a BamHI restriction site. The construct pCI-PH20-IRES-DHER-SV40pa (HZ24), therefore, results in a single mRNA species driven by the CMV promoter that encodes amino acids 1-482 of human PH20 (set forth in SEQ ID NO:3) and amino acids 1-186 of mouse dihydrofolate reductase (set forth in SEQ ID NO:53), separated by the internal ribosomal entry site (IRES).
Non-transfected DG44 CHO cells growing in GIBCO Modified CD-CHO media for DHFR(−) cells, supplemented with 4 mM Glutamine and 18 ml/L Plurionic F68/L (Gibco), were seeded at 0.5×106 cells/ml in a shaker flask in preparation for transfection. Cells were grown at 37° C. in 5% CO2 in a humidified incubator, shaking at 120 rpm. Exponentially growing non-transfected DG44 CHO cells were tested for viability prior to transfection.
Sixty million viable cells of the non-transfected DG44 CHO cell culture were pelleted and resuspended to a density of 2×107 cells in 0.7 mL of 2× transfection buffer (2× HeBS: 40 mM Hepes, pH 7.0, 274 mM NaCl, 10 mM KCl, 1.4 mM Na2HPO4, 12 mM dextrose). To each aliquot of resuspended cells, 0.09 mL (250 μg) of the linear HZ24 plasmid (linearized by overnight digestion with Cla I (New England Biolabs) was added, and the cell/DNA solutions were transferred into 0.4 cm gap BTX (Gentronics) electroporation cuvettes at room temperature. A negative control electroporation was performed with no plasmid DNA mixed with the cells. The cell/plasmid mixes were electroporated with a capacitor discharge of 330 V and 960 μF or at 350 V and 960 μF.
The cells were removed from the cuvettes after electroporation and transferred into 5 mL of Modified CD-CHO media for DHFR(−) cells, supplemented with 4 mM Glutamine and 18 ml/L Plurionic F68/L (Gibco), and allowed to grow in a well of a 6-well tissue culture plate without selection for 2 days at 37° C. in 5% CO2 in a humidified incubator.
Two days post-electroporation, 0.5 mL of tissue culture media was removed from each well and tested for the presence of hyaluronidase activity, using the microturbidity assay described in Example 3.
TABLE 9
Initial Hyaluronidase Activity of HZ24 Transfected
DG44 CHO cells at 40 hours post-transfection
Activity
Dilution Units/ml
Transfection 1 1 to 10 0.25
330 V
Transfection 2 1 to 10 0.52
350 V
Negative 1 to 10 0.015
Control
Cells from Transfection 2 (350V) were collected from the tissue culture well, counted and diluted to 1×104 to 2×104 viable cells per mL. A 0.1 mL aliquot of the cell suspension was transferred to each well of five, 96 well round bottom tissue culture plates. One hundred microliters of CD-CHO media (GIBCO) containing 4 mM GlutaMAX™-1 supplement (GIBCO™, Invitrogen Corporation) and without hypoxanthine and thymidine supplements were added to the wells containing cells (final volume 0.2 mL). Ten clones were identified from the 5 plates grown without methotrexate.
TABLE 10
Hyaluronidase activity of identified clones
Relative
Plate/Well ID Hyaluronidase
1C3 261
2C2 261
3D3 261
3E5 243
3C6 174
2G8 103
1B9 304
2D9 273
4D10 302
Six HZ24 clones were expanded in culture and transferred into shaker flasks as single cell suspensions. Clones 3D3, 3E5, 2G8, 2D9, 1E11, and 4D10 were plated into 96-well round bottom tissue culture plates using a two-dimensional infinite dilution strategy in which cells were diluted 1:2 down the plate, and 1:3 across the plate, starting at 5000 cells in the top left hand well. Diluted clones were grown in a background of 500 non-transfected DG44 CHO cells per well, to provide necessary growth factors for the initial days in culture. Ten plates were made per subclone, with 5 plates containing 50 nM methotrexate and 5 plates without methotrexate.
Clone 3D3 produced 24 visual subclones (13 from the no methotrexate treatment, and 11 from the 50 nM methotrexate treatment. Significant hyaluronidase activity was measured in the supernatants from 8 of the 24 subclones (>50 Units/mL), and these 8 subclones were expanded into T-25 tissue culture flasks. Clones isolated from the methotrexate treatment protocol were expanded in the presence of 50 nM methotrexate. Clone 3D35M was further expanded in 500 nM methotrexate giving rise to clones producing in excess of 1,000 Units/ml in shaker flasks (clone 3D35M; or Gen1 3D35M). A master cell bank (MCB) of the 3D35M cells was then prepared.
Example 3
Determination of Hyaluronidase Activity of Soluble rHuPH20
Hyaluronidase activity of soluble rHuPH20 in samples such as cell cultures, purification fractions and purified solutions was determined using a tubidometric assay, which based on the formation of an insoluble precipitate when hyaluronic acid binds with serum albumin. The activity is measured by incubating soluble rHuPH20 with sodium hyaluronate (hyaluronic acid) for a set period of time (10 minutes) and then precipitating the undigested sodium hyaluronate with the addition of acidified serum albumin. The turbidity of the resulting sample is measured at 640 nm after a 30 minute development period. The decrease in turbidity resulting from enzyme activity on the sodium hyaluronate substrate is a measure of the soluble rHuPH20 hyaluronidase activity. The method is performed using a calibration curve generated with dilutions of a soluble rHuPH20 assay working reference standard, and sample activity measurements are made relative to this calibration curve.
Dilutions of the sample were prepared in Enzyme Diluent Solutions. The Enzyme Diluent Solution was prepared by dissolving 33.0±0.05 mg of hydrolyzed gelatin in 25.0 mL of the 50 mM PIPES Reaction Buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM PIPES, pH 5.5) and 25.0 mL of SWFI, and diluting 0.2 mL of 25% Buminate solution into the mixture and vortexing for 30 seconds. This was performed within 2 hours of use and stored on ice until needed. The samples were diluted to an estimated 1-2 U/mL. Generally, the maximum dilution per step did not exceed 1:100 and the initial sample size for the first dilution was not be less than 20 μL. The minimum sample volumes needed to perform the assay were: In-process Samples, FPLC Fractions: 80 μL; Tissue Culture Supernatants:1 mL; Concentrated Material 80 μL; Purified or Final Step Material: 80 μL. The dilutions were made in in triplicate in a Low Protein Binding 96-well plate, and 30 μL of each dilution was transferred to Optilux black/clear bottom plates (BD BioSciences).
Dilutions of known soluble rHuPH20 with a concentration of 2.5 U/mL were prepared in Enzyme Diluent Solution to generate a standard curve and added to the Optilux plate in triplicate. The dilutions included 0 U/mL, 0.25 U/mL, 0.5 U/mL, 1.0 U/mL, 1.5 U/mL, 2.0 U/mL, and 2.5 U/mL. “Reagent blank” wells that contained 60 μL of Enzyme Diluent Solution were included in the plate as a negative control. The plate was then covered and warmed on a heat block for 5 minutes at 37° C. The cover was removed and the plate was shaken for 10 seconds. After shaking, the plate was returned to the plate to the heat block and the MULTIDROP 384 Liquid Handling Device was primed with the warm 0.25 mg/mL sodium hyaluronate solution (prepared by dissolving 100 mg of sodium hyaluronate (LifeCore Biomedical) in 20.0 mL of SWFI. This was mixed by gently rotating and/or rocking at 2-8° C. for 2-4 hours, or until completely dissolved). The reaction plate was transferred to the MULTIDROP 384 and the reaction was initiated by pressing the start key to dispense 30 μL sodium hyaluronate into each well. The plate was then removed from the MULTIDROP 384 and shaken for 10 seconds before being transferred to a heat block with the plate cover replaced. The plate was incubated at 37° C. for 10 minutes
The MULTIDROP 384 was prepared to stop the reaction by priming the machine with Serum Working Solution and changing the volume setting to 240 μL. (25 mL of Serum Stock Solution [1 volume of Horse Serum (Sigma) was diluted with 9 volumes of 500 mM Acetate Buffer Solution and the pH was adjusted to 3.1 with hydrochloric acid] in 75 mL of 500 mM Acetate Buffer Solution). The plate was removed from the heat block and placed onto the MULTIDROP 384 and 240 μL of serum Working Solutions was dispensed into the wells. The plate was removed and shaken on a plate reader for 10 seconds. After a further 15 minutes, the turbidity of the samples was measured at 640 nm and the hyaluronidase activity (in U/mL) of each sample was determined by fitting to the standard curve.
Specific activity (Units/mg) was calculated by dividing the hyaluronidase activity (U/ml) by the protein concentration (mg/mL).
Example 4
Production and Purification of Gen1 Human sPH20
A. 5 L Bioreactor Process
A vial of 3D35M was thawed and expanded from shaker flasks through 1 L spinner flasks in CD-CHO media (Invitrogen, Carlsbad Calif.) supplemented with 100 nM Methotrexate and GlutaMAX™-1 (Invitrogen). Cells were transferred from spinner flasks to a 5 L bioreactor (Braun) at an inoculation density of 4×105 viable cells per ml. Parameters were temperature Setpoint 37° C., pH 7.2 (starting Setpoint), with Dissolved Oxygen Setpoint 25% and an air overlay of 0-100 cc/min. At 168 hrs, 250 ml of Feed #1 Medium (CD CHO with 50 g/L Glucose) was added. At 216 hours, 250 ml of Feed #2 Medium (CD CHO with 50 g/L Glucose and 10 mM Sodium Butyrate) was added, and at 264 hours 250 ml of Feed #2 Medium was added. This process resulted in a final productivity of 1600 Units per ml with a maximal cell density of 6×106 cells/ml. The addition of sodium butyrate was to dramatically enhance the production of soluble rHuPH20 in the final stages of production.
Conditioned media from the 3D35M clone was clarified by depth filtration and tangential flow diafiltration into 10 mM Hepes pH 7.0. Soluble rHuPH20 was then purified by sequential chromatography on Q Sepharose (Pharmacia) ion exchange, Phenyl Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography, phenyl boronate (Prometics) and Hydroxapatite Chromatography (Biorad, Richmond, Calif.).
Soluble rHuPH20 bound to Q Sepharose and eluted at 400 mM NaCl in the same buffer. The eluate was diluted with 2M ammonium sulfate to a final concentration of 500 mM ammonium sulfate and passed through a Phenyl Sepharose (low sub) column, followed by binding under the same conditions to a phenyl boronate resin. The soluble rHuPH20 was eluted from the phenyl sepharose resin in Hepes pH 6.9 after washing at pH 9.0 in 50 mM bicine without ammonium sulfate. The eluate was loaded onto a ceramic hydroxyapatite resin at pH 6.9 in 5 mM potassium phosphate and 1 mM CaCl2 and eluted with 80 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.4 with 0.1 mM CaCl2.
The resultant purified soluble rHuPH20 possessed a specific activity in excess of 65,000 USP Units/mg protein by way of the microturbidity assay (Example 16) using the USP reference standard. Purified sPH20 eluted as a single peak from 24 to 26 minutes from a Pharmacia 5RPC styrene divinylbenzene column with a gradient between 0.1% TFA/H2O and 0.1% TFA/90% acetonitrile/10% H2O and resolved as a single broad 61 kDa band by SDS electrophoresis that reduced to a sharp 51 kDa band upon treatment with PNGASE-F. N-terminal amino acid sequencing revealed that the leader peptide had been efficiently removed.
B. Upstream Cell Culture Expansion Process into 100 L Bioreactor Cell Culture
A scaled-up process was used to separately purify soluble rHuPH20 from four different vials of 3D35M cell to produce 4 separate batches of sHuPH20; HUA0406C, HUA0410C, HUA0415C and HUA0420C. Each vial was separately expanded and cultured through a 125 L bioreactor, then purified using column chromatography. Samples were taken throughout the process to assess such parameters as enzyme yield. The description of the process provided below sets forth representative specifications for such things as bioreactor starting and feed media volumes, transfer cell densities, and wash and elution volumes. The exact numbers vary slightly with each batch, and are detailed in Tables 11 to 18.
Four vials of 3D35M cells were thawed in a 37° C. water bath, CD CHO containing 100 nM methotrexate and 40 mL/L GlutaMAX was added and the cells were centrifuged. The cells were re-suspended in a 125 mL shake flask with 20 mL of fresh media and placed in a 37° C., 7% CO2 incubator. The cells were expanded up to 40 mL in the 125 mL shake flask. When the cell density reached 1.5-2.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 125 mL spinner flask in a 100 mL culture volume. The flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached 1.5-2.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 250 mL spinner flask in 200 mL culture volume, and the flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2, When the cell density reached 1.5-2.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 1 L spinner flask in 800 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached 1.5-2.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 6 L spinner flask in 5 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached 1.5-2.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 36 L spinner flask in 20 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2.
A 125 L reactor was sterilized with steam at 121° C., 20 PSI and 65 L of CD CHO media was added. Before use, the reactor was checked for contamination. When the cell density in the 36 L spinner flasks reached 1.8-2.5×106 cells/mL, 20 L cell culture were transferred from the 36 L spinner flasks to the 125 L bioreactor (Braun), resulting a final volume of 85 L and a seeding density of approximately 4×105 cells/mL. Parameters were temperature setpoint, 37° C.; pH: 7.2; Dissolved oxygen: 25%±10%; Impeller Speed 50 rpm; Vessel Pressure 3 psi; Air Sparge 1 L/min.; Air Overlay: 1 L/min. The reactor was sampled daily for cell counts, pH verification, media analysis, protein production and retention. Nutrient feeds were added during the run. At Day 6, 3.4 L of Feed #1 Medium (CD CHO+50 g/L Glucose+40 mL/L GlutaMAX™-1) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36.5° C. At day 9, 3.5 L of Feed #2 (CD CHO+50 g/L Glucose+40 mL/L GlutaMAX™-1+1.1 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36° C. At day 11, 3.7. L of Feed #3 (CD CHO+50 g/L Glucose+40 mL/L GlutaMAX™-1+1.1 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and the culture temperature was changed to 35.5° C. The reactor was harvested at 14 days or when the viability of the cells dropped below 50%. The process resulted in production of soluble rHuPH20 with an enzymatic activity of 1600 Units/ml with a maximal cell density of 8 million cells/mL. At harvest, the culture was sampled for mycoplasma, bioburden, endotoxin, and virus in vitro and in vivo, transmission electron microscopy (TEM) for viral particles, and enzyme activity.
The one hundred liter bioreactor cell culture harvest was filtered through a series of disposable capsule filters having a polyethersulfone medium (Sartorius): first through a 8.0 μm depth capsule, a 0.65 μm depth capsule, a 0.22 μm capsule, and finally through a 0.22 μm Sartopore 2000 cm2 filter and into a 100 L sterile storage bag. The culture was concentrated 10× using two TFF with Spiral Polyethersulfone 30 kDa MWCO filters (Millipore), followed by a 6× buffer exchange with 10 mM HEPES, 25 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.0 into a 0.22 μm final filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag. Table 11 provides monitoring data related to the cell culture, harvest, concentration and buffer exchange steps.
TABLE 11
Monitoring data for cell culture, harvest, concentration and
buffer exchange steps.
Parameter HUA0406C HUA04010C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Time from thaw to inoculate 100 L 21 19 17 18
bioreactor (days)
100 L inoculation density (×106 cells/mL) 0.45 0.33 0.44 0.46
Doubling time in logarithmic 29.8 27.3 29.2 23.5
growth (hr)
Max. cell density (×106 cells/mL) 5.65 8.70 6.07 9.70
Harvest viability (%) 41 48 41 41
Harvest titer (U/ml) 1964 1670 991 1319
Time in 100-L bioreactor (days) 13 13 12 13
Clarified harvest volume (mL) 81800 93300 91800 89100
Clarified harvest enzyme assay 2385 1768 1039 1425
(U/mL)
Concentrate enzyme assay 22954 17091 8561 17785
(U/mL)
Buffer exchanged concentrate 15829 11649 9915 8679
enzyme assay (U/mL)
Filtered buffer exchanged 21550 10882 9471 8527
concentrate enzyme assay (U/mL)
Buffer exchanged concentrate 10699 13578 12727 20500
volume (mL)
Ratio enzyme units 0.87 0.96 1.32 1.4
concentration/harvest
A Q Sepharose (Pharmacia) ion exchange column (3 L resin, Height=20 cm, Diameter=14 cm) was prepared. Wash samples were collected for a determination of pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL) assay. The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.5. The concentrated, diafiltered harvest was loaded onto the Q column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 column volumes of 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.5 and 10 mM Hepes, 50 mM NaCl, pH 7.0. The protein was eluted with 10 mM Hepes, 400 mM NaCl, pH 7.0 and filtered through a 0.22 μm final filter into a sterile bag.
Phenyl-Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography was next performed. A Phenyl-Sepharose (PS) column (9.1 L resin, Height=29 cm, Diameter=20 cm) was prepared. The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, 0.1 mM CaCl2, pH 7.0. The protein eluate from above was supplemented with 2M ammonium sulfate, 1 M potassium phosphate and 1 M CaCl2 stock solutions to final concentrations of 5 mM, 0.5 M and 0.1 mM, respectively. The protein was loaded onto the PS column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate and 0.1 mM CaCl2 pH 7.0 was added at 100 cm/hr. The flow through was passed through a 0.22 μm final filter into a sterile bag.
The PS-purified protein was the loaded onto an aminophenyl boronate column
(ProMedics) (6.3 L resin, Height=20 cm, Diameter=20 cm) that had been equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate. The protein was passed through the column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr, and the column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, pH 7.0. The column was then washed with 20 mM bicine, 100 mM NaCl, pH 9.0 and the protein eluted with 50 mM Hepes, 100 mM NaCl pH 6.9 through a sterile filter and into a 20 L sterile bag. The eluate was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
A hydroxyapatite (HAP) column (BioRad) (1.6 L resin, Height=10 cm, Diameter=14 cm) was equilibrated with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2 pH 7.0. Wash samples were collected and tested for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The aminophenyl boronate purified protein was supplemented with potassium phosphate and CaCl2 to yield final concentrations of 5 mM potassium phosphate and 0.1 mM CaCl2 and loaded onto the HAP column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2, then 10 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2 pH. The protein was eluted with 70 mM potassium phosphate pH 7.0 and filtered through a 0.22 μm filter into a 5 L sterile storage bag. The eluate was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
The HAP-purified protein was then pumped through a 20 nM viral removal filter via a pressure tank. The protein was added to the DV20 pressure tank and filter (Pall Corporation), passing through an Ultipor DV20 Filter with 20 nm pores (Pall Corporation) into a sterile 20 L storage bag. The filtrate was tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, oligosaccharide, monosaccharide and sialic acid profiling, and process-related impurities. The protein in the filtrate was then concentrated to 1 mg/mL using a 10 kD molecular weight cut off (MWCO) Sartocon Slice tangential flow filtration (TFF) system (Sartorius). The filter was first prepared by washing with a Hepes/saline solution (10 mM Hepes, 130 mM NaCl, pH 7.0) and the permeate was sampled for pH and conductivity. Following concentration, the concentrated protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration and enzyme activity. A 6× buffer exchange was performed on the concentrated protein into the final buffer: 10 mM Hepes, 130 mM NaCl, pH 7.0. The concentrated protein was passed though a 0.22 μm filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag. The protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, free sulfhydryl groups, oligosaccharide profiling and osmolarity.
Tables 12 to 18 provide monitoring data related to each of the purification steps described above, for each 3D35M cell lot.
TABLE 12
Q sepharose column data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Load volume 10647 13524 12852 20418
(mL)
Load Volume/ 3.1 4.9 4.5 7.3
Resin Volume
ratio
Column 2770 3840 2850 2880
Volume (mL)
Eluate volume 6108 5923 5759 6284
(mL)
Protein Conc. 2.8 3.05 2.80 2.86
of Eluate
(mg/mL)
Eluate Enzyme 24493 26683 18321 21052
Assay (U/mL)
Enzyme Yield 65 107 87 76
(%)
TABLE 13
Phenyl Sepharose column data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Volume Before 5670 5015 5694 6251
Stock Solution
Addition (mL)
Load Volume 7599 6693 7631 8360
(mL)
Column 9106 9420 9340 9420
Volume (mL)
Load Volume/ 0.8 0.71 0.82 0.89
Resin Volume
ratio
Eluate volume 16144 18010 16960 17328
(mL)
Protein Cone 0.4 0.33 0.33 0.38
of Eluate
(mg/mL)
Eluate Enzyme 8806 6585 4472 7509
Assay (U/mL)
Protein Yield 41 40 36 37
(%)
Enzyme Yield 102 88 82 96
(%)
TABLE 14
Amino Phenyl Boronate column data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Load Volume 16136 17958 16931 17884
(mL)
Load Volume/ 2.99 3.15 3.08 2.98
Resin Volume
ratio
Column 5400 5700 5500 5300
Volume (mL)
Eluate volume 17595 22084 20686 19145
(mL)
Protein Conc. 0.0 0.03 0.03 0.04
of Eluate
(mg/mL)
Protein Conc. not tested 0.03 0.00 0.04
of Filtered
Eluate
(mg/mL)
Eluate Enzyme 4050 2410 1523 4721
Assay (U/mL)
Protein Yield 0 11 11 12
(%)
Enzyme Yield not 41 40 69
(%) determined
TABLE 15
Hydroxyapatite column data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Volume Before 16345 20799 20640 19103
Stock Solution
Addition (mL)
Load Volume/ 10.95 13.58 14.19 12.81
Resin Volume
ratio
Column 1500 1540 1462 1500
Volume (mL)
Load volume 16429 20917 20746 19213
(mL)
Eluate volume 4100 2415 1936 2419
(mL)
Protein Conc. not tested 0.24 0.17 0.23
of Eluate
(mg/mL)
Protein Conc. NA NA 0.17 NA
of Filtered
Eluate
(mg/mL)
Eluate Enzyme 14051 29089 20424 29826
Assay (U/mL)
Protein Yield Not tested 93 53 73
(%)
Enzyme Yield 87 118 140 104
(%)
TABLE 16
DV20 filtration data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Start volume 4077 2233 1917 2419
(mL)
Filtrate Volume 4602 3334 2963 3504
(mL)
Protein Conc. 0.1 NA 0.09 NA
of Filtrate
(mg/mL)
Protein Conc. NA 0.15 0.09 0.16
of Filtered
Eluate
(mg/mL)
Protein Yield not tested 93 82 101
(%)
TABLE 17
Final concentration data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Start volume 4575 3298 2963 3492
(mL)
Concentrate 562 407 237 316
Volume (mL)
Protein Conc. 0.9 1.24 1.16 1.73
of Concentrate
(mg/mL)
Protein Yield 111 102 103 98
(%)
TABLE 18
Buffer Exchange into Final Formulation data
Parameter HUA0406C HUA0410C HUA0415C HUA0420C
Start Volume 562 407 237 316
(mL)
Final Volume 594 516 310 554
Buffer
Exchanged
Concentrate
(mL)
Protein Conc. 1.00 0.97 0.98 1.00
of Concentrate
(mg/mL)
Protein Conc. 0.95 0.92 0.95 1.02
of Filtered
Concentrate
(mg/mL)
Protein Yield 118 99 110 101
(%)
The purified and concentrated soluble rHuPH20 protein was aseptically filled into sterile vials with 5 mL and 1 mL fill volumes. The protein was passed though a 0.22 μm filter to an operator controlled pump that was used to fill the vials using a gravimetric readout. The vials were closed with stoppers and secured with crimped caps. The closed vials were visually inspected for foreign particles and then labeled. Following labeling, the vials were flash-frozen by submersion in liquid nitrogen for no longer than 1 minute and stored at ≤15° C. (−20±5° C.).
Example 5
Production Gen2 Cells Containing Soluble Human PH20 (rHuPH20)
The Gen1 3D35M cell line described in Example 2 was adapted to higher methotrexate levels to produce generation 2 (Gen2) clones. 3D35M cells were seeded from established methotrexate-containing cultures into CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1™ and 1.0 μM methotrexate. The cells were adapted to a higher methotrexate level by growing and passaging them 9 times over a period of 46 days in a 37° C., 7% CO2 humidified incubator. The amplified population of cells was cloned out by limiting dilution in 96-well tissue culture plates containing medium with 2.0 μM methotrexate. After approximately 4 weeks, clones were identified and clone 3E10B was selected for expansion. 3E10B cells were grown in CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1™ and 2.0 μM methotrexate for 20 passages. A master cell bank (MCB) of the 3E10B cell line was created and frozen and used for subsequent studies.
Amplification of the cell line continued by culturing 3E10B cells in CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1™ and 4.0 μM methotrexate. After the 12th passage, cells were frozen in vials as a research cell bank (RCB). One vial of the RCB was thawed and cultured in medium containing 8.0 μM methotrexate. After 5 days, the methotrexate concentration in the medium was increased to 16.0 μM, then 20.0 μM 18 days later. Cells from the 8th passage in medium containing 20.0 μM methotrexate were cloned out by limiting dilution in 96-well tissue culture plates containing CD CHO medium containing 4 mM GlutaMAX-1™ and 20.0 μM methotrexate. Clones were identified 5-6 weeks later and clone 2B2 was selected for expansion in medium containing 20.0 μM methotrexate. After the 11th passage, 2B2 cells were frozen in vials as a research cell bank (RCB).
The resultant 2B2 cells are dihydrofolate reductase deficient (dhfr-) DG44 CHO cells that express soluble recombinant human PH20 (rHuPH20). The soluble PH20 is present in 2B2 cells at a copy number of approximately 206 copies/cell. Southern blot analysis of Spe I-, Xba I- and BamH I/Hind III-digested genomic 2B2 cell DNA using a rHuPH20-specific probe revealed the following restriction digest profile: one major hybridizing band of ˜7.7 kb and four minor hybridizing bands (˜13.9, ˜6.6, ˜5.7 and ˜4.6 kb) with DNA digested with Spe I; one major hybridizing band of ˜5.0 kb and two minor hybridizing bands (˜13.9 and ˜6.5 kb) with DNA digested with Xba I; and one single hybridizing band of ˜1.4 kb observed using 2B2 DNA digested with BamH I/Hind III. Sequence analysis of the mRNA transcript indicated that the derived cDNA (SEQ ID NO:56) was identical to the reference sequence (SEQ ID NO:49) except for one base pair difference at position 1131, which was observed to be a thymidine (T) instead of the expected cytosine (C). This is a silent mutation, with no effect on the amino acid sequence.
Example 6
A. Production of Gen2 Soluble rHuPH20 in 300 L Bioreactor Cell Culture
A vial of HZ24-2B2 was thawed and expanded from shaker flasks through 36 L spinner flasks in CD-CHO media (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 20 μM methotrexate and GlutaMAX-1™ (Invitrogen). Briefly, the a vial of cells was thawed in a 37° C. water bath, media was added and the cells were centrifuged. The cells were resuspended in a 125 mL shake flask with 20 mL of fresh media and placed in a 37° C., 7% CO2 incubator. The cells were expanded up to 40 mL in the 125 mL shake flask. When the cell density reached greater than 1.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 125 mL spinner flask in a 100 mL culture volume. The flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached greater than 1.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 250 mL spinner flask in 200 mL culture volume, and the flask was incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached greater than 1.5×106 cells/mL, the culture was expanded into a 1 L spinner flask in 800 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached greater than 1.5×106 cells/mL the culture was expanded into a 6 L spinner flask in 5000 mL culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2. When the cell density reached greater than 1.5×106 cells/mL the culture was expanded into a 36 L spinner flask in 32 L culture volume and incubated at 37° C., 7% CO2.
A 400 L reactor was sterilized and 230 mL of CD-CHO media was added. Before use, the reactor was checked for contamination. Approximately 30 L cells were transferred from the 36 L spinner flasks to the 400 L bioreactor (Braun) at an inoculation density of 4.0×105 viable cells per ml and a total volume of 260 L. Parameters were temperature setpoint, 37° C.; Impeller Speed 40-55 RPM; Vessel Pressure: 3 psi; Air Sparge 0.5-1.5 L/Min.; Air Overlay: 3 L/min. The reactor was sampled daily for cell counts, pH verification, media analysis, protein production and retention. Also, during the run nutrient feeds were added. At 120 hrs (day 5), 10.4 L of Feed #1 Medium (4×CD-CHO+33 g/L Glucose+160 mL/L Glutamax-1™+83 mL/L Yeastolate+33 mg/L rHulnsulin) was added. At 168 hours (day 7), 10.8 L of Feed #2 (2×CD-CHO+33 g/L Glucose+80 mL/L Glutamax-1™ +167 mL/L Yeastolate+0.92 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36.5° C. At 216 hours (day 9), 10.8 L of Feed #3 (1×CD-CHO+50 g/L Glucose+50 mL/L Glutamax-1™+250 mL/L Yeastolate+1.80 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 36° C. At 264 hours (day 11), 10.8 L of Feed #4 (1×CD-CHO+33 g/L Glucose+33 mL/L Glutamax-1™+250 mL/L Yeastolate+0.92 g/L Sodium Butyrate) was added, and culture temperature was changed to 35.5° C. The addition of the feed media was observed to dramatically enhance the production of soluble rHuPH20 in the final stages of production. The reactor was harvested at 14 or 15 days or when the viability of the cells dropped below 40%. The process resulted in a final productivity of 17,000 Units per ml with a maximal cell density of 12 million cells/mL. At harvest, the culture was sampled for mycoplasma, bioburden, endotoxin and viral in vitro and in vivo, Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) and enzyme activity.
The culture was pumped by a peristaltic pump through four Millistak filtration system modules (Millipore) in parallel, each containing a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 4-8 μm and a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 1.4-1.1 μm, followed by a cellulose membrane, then through a second single Millistak filtration system (Millipore) containing a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to 0.4-0.11 μm and a layer of diatomaceous earth graded to <0.1 μm, followed by a cellulose membrane, and then through a 0.22 μm final filter into a sterile single use flexible bag with a 350 L capacity. The harvested cell culture fluid was supplemented with 10 mM EDTA and 10 mM Tris to a pH of 7.5. The culture was concentrated 10× with a tangential flow filtration (TFF) apparatus using four Sartoslice TFF 30 kDa molecular weight cut-off (MWCO) polyether sulfone (PES) filter (Sartorious), followed by a 10× buffer exchange with 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.5 into a 0.22 μm final filter into a 50 L sterile storage bag.
The concentrated, diafiltered harvest was inactivated for virus. Prior to viral inactivation, a solution of 10% Triton X-100, 3% tri (n-butyl) phosphate (TNBP) was prepared. The concentrated, diafiltered harvest was exposed to 1% Triton X-100, 0.3% TNBP for 1 hour in a 36 L glass reaction vessel immediately prior to purification on the Q column.
B. Purification of Gent soluble rHuPH20
A Q Sepharose (Pharmacia) ion exchange column (9 L resin, H=29 cm, D=20 cm) was prepared. Wash samples were collected for a determination of pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL) assay. The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.5. Following viral inactivation, the concentrated, diafiltered harvest was loaded onto the Q column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 column volumes of 10 mM Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4, pH 7.5 and 10 mM Hepes, 50 mM NaCl, pH7.0. The protein was eluted with 10 mM Hepes, 400 mM NaCl, pH 7.0 into a 0.22 μm final filter into sterile bag. The eluate sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and hyaluronidase activity. A280 absorbance reading were taken at the beginning and end of the exchange.
Phenyl-Sepharose (Pharmacia) hydrophobic interaction chromatography was next performed. A Phenyl-Speharose (PS) column (19-21 L resin, H=29 cm, D=30 cm) was prepared. The wash was collected and sampled for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, 0.1 mM CaCl2, pH 7.0. The protein eluate from the Q sepharose column was supplemented with 2M anunonium sulfate, 1 M potassium phosphate and 1 M CaCl2 stock solutions to yield final concentrations of 5 mM, 0.5 M and 0.1 mM, respectively. The protein was loaded onto the PS column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr and the column flow thru collected. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate and 0.1 mM CaCl2 pH 7.0 at 100 cm/hr and the wash was added to the collected flow thru. Combined with the column wash, the flow through was passed through a 0.22 μm final filter into a sterile bag. The flow through was sampled for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
An aminophenyl boronate column (Promtics) was prepared. The wash was collected and sampled for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The column was equilibrated with 5 column volumes of 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate. The PS flow through containing purified protein was loaded onto the aminophenyl boronate column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, pH 7.0. The column was washed with 20 mM bicine, 0.5 M ammonium sulfate, pH 9.0. The column was washed with 20 mM bicine, 100 mM sodium chloride, pH 9.0. The protein was eluted with 50 mM Hepes, 100 mM NaCl, pH 6.9 and passed through a sterile filter into a sterile bag. The eluted sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
The hydroxyapatite (HAP) column (Biorad) was prepared. The wash was collected and test for pH, conductivity and endotoxin (LAL assay). The column was equilibrated with 5 mM potassium phosphate, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2, pH 7.0. The aminophenyl boronate purified protein was supplemented to final concentrations of 5 mM potassium phosphate and 0.1 mM CaCl2 and loaded onto the HAP column at a flow rate of 100 cm/hr. The column was washed with 5 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2. The column was next washed with 10 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7, 100 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM CaCl2. The protein was eluted with 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 and passed through a 0.22 μm sterile filter into a sterile bag. The eluted sample was tested for bioburden, protein concentration and enzyme activity.
The HAP purified protein was then passed through a viral removal filter. The sterilized Virosart filter (Sartorius) was first prepared by washing with 2 L of 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0. Before use, the filtered buffer was sampled for pH and conductivity. The HAP purified protein was pumped via a peristaltic pump through the 20 nM viral removal filter. The filtered protein in 70 mM potassium phosphate, pH 7.0 was passed through a 0.22 μm final filter into a sterile bag. The viral filtered sample was tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, oligosaccharide, monosaccharide and sialic acid profiling. The sample also was tested for process related impurities.
The protein in the filtrate was then concentrated to 10 mg/mL using a 10 kD molecular weight cut off (MWCO) Sartocon Slice tangential flow filtration (TFF) system (Sartorius). The filter was first prepared by washing with 10 mM histidine, 130 mM NaCl, pH 6.0 and the permeate was sampled for pH and conductivity. Following concentration, the concentrated protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration and enzyme activity. A 6× buffer exchange was performed on the concentrated protein into the final buffer: 10 mM histidine, 130 mM NaCl, pH 6.0. Following buffer exchange, the concentrated protein was passed though a 0.22 μm filter into a 20 L sterile storage bag. The protein was sampled and tested for protein concentration, enzyme activity, free sulfhydryl groups, oligosaccharide profiling and osmolarity.
The sterile filtered bulk protein was then aseptically dispensed at 20 mL into 30 mL sterile Teflon vials (Nalgene). The vials were then flash frozen and stored at −20±5° C.
C. Comparison of Production and Purification of Gen1 Soluble rHuPH20 and Gen2 Soluble rHuPH20
The production and purification of Gen2 soluble rHuPH20 in a 300 L bioreactor cell culture contained some changes in the protocols compared to the production and purification Gen1 soluble rHuPH20 in a 100 L bioreactor cell culture (described in Example 4.B). Table 19 sets forth exemplary differences, in addition to simple scale up changes, between the methods.
TABLE 19
Process Difference Gen1 soluble rHuPH20 Gen2 soluble rHuPH20
Cell line 3D35M 2B2
Media used to expand cell Contains 0.10 μM Contains 20 μM
inoculum methotrexate (0.045 mg/L) methotrexate (9 mg/L)
Media in 6 L cultures Contains 0.10 μM Contains no methotrexate
onwards methotrexate
36 L spinner flask No instrumentation Equipped with
20 L operating volume. instrumentation that
monitors and controls pH,
dissolved oxygen, sparge
and overlay gas flow rate.
32 L operating volume
Final operating volume in Approx. 100 L in a 125 L Approx. 300 L in a 400 L
bioreactor bioreactor bioreactor (initial culture
(initial culture volume + volume + 260 L)
65 L)
Culture media in final No rHuInsulin 5.0 mg/L rHuInsulin
bioreactor
Media feed volume Scaled at 4% of the Scaled at 4% of the
bioreactor cell culture bioreactor cell culture
volume i.e. 3.4, 3.5 and 3.7 L, volume i.e. 10.4, 10.8,
resulting in a target 11.2 and 11.7 L, resulting
bioreactor volume of ~92 L. in a target bioreactor
volume of ~303 L.
Media feed Feed #1 Medium: CD Feed #1 Medium: 4 × CD
CHO + 50 g/L Glucose + CHO + 33 g/L Glucose +
8 mM GlutaMAX ™-1 32 mM Glutamax + 16.6 g/L
Feed #2 (CD CHO + 50 g/L Yeastolate + 33 mg/L
Glucose + 8 mM rHuInsulin
GlutaMAX + 1.1 g/L Feed #2: 2 × CD CHO + 33 g/L
Sodium Butyrate Glucose + 16 mM
Feed #3: CD CHO + 50 g/L Glutamax + 33.4 g/L
Glucose + 8 mM Yeastolate + 0.92 g/L
GlutaMAX + 1.1 g/L Sodium Butyrate
Sodium Butyrate Feed #3: 1 × CD CHO + 50 g/L
Glucose + 10 mM
Glutamax + 50 g/L
Yeastolate + 1.80 g/L
Sodium Butyrate
Feed #4: 1 × CD CHO + 33 g/L
Glucose + 6.6 mM
Glutamax + 50 g/L
Yeastolate + 0.92 g/L
Sodium Butyrate
Filtration of bioreactor cell Four polyethersulfone 1st stage - Four modules in
culture filters (8.0 μm, 0.65 μm, parallel, each with a layer
0.22 μm and 0.22 μm) in of diatomaceous earth
series graded to 4-8 μm and a
100 L storage bag layer of diatomaceous
earth graded to 1.4-1.1 μm,
followed by a cellulose
membrane.
2nd stage - single module
containing a layer of
diatomaceous earth graded
to 0.4-0.11 μm and a layer
of diatomaceous earth
graded to <0.1 μm,
followed by a cellulose
membrane.
3rd stage - 0.22 μm
polyethersulfone filter
300 L storage bag
Harvested cell culture is
supplemented with 10 mM
EDTA, 10 mM Tris to a
pH of 7.5.
Concentration and buffer Concentrate with 2 TFF Concentrate using four
exchange prior to with Millipore Spiral Sartorius Sartoslice TFF
chromatography Polyethersulfone 30K 30K MWCO Filter
MWCO Filter
Buffer Exchange the Buffer Exchange the
Concentrate 6 × with 10 mM Concentrate 10 × with 10 mM
Hepes, 25 mM NaCl, Tris, 20 mM Na2SO4,
pH 7.0 pH 7.5
20 L sterile storage bag 50 L sterile storage bag
Viral inactivation prior to None Viral inactivation
chromatography performed with the
addition of a 1% Triton X-
100, 0.3% Tributyl
Phosphate, pH 7.5,
1st purification step (Q No absorbance reading A280 measurements at the
sepharose) beginning and end
Viral filtration after Pall DV-20 filter (20 nm) Sartorius Virosart filter (20 nm)
chromatography
Concentration and buffer Hepes/saline pH 7.0 buffer Histidine/saline, pH 6.0
exchange after Protein concentrated to 1 mg/ml buffer
chromatography Protein concentrated to 10 mg/ml
Since modifications will be apparent to those of skill in this art, it is intended that this invention be limited only by the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (79)

The invention claimed is:
1. A method for treating an IG-treatable disease or condition in a subject, comprising subcutaneously administering to the subject no more than once monthly a soluble hyaluronidase and an immune globulin (IG) composition for treating the disease or condition, wherein:
the IG is from human plasma;
the IG and hyaluronidase are administered separately;
the hyaluronidase is administered prior to administration of the IG;
the IG composition has a protein concentration that is 5 to 25% w/v IG;
the IG is administered at a dosage of 100 mg per kg body weight (100 mg/kg BW) to 2 g/kg BW; and
the hyaluronidase is administered at a ratio of Units hyaluronidase per gram of IG that is in the range of about 10 to 500 Units hyaluronidase per gram of the IG, whereby the dose of IG administered is a full monthly dose.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is an ovine PH20, bovine PH20 or a soluble human PH20, wherein the soluble human PH20 is a C-terminally truncated PH20 that lacks all or a portion of the glycosylphosphatidylinositol (GPI) anchor attachment sequence.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is selected from among a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein:
the IG is administered in a volume of 50 mL to 700 mL; and
the hyaluronidase is administered in a volume of less than 50 mL.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition is administered as a liquid solution in a volume of 50 mL to 700 mL.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the pH of the IG preparation composition is at or about 4.8 to 5.0.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the pH of the IG preparation composition is at or about 4.6 to 5.1.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the pH of the IG preparation composition is at or about 4.2 to 5.4.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein 20-30 grams (g) IG is administered.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein about or 5 grams (g), 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 21 g, 22 g, 23 g, 24 g, 25 g, 26 g, 27 g, 28 g, 29 g, 30 g, 31 g, 32 g, 33 g, 34 g, 35 g, 36 g, 37 g, 38 g, 39 g or 40 g of IG is administered.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein at least 5 grams (g) of IG is administered.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG is administered at a dosage of at least 200 mg/kg BW, 300 mg/kg BW, 400 mg/kg BW, 500 mg/kg BW or 600 mg/kg BW.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG is administered at 600 mg/kg body weight (BW) and the soluble hyaluronidase is administered at a ratio of 50 units hyaluronidase/gram of IG.
14. The method of claim 1, wherein the hyaluronidase is administered in a volume of less than 50 mL.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the hyaluronidase is administered in a volume of 5-30 mL.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein bioavailability of the subcutaneously administered IG is at least about 90% of the bioavailability of the same dosage administered via IV administration.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is a PH20,or a truncated form thereof.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the PH20 is selected from an ovine, bovine or truncated human PH20.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein the PH20 is a truncated human PH20 selected from among a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, or a variant thereof that has at least 95% sequence identity with any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9, is soluble and exhibits hyaluronidase activity.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the truncated human PH20 is selected from among a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9.
21. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is designated rHuPH20.
22. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG is purified from human plasma.
23. The method of claim 22 1, wherein the IG purified from human plasma is purified by alcohol fractionation.
24. The method of claim 23, wherein the IG is further purified by any one or more of a chemical modification, so incubation at pH 4.0 with or without pepsin, polyethylene glycol (PEG) precipitation, ion-exchange chromatography, enzymatic cleavage, solvent detergent treatment, diafiltration or ultrafiltration.
25. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition contains IgG, IgA and IgM.
26. The method of claim 25, wherein the IG composition contains greater than 95% IgG.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the IgG is monomeric.
28. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition further contains protein-stabilizing excipients.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the protein-stabilizing excipient is selected from among one or more of glycine, maltose, a polyol, human serum albumin, mannitol, and non-ionic detergent.
30. The method of claim 1, wherein the pH of the IG preparation composition is at or about 4.2 to 5.4, 4.6 to 5.1 or 4.8 to 5.0.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v, 6 to 15% w/v, or 8 to 12% w/v of IG composition.
32. The method of claim 30, wherein the IG has a protein concentration that is or is about 5 to 15% w/v of IG composition.
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the protein concentration is 10% w/v.
34. The method of claim 1, where the IG composition is administered as a liquid solution and the volume of liquid is or is about to 100 ml, 150 ml, 200 ml, 300 ml, 400 ml, 500 ml, 600 ml or 700 ml.
35. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition is infused at a rate of 10 ml/hr to 300 ml/hr.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the rate is selected is from among at or about 10 ml/hr, 20 ml/hr, 30 ml/hr, 40 ml/hr, 50 ml/hr, 60 ml/hr, 70 ml/hr, 80 ml/hr, 90 ml/hr, 100 ml/hr, 150 ml/hr, 200 ml/hr, 250 ml/hr and 300 ml/hr.
37. The method of claim 35, wherein the rate is controlled by a pump.
38. The method of claim 35, wherein the rate is controlled by gravity.
39. The method of claim 1, wherein the hyaluronidase is administered 0.5 minutes, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes or 30 minutes prior to administration of IG.
40. The method of claim 1, wherein the hyaluronidase is administered at a ratio (units hyaluronidase/grams of IG) at or about 10 U/gram (g), 20 U/g, 30 U/g, 35 U/g, 40 U/g, 50 U/g, 60 U/g, 70 U/g, 80 U/g, 90 U/g, 100 U/g, 150 U/g, or 300 U/g.
41. The method of claim 40, wherein the hyaluronidase is administered at a ratio of or about 50 U/gram IG.
42. The method of claim 1, wherein the hyaluronidase that is administered is at or about 10 Units to 500,000 Units, 100 Units to 100,000 Units, 500 Units to 50,000 Units, 1000 Units to 10,000 Units, 5000 Units to 7500 Units, 5000 Units to 50,000 Units, or 1,000 Units to 10,000 Units.
43. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is selected from among immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Woltmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome; Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Haemophagocytic syndrome; high-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion purpura; Toxic epidermal necrolysis/Steven Johnson syndrome (TEN/SJS); Toxic shock syndrome; Alzheimer's Disease; Systemic lupus erythematosus; multiple myeloma; sepsis; B cell tumors; trauma; and a bacterial, viral or fungal infection.
44. The method of claim 43, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is an immunodeficiency and the immunodeficiency is selected from among common variable immunodeficiency (CVID), congenital agammaglobulinemia, Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome, severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID), primary hypogammaglobulinemia, primary immunodeficiency diseases with antibody deficiency, X-linked agammaglobulinemia (XLA), hypogammaglobulinemia of infancy, and paraneoplastic cerebellar degeneration with no antibodies.
45. The method of claim 43, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies and the hematological malignancy is selected from among chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM) and non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL).
46. The method of claim 43, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is an inflammatory myopathy and the inflammatory myopathy is selected from among polymyositis, dermatomyositis and inclusion body myositis.
47. The method of claim 43, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is a bacteria, viral or fungal condition and the bacterial viral or fungal condition is selected from among Haemophilus influenzae type B, Pseudomonas aeruginosa types A and B, Staphylococcus aureus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae types 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 19, and 23, Adenovirus types 2 and 5, Cytomegalovirus, Epstein Barr virus VCA, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Herpes simplex virus-1, Herpes simplex virus-2, Influenza A, Measles, Parainfluenza types 1, 2 and 3, Polio, Varicella zoster virus, Aspergillus and Candida albicans.
48. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 8 to about 12% w/v of IG.
49. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 15 to about 25% w/v of IG.
50. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 20 to about 25% w/v of IG.
51. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase comprises an amino acid sequence that is at least about 95% identical to SEQ ID NO:9.
52. The method of claim 1, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:9.
53. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG is administered at from about 300 mg/kg BW to about 600 mg/kg BW.
54. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is a primary immunodeficiency.
55. The method of claim 1, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy.
56. A method for treating an immune globulin (IG)-treatable disease or condition in a subject, comprising:
subcutaneously administering a hyaluronidase composition comprising a soluble hyaluronidase at one or more sites on the subject;
after administering the hyaluronidase composition, subcutaneously administering an IG composition comprising IG for treating the disease or condition at the one or more sites on the subject, wherein:
the IG is from human plasma,
the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 5 to about 25% w/v IG,
the subject is administered an IG dosage of from about 100 mg per kg body weight (mg/kg BW) to about 2 g/kg BW, and
the subject is administered a soluble hyaluronidase dosage at a ratio of from about 10 to about 500 Units hyaluronidase per gram of the administered IG;
wherein the hyaluronidase composition and the IG composition are subcutaneously administered to the subject no more frequently than once every three weeks.
57. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is selected from among immunodeficiency; acquired hypogammaglobulinemia secondary to hematological malignancies; Kawasaki's disease; chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy (CIDP); Guillain-Barre Syndrome; Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura; inflammatory myopathies; Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome; multifocal motor neuropathy; Myasthenia Gravis; Moersch-Woltmann syndrome; secondary hypogammaglobulinaemia specific antibody deficiency; Acute disseminated encephalomyelitis; ANCA-positive systemic necrotizing vasculitis; Autoimmune haemolytic anaemia; Bullous pemphigoid; Cicatricial pemphigoid; Evans syndrome; Foeto-maternal/neonatal alloimmune thrombocytopenia (FMAIT/NAIT); Haemophagocytic syndrome; high-risk allogeneic haemopoietic stem cell transplantation; IgM paraproteinaemic neuropathy; kidney transplantation; multiple sclerosis; Opsoclonus myoclonus ataxia; Pemphigus foliaceus; Pemphigus vulgaris; Post-transfusion purpura; Toxic epidermal necrolysis/Steven Johnson syndrome (TEN/SJS); Toxic shock syndrome; Alzheimer's Disease; Systemic lupus erythematosus; multiple myeloma; sepsis; B cell tumors; trauma; and a bacterial, viral or fungal infection.
58. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is a primary immunodeficiency.
59. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG-treatable disease or condition is chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy.
60. The method of claim 56, wherein the hyaluronidase composition administered to the subject has a volume of less than about 50 mL.
61. The method of claim 56, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is a soluble human PH2O that is C-terminally truncated and lacks all or a portion of the glycosylphosphatidylinositol (GPI) anchor attachment sequence.
62. The method of claim 56, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase has an amino acid sequence that is at least about 95% identical to SEQ ID NO:9.
63. The method of claim 56, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase has an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:9.
64. The method of claim 56, wherein the subject is administered a soluble hyaluronidase dosage at a ratio of from about 50 to about 100 Units hyaluronidase per gram of the administered IG.
65. The method of claim 56, wherein the pH of the IG composition is about 4.6 to about 5.1.
66. The method of claim 56, wherein the protein content of the IG composition comprises at least about 95% IgG.
67. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition further comprises an amino acid.
68. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 5% to about 15%.
69. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 15 to about 25% w/v of IG.
70. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of about 10% w/v of IG.
71. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition has a protein concentration of from about 20 to about 25% w/v of IG.
72. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition is administered to the subject at an infusion rate of from about 10 mL/hr to about 300 mL/hr.
73. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition is administered to the subject at an infusion rate of from about 120 mL/hr to about 300 mL/hr.
74. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition is administered to the subject at an infusion rate of at least about 200 mL/hr.
75. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition is started within about 20 minutes of completion of administration of the hyaluronidase composition.
76. The method of claim 56, wherein the IG composition is started within about 10 minutes of completion of administration of the hyaluronidase composition.
77. The method of claim 56, wherein the subject is administered an IG dosage of from about 300 mg/kg BW to about 600 mg/kg BW.
78. The method of claim 56, wherein the bioavailability of the subcutaneously administered IG is at least about 80% of the bioavailability of the same dosage of IG administered via intravenous (IV) administration.
79. The method of claim 56, wherein the soluble hyaluronidase is selected from among a polypeptide having a sequence of amino acids set forth in any of SEQ ID NOS:4-9.
US17/332,776 2008-03-17 2021-05-27 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase Active USRE49967E1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/332,776 USRE49967E1 (en) 2008-03-17 2021-05-27 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US6984108P 2008-03-17 2008-03-17
US12/381,844 US10301376B2 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-03-16 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
US17/332,776 USRE49967E1 (en) 2008-03-17 2021-05-27 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/381,844 Reissue US10301376B2 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-03-16 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
USRE49967E1 true USRE49967E1 (en) 2024-05-14

Family

ID=40940524

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/381,844 Ceased US10301376B2 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-03-16 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
US17/332,776 Active USRE49967E1 (en) 2008-03-17 2021-05-27 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/381,844 Ceased US10301376B2 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-03-16 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase

Country Status (21)

Country Link
US (2) US10301376B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2271363B1 (en)
JP (2) JP2011515395A (en)
KR (1) KR101275949B1 (en)
CN (2) CN105816876A (en)
AR (2) AR074968A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2009226141B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0909499A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2714708C (en)
CO (1) CO6331301A2 (en)
DK (1) DK2271363T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2633295T3 (en)
HR (1) HRP20171068T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE033055T2 (en)
MX (1) MX339658B (en)
PL (1) PL2271363T3 (en)
PT (1) PT2271363T (en)
SG (1) SG10201503296QA (en)
SI (1) SI2271363T1 (en)
TW (2) TWI532498B (en)
WO (1) WO2009117085A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (49)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160279239A1 (en) 2011-05-02 2016-09-29 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous administration of anti-cd74 antibody for systemic lupus erythematosus and autoimmune disease
CA2508948A1 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-15 Halozyme, Inc. Human chondroitinase glycoprotein (chasegp), process for preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
MXPA05009429A (en) 2003-03-05 2005-12-12 Halozyme Inc SOLUBLE HYALURONIDASE GLYCOPROTEIN (sHASEGP), PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME, USES AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THEREOF.
US20090123367A1 (en) * 2003-03-05 2009-05-14 Delfmems Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases and Methods of Preparing and Using Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases
US20060104968A1 (en) * 2003-03-05 2006-05-18 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminogly ycanases
US7871607B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2011-01-18 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20160355591A1 (en) 2011-05-02 2016-12-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous anti-hla-dr monoclonal antibody for treatment of hematologic malignancies
EP2268805B1 (en) * 2008-03-06 2015-05-06 Halozyme, Inc. Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
TWI532498B (en) 2008-03-17 2016-05-11 巴克斯特保健公司 Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
US20100003238A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2010-01-07 Frost Gregory I Modified hyaluronidases and uses in treating hyaluronan-associated diseases and conditions
TWI394580B (en) 2008-04-28 2013-05-01 Halozyme Inc Super fast-acting insulin compositions
EP3037529B1 (en) 2008-12-09 2019-03-27 Halozyme, Inc. Extended soluble ph20 polypeptides and uses thereof
US9345661B2 (en) * 2009-07-31 2016-05-24 Genentech, Inc. Subcutaneous anti-HER2 antibody formulations and uses thereof
MX2012003282A (en) * 2009-09-17 2012-04-30 Baxter Healthcare Sa Stable co-formulation of hyaluronidase and immunoglobulin, and methods of use thereof.
KR20130125753A (en) 2010-07-20 2013-11-19 할로자임, 아이엔씨 Treatment of the adverse side-effects associated with administration of an anti-hyaluronan agent
TWI577377B (en) 2010-09-16 2017-04-11 Ｖｉｉｖ醫療保健公司 Pharmaceutical compositions
US20180021376A1 (en) * 2011-03-04 2018-01-25 Rare Antibody Antigen Supply, Inc. Naming of KH1 through KH55 good healthy cells synthesizes the KH1 through KH55 proteins
CA2831572C (en) 2011-05-02 2019-11-26 Immunomedics, Inc. Ultrafiltration concentration of allotype selected antibodies for small-volume administration
US20130011378A1 (en) 2011-06-17 2013-01-10 Tzung-Horng Yang Stable formulations of a hyaluronan-degrading enzyme
EP2771028A2 (en) 2011-10-24 2014-09-03 Halozyme, Inc. Companion diagnostic for anti-hyaluronan agent therapy and methods of use thereof
JP6067746B2 (en) 2011-12-30 2017-01-25 ハロザイム インコーポレイテッド PH20 polypeptide variant, formulation and use thereof
WO2013172967A1 (en) 2012-05-17 2013-11-21 Extend Biosciences, Inc Carriers for improved drug delivery
KR101454646B1 (en) * 2012-11-05 2014-10-27 (주)한국비엠아이 Stabilizer for hyaluronidase and liquid formulation comprising hyaluronidase
PT2994160T (en) 2013-05-06 2019-08-07 Baxalta Inc Treatment of alzheimer's disease subpopulations with pooled immunoglobulin g
EP2996772B1 (en) 2013-05-13 2018-12-19 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for the treatment of neurodegeneration
TW201534726A (en) 2013-07-03 2015-09-16 Halozyme Inc Thermally stable PH20 hyaluronidase variants and uses thereof
CA2923010C (en) 2013-09-03 2022-08-30 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Thermally stable vaccine formulations and microneedles
EP3058084A4 (en) 2013-10-16 2017-07-05 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sialylated glycoproteins
US9603927B2 (en) 2014-02-28 2017-03-28 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Combination therapies with anti-CD38 antibodies
US9732154B2 (en) 2014-02-28 2017-08-15 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Anti-CD38 antibodies for treatment of acute lymphoblastic leukemia
MX2016015574A (en) 2014-05-28 2018-05-28 Rare Antibody Antigen Supply Inc Purified compositions of ivig and kh proteins for modulating lymphocytes and treating hepatitis b virus.
WO2016011262A1 (en) * 2014-07-16 2016-01-21 New York University Use of hyaluronidase for treatment of muscle stiffness
US10919981B2 (en) 2014-08-22 2021-02-16 Nectagen, Inc. Affinity proteins and uses thereof
US9789197B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2017-10-17 Extend Biosciences, Inc. RNAi vitamin D conjugates
CA2964463C (en) 2014-10-22 2024-02-13 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Therapeutic vitamin d conjugates
US9616109B2 (en) 2014-10-22 2017-04-11 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Insulin vitamin D conjugates
CN105646710B (en) * 2014-11-17 2020-08-25 四川科伦博泰生物医药股份有限公司 Fully humanized anti-VEGFR-2 monoclonal antibody and preparation method thereof
KR102602754B1 (en) 2015-05-20 2023-11-14 얀센 바이오테크 인코포레이티드 Anti-CD38 antibodies for treating light chain amyloidosis and other CD38-positive hematological malignancies
CN108472369A (en) 2015-11-03 2018-08-31 詹森生物科技公司 The subcutaneous preparations and application thereof of 8 antibody of AntiCD3 McAb
IL249795B (en) 2016-02-05 2020-01-30 Grifols Worldwide Operations Ltd Intradermal administration of immunoglobulin g preparation
WO2018187074A1 (en) 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous administration of antibody-drug conjugates for cancer therapy
WO2018193078A1 (en) * 2017-04-21 2018-10-25 Csl Behring Ag Immunoglobulin products for use in the treatment of chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy
CN110831627A (en) * 2017-04-21 2020-02-21 瑞士杰特贝林生物制品有限公司 Immunoglobulin product for the treatment of chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy
MA50514A (en) 2017-10-31 2020-09-09 Janssen Biotech Inc HIGH-RISK MULTIPLE MYELOMA TREATMENT METHODS
WO2019224304A1 (en) * 2018-05-23 2019-11-28 Csl Behring Ag Treatment of cidp
EP3863673A4 (en) * 2018-10-11 2023-01-11 Momenta Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment with highly silylated igg compositions
SG11202110512WA (en) * 2019-03-25 2021-10-28 Alteogen Inc Pharmaceutical composition, comprising human hyaluronidase ph20 variant and drug, for subcutaneous injection
CN112451481B (en) * 2020-12-27 2023-01-13 西北农林科技大学 Application of gamma globulin in preparing medicine for preventing and treating intravascular hemolysis induced by puerarin injection
WO2023170680A1 (en) 2022-03-08 2023-09-14 Equashield Medical Ltd Fluid transfer station in a robotic pharmaceutical preparation system

Citations (74)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3710795A (en) 1970-09-29 1973-01-16 Alza Corp Drug-delivery device with stretched, rate-controlling membrane
US3869436A (en) 1971-06-01 1975-03-04 Statens Bakteriologiska Lab Method for fractionating plasma proteins using peg and ion-exchangers
US3966906A (en) 1961-10-11 1976-06-29 Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft Disaggregated gamma globulin and process for preparing it
US4093606A (en) 1975-02-18 1978-06-06 Coval M L Method of producing intravenously injectable gamma globulin and a gamma globulin suitable for carrying out the method
US4124576A (en) 1976-12-03 1978-11-07 Coval M L Method of producing intravenously injectable gamma globulin
US4126605A (en) 1975-12-29 1978-11-21 Plasmesco Ag Process of improving the compatibility of gamma globulins
JPS5420124A (en) 1977-07-14 1979-02-15 Green Cross Corp:The Preparation of gamma-globulin intravenous injection
US4165370A (en) 1976-05-21 1979-08-21 Coval M L Injectable gamma globulin
US4186192A (en) 1978-12-18 1980-01-29 Cutter Laboratories, Inc. Stabilized immune serum globulin
JPS5731623A (en) 1980-07-30 1982-02-20 Morishita Seiyaku Kk Production of gamma-globulin for intravenous injection
JPS57128635A (en) 1981-01-30 1982-08-10 Morishita Seiyaku Kk Pharmaceutical preparation of gamma-globulin for venoclysis
US4362661A (en) 1979-08-09 1982-12-07 Teijin Limited Immunoglobulin composition having a high monomer content, and process for production thereof
US4374763A (en) 1979-09-17 1983-02-22 Morishita Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Method for producing gamma-globulin for use in intravenous administration and method for producing a pharmaceutical preparation thereof
US4396608A (en) 1981-08-24 1983-08-02 Cutter Laboratories Intravenously injectable immune serum globulin
US4439421A (en) 1982-08-30 1984-03-27 Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Stabilized gamma globulin concentrate
US4499073A (en) 1981-08-24 1985-02-12 Cutter Laboratories, Inc. Intravenously injectable immune serum globulin
US4597966A (en) 1985-01-09 1986-07-01 Ortho Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Histidine stabilized immunoglobulin and method of preparation
EP0246579A2 (en) 1986-05-19 1987-11-25 Green Cross Corporation Method of producing immunoglobulin preparations for intravenous injection
EP0278422A2 (en) 1987-02-06 1988-08-17 Green Cross Corporation y-Globulin injectable solutions
US4952496A (en) 1984-03-30 1990-08-28 Associated Universities, Inc. Cloning and expression of the gene for bacteriophage T7 RNA polymerase
US5033252A (en) 1987-12-23 1991-07-23 Entravision, Inc. Method of packaging and sterilizing a pharmaceutical product
EP0440483A2 (en) 1990-02-01 1991-08-07 Baxter International Inc. Process for purifying immune serum globulins
US5052558A (en) 1987-12-23 1991-10-01 Entravision, Inc. Packaged pharmaceutical product
US5122373A (en) 1983-03-16 1992-06-16 Immuno Aktiengesellschaft Immunoglobulin-g-containing fraction
WO1992010569A1 (en) 1990-12-14 1992-06-25 University Of Connecticut Sperm cell surface protein ph-20. use in a contraceptive vaccine
US5180810A (en) 1988-11-21 1993-01-19 Sumitomo Chemical Co., Limited Protein h capable of binding to igg
US5323907A (en) 1992-06-23 1994-06-28 Multi-Comp, Inc. Child resistant package assembly for dispensing pharmaceutical medications
CH684164A5 (en) 1992-01-10 1994-07-29 Rotkreuzstiftung Zentrallab Immunoglobulin solution which can be administered intravenously
WO1994029334A1 (en) 1993-06-14 1994-12-22 Association Pour L'essor De La Transfusion Sanguine Dans La Region Du Nord Immunoglobulin g concentrate for therapeutical use and method for producing same
EP0661060A2 (en) 1993-12-28 1995-07-05 IMMUNO Aktiengesellschaft Highly concentrated immunoglobulin composition and method to prepare it
WO1996031596A1 (en) 1995-04-07 1996-10-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Bh55 hyaluronidase
US5665069A (en) 1996-07-19 1997-09-09 Cumer; Patricia Lynn Pressure-directed peribulbar anesthesia delivery device
WO1998016655A1 (en) 1996-10-17 1998-04-23 The Regents Of The University Of California Human plasma hyaluronidase
WO1998042376A1 (en) 1997-03-20 1998-10-01 Common Services Agency Composition comprising immunoglobulin
JPH10265407A (en) 1997-03-19 1998-10-06 Green Cross Corp:The Immunoglobulin preparation
US5854046A (en) 1996-07-03 1998-12-29 Incyte Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human hyaluronidase
US5871736A (en) 1994-09-08 1999-02-16 Red Cross Foundation Central Laboratory Blood Transfusion Service Src Liquid immunoglobulin formulations
WO1999029841A1 (en) 1997-12-09 1999-06-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Purification and microsequencing of hyaluronidase isozymes
US5945098A (en) 1990-02-01 1999-08-31 Baxter International Inc. Stable intravenously-administrable immune globulin preparation
US6103525A (en) 1996-10-17 2000-08-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Hybridoma cell lines producing monoclonal antibodies that bind to human plasma hyaluronidase
US6552170B1 (en) 1990-04-06 2003-04-22 Amgen Inc. PEGylation reagents and compounds formed therewith
US20030212021A1 (en) 2001-01-25 2003-11-13 Frost Gregory I. Myeloid colony stimulating factor and uses thereof
WO2003099862A1 (en) 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 Applied Nanosystems B.V. Export and modification of (poly)peptides in the lantibiotic way
US6682904B1 (en) 2002-08-15 2004-01-27 Deliatroph Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Specific inhibitors of hyaluronidase 2, and methods of identifying and using same
WO2004056312A2 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-08 Genentech, Inc. Immunoglobulin variants and uses thereof
WO2004058147A2 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-15 Halozyme, Inc. Human chondroitinase glycoprotein (chasegp), process for preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
WO2004078140A2 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-09-16 Halozyme, Inc. SOLUBLE HYALURONIDASE GLYCOPROTEIN (sHASEGP), PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME, USES AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THEREOF
US6828431B1 (en) 1999-04-09 2004-12-07 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of breast cancer
US20050053598A1 (en) 2003-02-10 2005-03-10 Burke David J. Immunoglobulin formulation and method of preparation thereof
US6875848B2 (en) 2001-01-17 2005-04-05 Probitas Pharma, S.A. Process for the production of virus-inactivated human gammaglobulin G
WO2005049078A2 (en) 2003-11-18 2005-06-02 Zlb Behring Ag Immunoglobulin preparations having increased stability
US20050260186A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2005-11-24 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20050287134A1 (en) 2004-06-25 2005-12-29 Klein Jeffrey A Drug delivery system for accelerated subcutaneous absorption
US20060104968A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2006-05-18 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminogly ycanases
WO2007028196A1 (en) 2005-09-07 2007-03-15 Alchemia Oncology Pty Limited Therapeutic compositions comprising hyaluronan and therapeutic antibodies as well as methods of treatment
US7309810B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-12-18 Japan Science And Technology Agency Nonhuman model animal suffering from Guillain-Barré syndrome and/or fisher syndrome
US7368108B2 (en) 2001-11-28 2008-05-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopeptide remodeling using amidases
US20080171014A1 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-07-17 Chengbin Wu Interleukin-13 binding proteins
US20090123367A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-05-14 Delfmems Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases and Methods of Preparing and Using Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases
US20090215722A1 (en) 2000-09-26 2009-08-27 Halozyme, Inc. Inhibition of Antigen Presentation with Poorly Catabolized Polymers
WO2009111083A2 (en) 2008-03-06 2009-09-11 Halozyme, Inc. In vivo temporal control of activ at able matrix- degrading enzymes
WO2009111066A1 (en) 2008-03-06 2009-09-11 Halozyme, Inc. Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
WO2009117085A1 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-09-24 Baxter Healthcare, S.A. Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
WO2009128917A2 (en) 2008-04-14 2009-10-22 Halozyme, Inc. Modified hyaluronidases and uses in treating hyaluronan-associated diseases and conditions
WO2009128918A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2009-10-22 Halozyme, Inc. Combination therapy using a soluble hyaluronidase and a bisphosphonate
WO2009134380A2 (en) 2008-04-28 2009-11-05 Halozyme, Inc. Super fast-acting insulin compositions
US20100143457A1 (en) 2008-12-09 2010-06-10 Ge Wei Extended soluble PH20 polypeptides and uses thereof
US20100172892A1 (en) 2007-06-19 2010-07-08 Uvarkina Tamara P Hyaluronidase and method of use thereof
WO2010138736A2 (en) 2009-05-27 2010-12-02 Baxter International Inc. A method to produce a highly concentrated immunoglobulin preparation for subcutaneous use
US20110066111A1 (en) 2009-09-17 2011-03-17 Wolfgang Teschner Stable co-formulation of hyaluronidase and immunoglobulin, and methods of use thereof
US20110293638A1 (en) 2010-05-26 2011-12-01 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Method to produce an immunoglobulin preparation with improved yield
US20110293598A1 (en) 2010-05-26 2011-12-01 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Method to produce an immunoglobulin preparation with improved yield
US20120020951A1 (en) 2010-07-20 2012-01-26 Harold Michael Shepard Adverse side-effects associated with administration of anti-hyaluronan agents and methods for ameliorating or preventing the side-effects
US20120076772A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-03-29 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Stabilization of immunoglobulins through aqueous formulation with histidine at weak acidic to neutral ph

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US152359A (en) * 1874-06-23 Improvement in grain-binders
US20951A (en) * 1858-07-20 Improvement in casting iron kettles
US212074A (en) * 1879-02-04 Improvement in carriage-window fasteners
JP4346934B2 (en) 2003-03-25 2009-10-21 日本碍子株式会社 Manufacturing method of ceramic structure
CN101528953B (en) * 2006-10-24 2011-10-19 太平洋水泥株式会社 Method for removing lead from cement kiln

Patent Citations (128)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3966906A (en) 1961-10-11 1976-06-29 Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft Disaggregated gamma globulin and process for preparing it
US3710795A (en) 1970-09-29 1973-01-16 Alza Corp Drug-delivery device with stretched, rate-controlling membrane
US3869436A (en) 1971-06-01 1975-03-04 Statens Bakteriologiska Lab Method for fractionating plasma proteins using peg and ion-exchangers
US4093606A (en) 1975-02-18 1978-06-06 Coval M L Method of producing intravenously injectable gamma globulin and a gamma globulin suitable for carrying out the method
US4126605A (en) 1975-12-29 1978-11-21 Plasmesco Ag Process of improving the compatibility of gamma globulins
US4165370A (en) 1976-05-21 1979-08-21 Coval M L Injectable gamma globulin
US4124576A (en) 1976-12-03 1978-11-07 Coval M L Method of producing intravenously injectable gamma globulin
JPS5420124A (en) 1977-07-14 1979-02-15 Green Cross Corp:The Preparation of gamma-globulin intravenous injection
US4186192A (en) 1978-12-18 1980-01-29 Cutter Laboratories, Inc. Stabilized immune serum globulin
US4362661A (en) 1979-08-09 1982-12-07 Teijin Limited Immunoglobulin composition having a high monomer content, and process for production thereof
US4374763A (en) 1979-09-17 1983-02-22 Morishita Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Method for producing gamma-globulin for use in intravenous administration and method for producing a pharmaceutical preparation thereof
JPS5731623A (en) 1980-07-30 1982-02-20 Morishita Seiyaku Kk Production of gamma-globulin for intravenous injection
JPS57128635A (en) 1981-01-30 1982-08-10 Morishita Seiyaku Kk Pharmaceutical preparation of gamma-globulin for venoclysis
US4396608A (en) 1981-08-24 1983-08-02 Cutter Laboratories Intravenously injectable immune serum globulin
US4499073A (en) 1981-08-24 1985-02-12 Cutter Laboratories, Inc. Intravenously injectable immune serum globulin
US4439421A (en) 1982-08-30 1984-03-27 Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Stabilized gamma globulin concentrate
US5122373A (en) 1983-03-16 1992-06-16 Immuno Aktiengesellschaft Immunoglobulin-g-containing fraction
US4952496A (en) 1984-03-30 1990-08-28 Associated Universities, Inc. Cloning and expression of the gene for bacteriophage T7 RNA polymerase
US4597966A (en) 1985-01-09 1986-07-01 Ortho Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Histidine stabilized immunoglobulin and method of preparation
EP0246579A2 (en) 1986-05-19 1987-11-25 Green Cross Corporation Method of producing immunoglobulin preparations for intravenous injection
EP0278422A2 (en) 1987-02-06 1988-08-17 Green Cross Corporation y-Globulin injectable solutions
US5052558A (en) 1987-12-23 1991-10-01 Entravision, Inc. Packaged pharmaceutical product
US5033252A (en) 1987-12-23 1991-07-23 Entravision, Inc. Method of packaging and sterilizing a pharmaceutical product
US5180810A (en) 1988-11-21 1993-01-19 Sumitomo Chemical Co., Limited Protein h capable of binding to igg
US5177194A (en) 1990-02-01 1993-01-05 Baxter International, Inc. Process for purifying immune serum globulins
US5945098A (en) 1990-02-01 1999-08-31 Baxter International Inc. Stable intravenously-administrable immune globulin preparation
EP0440483A2 (en) 1990-02-01 1991-08-07 Baxter International Inc. Process for purifying immune serum globulins
US6552170B1 (en) 1990-04-06 2003-04-22 Amgen Inc. PEGylation reagents and compounds formed therewith
WO1992010569A1 (en) 1990-12-14 1992-06-25 University Of Connecticut Sperm cell surface protein ph-20. use in a contraceptive vaccine
JPH06503721A (en) 1990-12-14 1994-04-28 ユニバーシテイ・オブ・コネチカツト contraceptive vaccine
US5721348A (en) 1990-12-14 1998-02-24 University Of Connecticut DNA encoding PH-20 proteins
CH684164A5 (en) 1992-01-10 1994-07-29 Rotkreuzstiftung Zentrallab Immunoglobulin solution which can be administered intravenously
US5323907A (en) 1992-06-23 1994-06-28 Multi-Comp, Inc. Child resistant package assembly for dispensing pharmaceutical medications
WO1994029334A1 (en) 1993-06-14 1994-12-22 Association Pour L'essor De La Transfusion Sanguine Dans La Region Du Nord Immunoglobulin g concentrate for therapeutical use and method for producing same
US6069236A (en) 1993-06-14 2000-05-30 Association Pour L'essor De La Transfusion Sanguine Dans La Region Du Nord Immunoglobulin G concentrate for therapeutic use and process for producing said concentrate
US5608038A (en) 1993-12-28 1997-03-04 Immuno Aktiengesellschaft Highly concentrated immunoglobulin preparation and method for its production
EP0661060A2 (en) 1993-12-28 1995-07-05 IMMUNO Aktiengesellschaft Highly concentrated immunoglobulin composition and method to prepare it
US5871736A (en) 1994-09-08 1999-02-16 Red Cross Foundation Central Laboratory Blood Transfusion Service Src Liquid immunoglobulin formulations
US5747027A (en) 1995-04-07 1998-05-05 The Regents Of The University Of California BH55 hyaluronidase
US5827721A (en) 1995-04-07 1998-10-27 The Regents Of The University Of California BH55 hyaluronidase
WO1996031596A1 (en) 1995-04-07 1996-10-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Bh55 hyaluronidase
US5958750A (en) 1996-07-03 1999-09-28 Inctye Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human hyaluronidase
US5854046A (en) 1996-07-03 1998-12-29 Incyte Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human hyaluronidase
US6057110A (en) 1996-07-03 2000-05-02 Incyte Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human hyaluronidase
US5665069A (en) 1996-07-19 1997-09-09 Cumer; Patricia Lynn Pressure-directed peribulbar anesthesia delivery device
US6123938A (en) 1996-10-17 2000-09-26 The Regents Of The University Of California Human urinary hyaluronidase
US20070134228A1 (en) 1996-10-17 2007-06-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Human plasma hyaluronidase
WO1998016655A1 (en) 1996-10-17 1998-04-23 The Regents Of The University Of California Human plasma hyaluronidase
US6103525A (en) 1996-10-17 2000-08-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Hybridoma cell lines producing monoclonal antibodies that bind to human plasma hyaluronidase
US7781397B2 (en) 1996-10-17 2010-08-24 The Regents Of The University Of California Human plasma hyaluronidase
US6193963B1 (en) 1996-10-17 2001-02-27 The Regents Of The University Of California Method of treating tumor-bearing patients with human plasma hyaluronidase
US20040096921A1 (en) 1996-10-17 2004-05-20 Robert Stern Human plasma hyaluronidase
US20030170243A1 (en) 1996-10-17 2003-09-11 Robert Stern Use of human plasma hyaluronidase in cancer treatment
US7148201B2 (en) 1996-10-17 2006-12-12 The Regents Of The University Of California Use of human plasma hyaluronidase in cancer treatment
US7105330B2 (en) 1996-10-17 2006-09-12 The Regents Of The University Of California Human plasma hyaluronidase
JPH10265407A (en) 1997-03-19 1998-10-06 Green Cross Corp:The Immunoglobulin preparation
WO1998042376A1 (en) 1997-03-20 1998-10-01 Common Services Agency Composition comprising immunoglobulin
WO1999029841A1 (en) 1997-12-09 1999-06-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Purification and microsequencing of hyaluronidase isozymes
US6828431B1 (en) 1999-04-09 2004-12-07 Corixa Corporation Compositions and methods for the therapy and diagnosis of breast cancer
US7718428B2 (en) 2000-01-25 2010-05-18 Halozyme, Inc. Myeloid colony stimulating factor and uses thereof
US20100184845A1 (en) 2000-01-25 2010-07-22 Halozyme, Inc. Myeloid Colony Stimulating Factor and Uses Thereof
US20060247201A1 (en) 2000-01-25 2006-11-02 Halozyme, Inc. Myeloid colony stimulating factor and uses thereof
US20110212074A1 (en) 2000-01-25 2011-09-01 Frost Gregory I Myeloid colony stimulating factor and uses thereof
US20090215722A1 (en) 2000-09-26 2009-08-27 Halozyme, Inc. Inhibition of Antigen Presentation with Poorly Catabolized Polymers
US6875848B2 (en) 2001-01-17 2005-04-05 Probitas Pharma, S.A. Process for the production of virus-inactivated human gammaglobulin G
US20030212021A1 (en) 2001-01-25 2003-11-13 Frost Gregory I. Myeloid colony stimulating factor and uses thereof
US7368108B2 (en) 2001-11-28 2008-05-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopeptide remodeling using amidases
WO2003099862A1 (en) 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 Applied Nanosystems B.V. Export and modification of (poly)peptides in the lantibiotic way
US6682904B1 (en) 2002-08-15 2004-01-27 Deliatroph Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Specific inhibitors of hyaluronidase 2, and methods of identifying and using same
US7309810B2 (en) 2002-10-29 2007-12-18 Japan Science And Technology Agency Nonhuman model animal suffering from Guillain-Barré syndrome and/or fisher syndrome
US7544499B2 (en) 2002-12-16 2009-06-09 Halozyme, Inc. Human chondroitinase glycoprotein (CHASEGP), process for preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
WO2004056312A2 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-08 Genentech, Inc. Immunoglobulin variants and uses thereof
WO2004058147A2 (en) 2002-12-16 2004-07-15 Halozyme, Inc. Human chondroitinase glycoprotein (chasegp), process for preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20070148156A1 (en) 2002-12-16 2007-06-28 Halozyme, Inc. Human chondroitinase glycoprotein (chasegp), process for preparing the same, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20050053598A1 (en) 2003-02-10 2005-03-10 Burke David J. Immunoglobulin formulation and method of preparation thereof
US20050260186A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2005-11-24 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US8450470B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2013-05-28 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20040268425A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-12-30 Deliatroph Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20090123367A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-05-14 Delfmems Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases and Methods of Preparing and Using Soluble Glycosaminoglycanases
US7767429B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2010-08-03 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20090181032A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-07-16 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20090181013A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-07-16 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20090214505A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-08-27 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US20060104968A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2006-05-18 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminogly ycanases
US20110152359A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2011-06-23 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising threreof
US7871607B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2011-01-18 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20110008309A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2011-01-13 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20090253175A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2009-10-08 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US8765685B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2014-07-01 Halozyme, Inc. Methods for treating edema by administering a Soluble Hyaluronidase Glycoprotein (sHASEGP)
US20120148555A1 (en) 2003-03-05 2012-06-14 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble hyaluronidase glycoprotein (sHASEGP), process for preparing the same, uses and pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof
US8105586B2 (en) 2003-03-05 2012-01-31 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
WO2004078140A2 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-09-16 Halozyme, Inc. SOLUBLE HYALURONIDASE GLYCOPROTEIN (sHASEGP), PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME, USES AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THEREOF
WO2005049078A2 (en) 2003-11-18 2005-06-02 Zlb Behring Ag Immunoglobulin preparations having increased stability
US8257699B2 (en) 2004-03-05 2012-09-04 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20120093770A1 (en) 2004-03-05 2012-04-19 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20050287134A1 (en) 2004-06-25 2005-12-29 Klein Jeffrey A Drug delivery system for accelerated subcutaneous absorption
US7846431B2 (en) 2005-02-23 2010-12-07 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
WO2006091871A1 (en) 2005-02-23 2006-08-31 Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20100196423A1 (en) 2005-02-23 2010-08-05 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US20100211015A1 (en) 2005-02-23 2010-08-19 Bookbinder Louis H Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
US7829081B2 (en) 2005-02-23 2010-11-09 Halozyme, Inc. Soluble glycosaminoglycanases and methods of preparing and using soluble glycosaminoglycanases
WO2007028196A1 (en) 2005-09-07 2007-03-15 Alchemia Oncology Pty Limited Therapeutic compositions comprising hyaluronan and therapeutic antibodies as well as methods of treatment
US20080171014A1 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-07-17 Chengbin Wu Interleukin-13 binding proteins
US20100172892A1 (en) 2007-06-19 2010-07-08 Uvarkina Tamara P Hyaluronidase and method of use thereof
WO2009111083A2 (en) 2008-03-06 2009-09-11 Halozyme, Inc. In vivo temporal control of activ at able matrix- degrading enzymes
US8187855B2 (en) 2008-03-06 2012-05-29 Halozyme, Inc. Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
US20120196348A1 (en) 2008-03-06 2012-08-02 David Baker Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
WO2009111066A1 (en) 2008-03-06 2009-09-11 Halozyme, Inc. Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
US20110053247A1 (en) 2008-03-06 2011-03-03 David Baker Large-scale production of soluble hyaluronidase
WO2009117085A1 (en) 2008-03-17 2009-09-24 Baxter Healthcare, S.A. Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
WO2009128918A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2009-10-22 Halozyme, Inc. Combination therapy using a soluble hyaluronidase and a bisphosphonate
US20120171153A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2012-07-05 Frost Gregory I Modified hyaluronidases and uses in treating hyaluronan-associated diseases and conditions
WO2009128917A2 (en) 2008-04-14 2009-10-22 Halozyme, Inc. Modified hyaluronidases and uses in treating hyaluronan-associated diseases and conditions
US20090311237A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2009-12-17 Frost Gregory I Combination therapy using a soluble hyaluronidase and a bisphosphonate
US20100003238A1 (en) 2008-04-14 2010-01-07 Frost Gregory I Modified hyaluronidases and uses in treating hyaluronan-associated diseases and conditions
WO2009134380A2 (en) 2008-04-28 2009-11-05 Halozyme, Inc. Super fast-acting insulin compositions
US20090304665A1 (en) 2008-04-28 2009-12-10 Frost Gregory I Super fast-acting insulin compositions
WO2010077297A1 (en) 2008-12-09 2010-07-08 Halozyme, Inc. Extended soluble ph20 polypeptides and uses thereof
US20100143457A1 (en) 2008-12-09 2010-06-10 Ge Wei Extended soluble PH20 polypeptides and uses thereof
US20100330071A1 (en) 2009-05-27 2010-12-30 Baxter International Inc. Method to produce a highly concentrated immunoglobulin preparation for subcutaneous use
WO2010138736A2 (en) 2009-05-27 2010-12-02 Baxter International Inc. A method to produce a highly concentrated immunoglobulin preparation for subcutaneous use
US20110066111A1 (en) 2009-09-17 2011-03-17 Wolfgang Teschner Stable co-formulation of hyaluronidase and immunoglobulin, and methods of use thereof
WO2011034604A2 (en) 2009-09-17 2011-03-24 Baxter Healthcare, S.A. Stable co-formulation of hyaluronidase and immunoglobulin, and methods of use thereof
US20110293598A1 (en) 2010-05-26 2011-12-01 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Method to produce an immunoglobulin preparation with improved yield
US20110293638A1 (en) 2010-05-26 2011-12-01 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Method to produce an immunoglobulin preparation with improved yield
US20120020951A1 (en) 2010-07-20 2012-01-26 Harold Michael Shepard Adverse side-effects associated with administration of anti-hyaluronan agents and methods for ameliorating or preventing the side-effects
US20120076779A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-03-29 Baxter Healthcare S.A. STABILIZATION OF IMMUNOGLOBULINS AND OTHER PROTEINS THROUGH AQUEOUS FORMULATIONS WITH SODIUM CHLORIDE AT WEAK ACIDIC TO NEUTRAL ph
US20120076772A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-03-29 Baxter Healthcare S.A. Stabilization of immunoglobulins through aqueous formulation with histidine at weak acidic to neutral ph

Non-Patent Citations (658)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Immunoglobulin—overview" retrieved from <URIL:webmd.com/cancer/tc/immune-globulin-overview [retrieved on Apr. 12, 2017], 4 pages.
"Immunoglobulin-Overview" retrieved from <URL:webmd.com/cancer/tc/immune-globulin-overview[retrieved on Apr. 12, 2017], 4 pages.
"PEGPH20: The Science & The Strategy," presented at J. P. Morgan Healthcare Conference on Jan. 7, 2015. Presentation. 81 pages.
"PEGPH2O: The Science & The Strategy," presented at J. P. Morgan Healthcare Conference on Jan. 7, 2015. Presentation. 81 pages.
"Products & Pipeline: Baxter-HyQ," Halozyme website[online][retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:halozyme.com/Products-And-Pipeline/Pipeline/Baxter-HyQ/default.aspx[1 page].
Adams et al., "The c-myc oncogene driven by immunoglobulin enhancers induces lymphoid malignancy in transgenic mice," Nature 318:533-538 (1985).
Afify et al., "Purification and characterization of human serum hyaluronidases," Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 305:434-441 (1993).
Alexander et al., "Expression of the c-myc oncogene under control of an immunoglobulin enhancer in E mu-myc transgenic mice," Mol. Cell Biol. 7:1436-1444 (1987).
Allen et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase-Enabled Subcutaneous Pediatric Rehydration." Pediatrics 124(5):e858-e867 (2009) found at: http://pediatrics.aappublications.org/cgi/content/abstract/124/5/e858.
Angelborg et al., "The HYAL 1LuCA1 Gene Is Inactivated In Breast Carcinomas By Hypermethylation/Chromatin condensation And Mediates Tumor Suppression In Vivo," Am Assoc Cancer Res 2002, 2 pages.
Angelborg et al., "The HYAL1LuCA1 Gene Is Inactivated In Breast Carcinomas By Hypermethylation/Chromatin condensation And Mediates Tumor Suppression In Vivo," Am Assoc Cancer Res 2002, 1 page.
Ansel, Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Fourth Edition, 126 (1985).
Arming et a1., "In vitro mutagenesis of PH-20 hyaluronidase from human sperm," Eur J Biochem 247(3):810-814 (1997).
Arming et al., "In vitro mutagenesis of PH-20 hyaluronidase from human sperm," Eur J Biochem 247(3):810-814 (1997).
Atschul, S., "Basic local alignment search tool," J Molec Biol 215(3):403-410 (1990).
Barandun et al., "Intravenous administration of human gammaglobulin," Vox Sang, 7:157-174 (1962).
Baxter BioScience, Briefing Book: Blood Products Advisory Committee Meeting. "HyQvia: Immune Globulin Infusion 10% (Human) with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase," Published Jul. 31, 2014. Available on-line at <URL:google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&frm=1&source=web&cd=3&ved=0CCwQFjAC&ur1=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.fda.gov%2Fdownloads%2FAdvisoryCommittees%2FCommitteesMeetingMaterials%2FBloodVaccinesandOtherBiologics%2FBloodProductsAdvisoryCommittee%2FUCM407013.pdf&ei=zTFBVJXELfOHsQSX14DICQ&usg=AFQjCNFmAm634vKiaGB5cLM-mvOEMFGu-w, 204 pages.
Baxter BioScience, Briefng Book: Blood Products Advisory Committee Meeting. "HyQvia: Immune Globulin Infusion 10% (Human) with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase," Published Jul. 31, 2014. Available on-line at <URL:google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&cr&esrc=s&frm=1&source=web&cd=3&Ved=0CCwQFjAC&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.fda.gov%2Fdownloads%2FAdvisoryCommittees%2FCommitteesMeetingMaterials%2FBloodVacc-inesandOtherBiologics%2FBloodProductsAdvisoryCommittee%2FUCM407013.pdf&ei=zTFBVJXELfOHsQSX14DICQ&usg=AFQjCNFmAm634vKiaGB5cLM-mvOEMEGu-w, 204 pages.
Baxter Health Care Corporation (R. Schiff, MD), "Gammagard Liquid and rHuPH20 in PID," found at: www.clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00814320, last updated Oct. 27, 2009, 5 pages.
Baxter Health Care Corporation, Gammagard Liquid (Immune Globulin Intravenous (Human) 10%] product literature, found at: www.baxter.com/products/biopharmaceuticals/downloads/gamliquid_PI.pdf, published Apr. 2005, 4 pages.
Baxter Health Care Corporation, Ganunagard Liquid (Immune Globulin Intravenous (Human) 10%] product literature, found at:www.baxter.com/products/biopharmaceuticals/downloads/gamliquid_PI.pdf, published Apr. 2005, 4 pages.
Baxter Healthcare Corporation, "Study to determine the dose of recombinant human hyaluronidase needed to infuse a dose of IGIV subcutaneously," found at: http://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00782106 [accessed on May 13, 2009] [3 pages].
Baxter Healthcare Corporation, "Study to determine the dose of recombinant human hyaluronidase needed to infuse a dose of IGlV subcutaneously," found at: http://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/showiNCT00782106 [accessed on May 13, 2009] [3 pages].
Bee et al., "Effects of rHuPH20 on SC Administration of 10% and 20% IgG in Yucatan Mini Pigs" AAAAI Feb. 26-Mar. 2, 2010, New Orleans [2 pages].
Bee et al., "Recombinant human PH20 is well tolerated at higher intravenous and subcutaneous doses in cynomolgus monkeys," EUFEPS 2008, Munich, Germany, 1 page.
Bee et al., "Recombinant human PH20 is well tolerated at higher intravenous and subcutaneous doses in cynomolgus monkeys," EUFEPS 2008, Munich, Germany, 3 pages.
Benhar et al., "Pseudomonas exotoxin A mutants. Replacement of surface-exposed residues in domain III with cysteine residues that can be modified with polyethylene glycol in a site-specific manner," J. Biol. Chem. 269:13398-14404 (1994).
Berger et al., "Immunoglobulin replacement therapy by slow subcutaneous infusion," Ann Intern Med 93:55-56 (1980).
Berger, M., "Principles ofand advances in immunoglobulin replacement therapy for primary immunodeficiency," Immunol. Allergy Clin. North Am. 28(2):413-438 (2003).
Berger, M., "Subcutaneous immunoglobulin therapy in primary immunodeficiencies,"Clin Immuno 112:1-7 (2004).
Bernoist, C. and P, Chaanon, "In vivo sequence requirements of the SV40 early promotor region," Nature 290:304-310 (1981).
Bernoist, C. and P. Chambon, "In vivo sequence requirements of the SV40 early promotor region," Nature 290:304-310 (1981).
Bianchi et al., "Synthetic depsipeptide substrates for the assay of hmnan hepatitis C virus protease," Anal. Biochem. 237:239-244 (1996).
Bianchi et al., "Synthetic depsipeptide substrates for the assay of human hepatitis C virus protease," Anal. Biochem. 237:239-244 (1996).
BioWorld Today, "Clinic roundup," BioWorld Today 20(2):5 (2009).
Björkander et al.,"Prospective open-label study of pharmacokinetics, efficacy and safety of a new 10% liquid intravenous immunoglobulin in patients with hypo- or agammaglobulinemia," Vox Sanguinis 90(4):286-293 (2006).
Bookbinder et al, "Evaluation of the compatibility and pharmacokinetics of co-formulated biologics with recombinant human hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Nov. 2006, Abstract, 2 pages.
Bookbinder et al., "A recombinant human enzyme for enhanced interstitial transport of therapeutics," J Control Release. 114(2):230-241 (2006) Epub Jun. 7, 2006.
Bookbinder et al., "Biochemical Characterization of Recombinant Human PH20 (SPAM1) Hyaluronidase," Hyaluronan (ISHAS) 2007, Charleston, SC, 1 page.
Bookbinder et al., "Biochemical Characterization of Recombinant Human PH20 (SPAM1) Hyaluronidase," Hyaluronan (ISHAS) 2007, Charleston, SC, 2 pages.
Bookbinder et al., "Biochemical Characterization of Recombinant Human PH20 (SPAMl) Hyaluronidase,"Hyaluronan (ISHAS) 2007, Charleston, SC, 1 page.
Bookbinder et al., "Enhancing Drug Transport Through Temporary Matrix Depolymerization," Keystone Symposia 2005, 1 page.
Bookbinder et al., "Enhancing drug transport through temporary matrix depolymerization," Keystone Symposia 2005, 13 pages.
Bookbinder et al., "EnhanzeTM Technology for Antibody Dispersion," Strategic Research Institute Antibody World Summit, 2005, Jersey City, NJ [41 pages].
Bookbinder et al., "EnhanzeTM Technology for Antibody Dispersion," Strategic Research Institute Antibody World Summit, 2005, Jersey City, NJ, 1 page.
Bookbinder et al., "Evaluation of the compatibility and pharmacokinetics of co-formulated biologics with recombinant human hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Nov. 2006, 2 pages.
Bordier, C., "Phase separation of integral membrane proteins in Triton X-114 solution," J. Biol. Chem. 256:1604-1607 (1981).
Bouffard et al., "An in vitro assay for hepatitis C virus NS3 serine proteinase," Virology 209:52-59 (1995).
Brinster et al., "Regulation of metallothionein-thymidine kinase fusion plasmids injected into mouse eggs," Nature 296:39-42 (1982).
Brumeanu et al., "Derivatization with monomethoxypolyethylene glycol of Igs expressing viral epitopes obviates adjuvant requirements," J Immunol. 154:3088-3095 (1995).
Buckley, R. and R. Schiff, "The use ofintravenous immune globulin in immunodeficiency diseases," N Engl J Med. 325(2):110-117 (1991).
Byerley et al., "‘Cutting out the bull’. Recombinant human hyaluronidase: Moving to an animal-free system," Association of Clinical Embryologists, 2006, Dublin, Ireland. Abstract published in Human Fertility 9(2): 110 (2006).
Caliceti, P. and F. Veronese, "Pharmacokinetic and biodistribution properties of poly(ethylene glycol)-protein conjugates," Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 55(10):1261-1277 (2003).
Carrillo et al., "The multiple-sequence alignment problem in biology," SIAM J Applied Math 481:1073-1082 (1988).
Certificate of Grant, dated Jun. 6, 2107, issued in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q, 2 pages.
Chapel et al. "Randomised trial of intravenous immunoglobulin as prophylaxis against infection in plateau-phase multiple myeloma. The UK Group for Immunoglobulin Replacement Therapy in Multiple Myeloma," Lancet 343:1059-1063 (1994).
Cheng et al., "PEGylated adenoviruses for gene delivery to the intestinal epithelium by the oral route," Pharm. Res. 20(9):1444-1451 (2003).
Cherr et al., "The dual functions of GPI-anchored PH-20: hyaluronidase and intracellular signaling," Matrix Biol., 20:515-525 (2001).
Cherr et al., "The PH-20 protein in cynomolgus macaque spermatozoa: identification of two different forms exhibiting hyaluronidase activity," Dev. Biol., 175:142-153, 1996.
Cho et al., "Construction of hepatitis C-SIN virus recombinants with replicative dependency on hepatitis C virus serine protease activity." J. Virol. Meth. 65:201-207 (1997).
Christadoss et al., "Animal models of myasthenia gravis," Clin Immunol. 94:75-87 (2000).
Church et al., "Efficacy, safety and tolerability of a new 10% liquid intravenous immune globulin [IGIV 10%] in patients with primary immunodeficiency," US-PID-IGIV 10%—Study Group10. J Clin Immunol. 26(4):388-395 (2006).
Cohn et al., "Preparation and Properties of Serum and Plasma Proteins. IV. A System for the Separation into Fractions of the Protein and Lipoprotein Components of Biological Tissues and Fluids1,a,b,c,d," J. Am. Chem. Soc. 68:459-475 (1946).
Communication under Rule 71(3) Intention to Grant, dated Mar. 16, 2016, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 5 pages.
Communication under Rule 71(3) Intention to Grant, issued Mar. 16, 2016, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 5 pages.
Communication under Rule 97(1) Decision to Grant, dated Apr. 6, 2017, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 3 pages.
Communication under Rule 97(1) Decision to Grant, issued Apr. 6, 2017, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 3 pages.
Communication, dated Mar. 31, 2014, providing English translation of Resolution 13045, dated Feb. 28, 2014, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 5 pages.
Conserved domain search from U.S. Appl. No. 10/795,095 of Seq Id No. 6, Primakoff et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,348, performed on the NCBI website on Aug. 5, 2008.
Conserved domain search from U.S. Appl. No. 10/795,095 of SEQ ID No. 6, Primakotf et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,348, performed on the NCBI website on Aug. 5, 2008.
Csoka et al, "The six hyaluronidase-like genes in the human and mouse genomes," Matrix Biol. 20:499-508 (2001).
Csoka et al., "Hyaluronidases in tissue invasion," FEBS Lett., 417:307-310 (1997).
Csoka et al., "Hyaluronidases in tissue invasion," Invasion Metastasis 17:297-311 (1997).
Czitrom et al., "The function of antigen-presenting cells in mice with severe combined immunodeficiency," J Immunol 134:2276-2280 (1985).
Dalakas et al., "A controlled study of intravenous immunoglobulin combined with prednisone in the treatment of IBM," Neurology 56(3):323-327 (2001).
Dalakas et al., "A controlled trial of high-dose intravenous immune globulin infusions as treatment for dermatomyositis," N Engl J Med 329(27):1993-2000 (1993).
Dalakas et al., "High-dose intravenous immune globulin for stiff person syndrome," N Engl J Med 345(26):1870-1876 (2001).
Dalakas, M., "The use of intravenous immunoglobulin in the treatment of autoimmune neuromuscular diseases: evidence-based indications and safety profile," Pharmacol Ther 102(3):177-193 (2004).
Danilkovitch-Miagkova, et al., "Hyalluonidase 2 negatively regulates RON receptor tyrosine kinase and mediates transformation of epithelial cells by jaagsiekte sheep retrovirus," Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 100(8):4580-4585 (2003).
Danilkovitch-Miagkova, et al., "Hyaluronidase 2 negatively regulates RON receptor tyrosine kinase and mediates transformation of epithelial cells by jaagsiekte sheep retrovirus," Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 100(8):4580-4585 (2003).
Deboer et al., "The tac promoter: a functional hybrid derived from the trp and lac promoters." Proc. Natl, Acad, Sci, USA 80:21-25 (1983).
Delpech et al., "Enzyme-linked hyaluronectin: a unique reagent for hyaluronan assay and tissue location and for hyaluronidase activity detection." Anal. Biochem. 229:35-41 (1995).
Derwent English language patent abstract for CH 684 164 (Item AF). Inventor: Friedli et al., Publication Date: Jul. 29, 1994, Dialog File No. 351, Accession No. 6846186, 1 page.
Derwent patent abstract citing JP 4346934 published Dec. 2, 2002, for: "Liq. Compsn. For intravenous injection for infectious disease treatment-comprises chemically unmodified mol. Type gamma globulin with low conductivity and contains no sorbitol." Inventor: Kamimura et al. Dialog File No. 351. Accession No. 6231217 [2 pages].
Derwent patent abstract citing JP 54020124 published Feb. 15, 1979, for: "Intraveneously injectable gamma-globulin compsn. Prodn.by addn. of amino acids, sugars and neutral salts as dissociation agents." Inventor: Funakoshi et al. Dialog File No. 351. Accession No. 1699807 [2 pages].
Derwent patent abstract citing JP 57128635 published Aug. 10. 1982, for: "Gamma-globulin prepn. For intravenous injection contains sodium chloride and L-arginine or L-lysine," Inventor: Matsuo et al. Dialog File No. 351. Accession No. 2496703 [2 pages].
Devereux et al, "A comprehensive set of sequence analysis pro- grams for the VAX." Nucleic Acids Research 12:387-395 (1984).
Dodel et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulins containing antibodies against beta-amyloid for the treatment of Alzheimer's disease," J Neurol Neurosurg. Psychiatry 75:1472-1474 (2004).
D'Souza et al., "In vitro cleavage of hepatitis C virus polyprotein substrates by purified recombinant NS3 protease," J Gen. Virol. 76:1729-1736 (1995).
Ellmeier et al., "Severe B cell deficiency in mice lacking the tec kinase family members Tec and Btk," J Exp Med. 192:1611-1624 (2000).
English translation of Examiniation Report dated Apr. 24, 2012 in connection with Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166 (30581W), 5 pages.
English translation of Examiniation Report dated Apr. 24, 2012 in connection with Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166 (3058TW), 5 pages.
Evison et al., "Improvement in ICSI Survival and Fertilisation rates with the use of Cumulase, Recombinant Hyaluronidase (Rochford Medical)," 5th Biennial Joint Meeting of the UK Fertility Societies Association of Clinical Embryologists, British Fertility Society, Society for Reproduction & Fertility, Apr. 2007, York, England, Abstract p. 22.
Examination Repor/ Hearing Notice, dated Dec. 14, 2017, in connection with Indian Patent Application No. 7321/DELNP/2010, 3 pages.
Examination Report, dated Apr. 30, 2015 and received Jun. 4, 2015, in connection with Indian Patent Application No. 7321/DELNP/2010, 5 pages.
Examination Report, dated Jan. 6, 2015 (received Feb, 24, 2015), in connection with Singaporean Patent Application No. 201005998-8 (3058SG), 14 pages [cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Examination Report, dated Mar. 29, 2013, in connection with corresponding Taiwan Patent Application No. 098108166 [English Translation], 8 pages.
Examination Report, dated Nov. 22, 2012 (received Dec. 20, 2012), in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 6 pages.
Examination Report, dated Oct. 21, 2015, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 4 pages.
Examination Report, dated Sep. 10, 2014, in connection with European Patent Application No, 09721669.1, 8 pages [Examination Report and cited reference D1-Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Examination Report/ Hearing Notice, dated Dec. 14, 2017, in connection with Indian Patent Application No. 7321/DELNP/2010, 3 pages.
Examiner's Report, dated Aug. 10, 2015, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 8 pages.
Examiner's Report, dated Jul, 22, 2014, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 4 pages.
Examiner's Report, dated Mar. 31, 2017, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 3 pages.
Examiner's Report, dated Oct. 5, 2011, in connection with corresponding Australian Patent Application No. 2009226141, 2 pages.
Examiner's Report, issued Mar. 31, 2017, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 3 pages.
Examiner's Report, issued Oct. 5, 2011, in connection with corresponding Australian Patent Application No. 2009226141, 2 pages.
Favre et al, "Hyaluronidase enhances recombinant adeno-associated virus (rAAV)—mediated gene transfer in the rat skeletal muscle," Gene Ther 7(16):1417-1420 (2000).
Federal Register Sep. 23, 1970 (35 FR 14800); Wydase NDA 6-343, (40 pages).
Felix et al., "Pegylated peptides. IV. Enhanced biological activity of site-directed pegylated GRF analogs," Int. J. Peptide Res. 46:253-264 (1995).
Fernandes, P, and J. Lundblad, "Preparation ofa stable intavenous gamma-globulin: process design and scale-up," Vox Sang. 39:101-112 (1980).
Fernandes, P. and J. Lundblad, "Preparation of a stable intravenous gamma-globulin: process design and scale-up," Vox Sang. 39:101-112 (1980).
Few, B., "Hyaluronidase for treating intravenous extravasations," MCN Amer. J. Matern. Child Nurs. 12(1):23 (1987).
Filocamo et al., "Chimeric Sindbis Viruses dependent on the NS3 protease of hepatitis C virus," J Virology 71:1417-1427 (1997).
Final Examination Report, dated Apr. 10, 2017, and Notice of Eligibility for Grant, dated Apr. 24, 2017, issued in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q [Original documents and cited references], 54 pages.
Final Office Action, dated May 20, 2014, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 5 pages [English language translation, original document in Japanese and cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):583 (2008)].
Final Office Action, issued May 20, 2014, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 5 pages [English language translation, original document in Japanese and cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Final Rejection, received Sep. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 4 pages.
Final Rejection, received Sep. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 4 pages. Instructions, dated Sep. 11, 2013, for response to Final Rejection, received Sep. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 16 pages.
Form 10-Q for Halozyme Therapeutics dated May 8, 2009, retrieved from: http://biz.yahoo.com/e/090508/halo10-q.html [retrieved on Nov. 25, 2009] [6 pages].
Frost et al., "HYAL1LUCA-1, a candidate tumor suppressor gene on chromosome 3p21.3, is inactivated in head and neck squamous cell carcinomas by aberrant splicing of pre-mRNA," Oncogene (19):870-877 (2000).
Frost et al., "HYALILUCA-1, a candidate tumor suppressor gene on chromosome 3p21.3, is inactivated in head and neck squamous cell carcinomas by aberrant splicing of pre-mRNA," Oncogene (19):870-877 (2000).
Frost et al., "Punctuated Equilibrium: The Evolution of Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase," Ophthalmic Anesthesia Society, 2006, Chicago, IL, 1 page.
Frost et al., "Purification, cloning, and expression of human plasma hyaluronidase," Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 236(1):10-15 (1997).
Frost et al., "Subcutaneous Strategies for Monoclonal Antibody Delivery," Drug Delivery 2007: Where Science and Business Meet, 2007, San Diego, CA, 1 page.
Frost et al.. "Punctuated Equilibrium: The Evolution of Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase," Ophthalmic Anesthesia Society, 2006, Chicago, IL, 36 pages.
Frost G., "Subcutaneous Strategies for Monoclonal Antibody Delivery." IBC Life Sciences Antibodies and Beyond Antibodies: Optimizing Antibody Leads and Exploring Next Generation Scaffolds for Protein Therapeutics, Coronado CA, 2006 [20 pages].
Frost, G. and R. Stern, "A microtiter-based assay for hyaluronidase activity not requiring specialized reagents," Anal.Biochem. 251:263-269 (1997).
Frost, G. I., "Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc. Thinking outside the cell," presented at J. P. Morgan Healthcare Conference on Jan. 10, 2013. Presentation, 23 pages.
Frost, G., "Recombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPH20): an enabling platform for subcutaneous drug and fluid administration," Expert Opin. Drug. Deliv. 4:427-440 (2007).
Frost, G., "Recombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPHZO): an enabling platform for subcutaneous drug and fluid administration," Expert Opin. Drug. Deliv. 4:427-440 (2007).
Gammagard Liquid, 2005. *
Gammagard S/D, 1994. *
Gardner et al., "The complete nucleotide sequence of an infectious clone of cauliflower mosaic virus by M13mp7 shotgun sequencing," Nucleic Acids Res, 9:2871-2888 (1981).
Gardulf and Hammarstrom, "Subcutaneous Administration of Immunoglobulins. What are the advantages?" Clin Immunother 6:108-116 (1996).
Gardulf et al., "Home treatment of hypogammaglobulinaemia with subcutaneous gammaglobulin by rapid infusion," Lancet 338:162-166 (1991).
Gardulf et al., "Lifelong treatment with gammaglobulin for primary antibody deficiencies: the patients' experiences of subcutaneous self-infusions and home therapy," J Adv. Nurs. 21:917-927 (1995).
Gardulf et al., "Rapid subcutaneous IgG replacement therapy is effective and safe in children and adults with primary immunodeficiencies—a prospective, multi-national study," J Clin. Immunol. 26:177-185 (2006).
Gardulf et al., "Safety of rapic subcutaneous gammaglobulin by rapid infusion in patients with primary antibody deficiency," Immunodeficiency 4:81-84 (1993).
Gardulf et al., "Subcutaneous immunoglobulin replacement in patients with primary antibody deficiencies:safety and costs," Lancet 345:365-369 (1995).
Gardulf et al., "The life situations of patients with primary antibody deficiency untreated or treated with subcutaneous gammaglobulin infusions," Clin. Exp. Immunol. 92:200-204 (1993).
Gardulf et al., J. Clin. Immunol. 26(2):177-185, Mar. 2006. *
Gardulf, A. and U. Nicolay, "Replacement IgG therapy and self-therapy at home improve the health-related quality of life in patients with primary antibody deficiencies," Curr. Opin, Allergy Clin. Immunol., 6: 434-442 (2006).
Gellene, D., "San Diego's Halozyme Injects New Life into Old Drugs" Feb. 28, 2010, retrieved from: http://www.signonsandiego.com/news/2010/feb/28/wwwxconomycom60025/, on Apr. 26, 2010 [3 pages].
Gilbert, W. and L. Villa-Komaroff, "Useful Proteins from Recombinant Bacteria," Scientific American 242:79-94 (1980).
Gmachl et al., "The human sperm protein PH-20 has hyaluronidase activity," FEBS 336(3):545-548 (1993).
Godeau et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulin for adults with autoimmune thrombocytopeni purpura: results of a randomized trial comparing 0.5 and 1 g/kg b.w.," Br J Haematol 107(4):716-719 (1999).
Godeau et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulin for adults with autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura: results of a randomized trial comparing 0.5 and 1 g/kg b.w.," Br J Haematol 107(4):716-719 (1999).
Godeau et al., "Treatment of adult chronic autoimmune thrombocytopenia purpura with repeated high-dose intravenous immunoglobulin," Blood 82(5):1415-1421 (1993).
Godeau et al., "Treatment of adult chronic autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura with repeated high-dose intravenous immunoglobulin." Blood 82(5): 1415-1421 (1993).
Greenbaum, "Early Experience with Hylenex-assisted Parabulbar Anesthesia," Annual Meeting of the Ophthalmic Anesthesia Society in Chicago, IL. Sep. 2007, 2 pages.
Greenbaum, "Early Experience with Hylenex-assisted Parabulbar Anesthesia." Annual Meeting of the Ophthalmic Anesthesia Society in Chicago, IL. Sep. 2007, 1 page.
Greenway, "The Next Chapter Begins: Creating Value Through Growth," Presented at the IMP Securities 2015 Life Sciences Conference, Jun. 24, 2015, 24 pages.
Greenway, "The Next Chapter Begins: Creating Value Through Growth," Presented at the JMP Securities 2015 Life Sciences Conference, Jun. 24, 2015, 24 pages.
Gribskov, M. and R. Burgess, "Sigma factors from E. coli, B. sublilis. phage SP01, and phage T4 are homologous proteins" Nucl. Acids Res. 14:6745-6763 (1986).
Gribskov, M. and R. Burgess, "Sigma factors from E. coli, B. subtilis, phage SP01, and phage T4 are homologous proteins," Nucl. Acids Res. 14:6745-6763 (1986).
Griffiths et al., "Crossover study of immunoglobulin replacement therapy in patients with low-grade B-cell tumors," Blood 73:366- 368 (1989).
Grosschedl et al., "Introduction of a mu immunoglobulin gene into the mouse germ line: specific expression in lymphoid cells and synthesis of functional antibody," Cell 38:647-658 (1984).
Grunebaum et al., "Novel aspects of hypogammaglobulinemic states: subcutaneous immunoglobulin treatment," Isr. Med. Assoc J 4:288-289 (2002).
Guo et al., "Protein tolerance to random amino acid change," Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 101:9205-9210 (2004).
Gustafson et al., "Rapid subcutaneous immunoglobulin administration every second week results in high and stable serum immunoglobulin G levels in patients with primary antibody deficiencies," Immunol. 152(2):274-279 (2008).
Hahm et al., "Generation of a novel poliovirus with a requirement of hepatitis C virus protease NS3 activity," Virology 226:318-326 (1996).
Haller et al,, "Enhanze Technology—A Revolution in Drug Dispersion," Biotechnology Industry Organization (BIO) Annual Meeting, 2005, Philadelphia, PA [4 pages].
Haller et al., "Enhanze Technology—A Revolution in Drug Dispersion," Biotechnology Industry Organization (BIO) Annual Meeting, 2005, Philadelphia, PA, 3 pages.
Haller et al., "Escaping the Interstitial Matrix With Enzyme-Mediated Drug Delivery," Drug Delivery Technology, 5(5):1-6, 2005.
Haller et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for the Interstitial Transport of Therapeutics," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Jun. 2006, San Antonio, TX, 2 pages.
Haller et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for the Interstitial Transport of Therapeutics," Controlled Release Society Conference, Vienna, Austria, 2006, 2 pages.
Haller et al., "Revolutionizing Drug Dispersion with Enhanze Technology," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, Nov, 6-10, 2005, Nashville, TN, Poster, 1 page.
Haller et al., "Revolutionizing Drug Dispersion with Enhanze Technology," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, Nov. 6-10, 2005, Nashville, TN, Abstract, 3 pages.
Haller et al., "Revolutionizing Drug Dispersion with Enhanze Technology." American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, Nov. 6-10, 2005 poster, Nashville, TN, poster, 1 page.
Haller et al., "The Effects of Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase on Drug Dispersion," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, 2005, Nashville, TN, 3 pages.
Haller, "Converting Intravenous Dosing to Subcutaneous Dosing with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase," Pharmaceut Tech. Oct. 2007 Newsletter, 14 pgs.
Haller, "Enhanze Technology—An Enzymatic Drug Delivery System (DDS)," Japanese Export Trade Organization, 2005, Santa Clara, CA, 2 pages.
Haller, "Halozyme's Enhanze Technology for the Enhanced Dispersion of Co-Injected Pharmaceuticals," Japanese Export Trade Organization, Sep. 2004, Chicago, IL, 2 pages.
Haller, M., "Enzyme-facilitated Parenteral Drug Transport. Strategic Research Institute's 10th Anniversary Drug Delivery Technology and Deal-making Sununit," 2005 New Brunswick, NJ [24 pages].
Haller, M., "Enzyme-facilitated Parenteral Drug Transport." Strategic Research Institute's 10th Anniversary Drug Delivery Technology and Deal-making Summit, 2005 New Brunswick, NJ [24 pages].
Haller, M., "Focus on Enhanced and Innovative Recombinant Human Enzymes," Japanese Export Trade Organization, Sep. 2004, Chicago, IL. (16 pages).
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," Feb. 1, 2006. [34 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," Feb. 12, 2008. [37 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," Feb. 22, 2007. [25 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," Jun. 28, 2006. [28 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," May 15, 2008. [15 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Company Overview," Nov. 29, 2005. [34 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Focus on enhanced and innovative recombinant human enzymes," Jan. 28, 2005. [28 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc.: Thinking outside the cell," Presented on Oct. 2, 2012 [online] [retrieved on Oct. 11, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000119312512412748/d419091dex991.htm [82 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation, "Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc.: Thinking outside the cell," Presented on Oct. 2, 2012 [online][retrieved on Oct. 11, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/l159036/000119312512412748/d419091dex991.htm [82 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics Investor Presentation. "Focus on enhanced and innovative recombinant human enzymes." Mar, 12, 2004, [32 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Exclusive Distribution Agreement," Aug. 13, 2004, 13 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Halozyme Therapeutic, Inc. Prospectus Supplement," Jun. 23, 2009 [85 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Matrix therapies for life," Presented at Canaccord Cardiovascular, Diabetes & Obesity Conference, Dec. 8, 2010, 38 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Non-Exclusive Distribution Agreement," Apr. 13, 2004, 22 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Non-Exclusive Distribution Agreement," Feb. 9, 2004, 21 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Non-Exclusive Distribution Agreement," Jan. 30, 2004, 19 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Amendment No. 1 to Form SB-2," Jun. 21, 2004, 108 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10K," Mar. 12, 2010 [121 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10K," Mar. 2007 [108 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10-KSB," Mar. 24, 2006 [50 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10Q," Aug. 7, 2009 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10Q," Nov. 6, 2009 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form 10-QSB," Nov. 12, 2004, 34 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form S-3," Nov. 12, 2004, 30 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Comission Form SB-2," Mar. 23, 2004, 102 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Amendment No. 1 to Form SB- 2," Jun. 21, 2004, 108 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10K," Mar. 12, 2010 [121 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10K," Mar. 13, 2009 [122 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10K," Mar. 2007 [108 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10-KSB," Mar. 11, 2005 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10-KSB," Mar. 24, 2006 [50 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10Q," Aug. 6, 2010 [41 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10Q," Aug. 7, 2009 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10Q," Nov. 5, 2010 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10Q," Nov. 6, 2009 [45 pages].
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form 10-QSB," Nov. 12, 2004, 34 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form S-3," Nov. 12, 2004, 30 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, "Securities and Exchange Commission Form SB-2," Mar. 23, 2004, 102 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, Analyst and Investor Meeting presentations "Matrix Therapeutics for Life" presentations including Lim, J., "Introduction and strategy overview, Roche program update," Gustafson, K., "Strategic deployment of cash," Wasserman, R., "HyQ treatment of primary immunodeficiency patients," Muchmore, D., "Ultrafast insulin-clinical results and ongoing trials," Cefalu, W., "Unmet needs in diabetes management," Little, R., Market overview-ultrafast insulin and SC immunoglobin and Frost, G., "PEGPH20 and HTI-501 status report," Presented 10.15.10 in New York, NY. (124 pages).
Halozyme Therapeutics, Analyst and Investor Meeting presentations "Matrix Therapeutics for Life" presentations including Lim, J., "Introduction and strategy overview, Roche program update," Gustafson, K., "Strategic deployment of cash," Wasserman, R., "HyQ treatment of primary immunodeficiency patients," Muchmore, D., "Ultrafast insulin-clinical results and ongoing trials,"Cefalu, W., "Unmet needs in diabetes management," Little, R., Market overview-ultrafast insulin and SC immunoglobin and Frost, G., "PEGPH20 and HTI-501 status report," Presented Oct. 15, 2010 in New York, NY. (124 pages).
Halozyme Therapeutics, Analyst and Investor Meeting presentations including by Lim, J., "Introduction and strategic review," Little, R., "Leveraging the technology across multiple partners," Frost, G., "Discovery and early development pipeline update," and D. Muchmore, "Ultrafast insulin-PH20 program-where we are going." Presented 10.15.09 in New York. (88 pages).
Halozyme Therapeutics, Analyst and Investor Meeting presentations including by Lim, J., "Introduction and strategic review," Little, R., "Leveraging the technology across multiple partners,"Frost, G., "Discovery and early development pipeline update," and D. Muchmore, "Ultrafast insulin-PH20 program-where we are going."Presented Oct. 15, 2009 in New York. (88 pages).
Halozyme Therapeutics, J.P. Morgan 29th Annual Healthcare Conference Presentation, Jan. 12, 2011, 35 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, Securities and Exchange Commission form 10K, Mar. 11, 2011, 124 pages.
Halozyme Therapeutics, Securities and Exchange Commission Form 8-K. Jan. 10, 2011, 43 pages.
Hamamoto et al., "A novel method for removal of human immunodeficiency virus: filtration with polymeric membranes," Vox Sang. 56:230-236 (1989).
Hamatake et al., "Establishment of an in vitro assay to characterize hepatitis C virus NS3-4A protease trans-processing activity," Intervirology 39:249-258 (1996).
Hammer et al., "Diversity of alpha-fetoprotein gene expression in mice is generated by a combination of separate enhancer elements," 235:53-58 (1987).
Hammer et al., "Diversity of alpha-fetoprotein gene expression in mice is generated by a combination of separate enhancer elements," Science 235:53-58 (1987).
Hanahan, D, "Heritable formation of pancreatic beta-cell tumours in transgenic mice expressing recombinant insulin/simian virus 40 oncogenes," Nature (3)15:115-122 (1985).
Hansen, R. and J. Balthasar, "Effects of intravenous immunoglobulin on platelet count and antiplatelet antibody disposition in a rat model of immune thrombocytopenia," Blood 100:2087-2093 (2002).
Herrera-Estrella et al., "Exp[ression of chimaeric genes transferred into plant cells using a ti-plasmid-derived vector,"Nature 303:209-213 (1984).
Herrera-Estrella et al., "Light-inducible and chloroplast-associated expression of a chimaeric gene introduced into Nicotiana tabacum using a Ti plasmid vector," Nature 310(5973):115-120 (1984).
Hiemstra et al., "Comparison of antibody activity against various microorganisms in intravenous immunoglobulin preparations determined by ELISA and opsonic assay," J Lab Clin Med 123:241-246 (1994).
Hofer et al., "Human Recombinant Hyaluronidase Increases the Convection of Molecules up to 0.2 μm in Athymic Nude Mice," J. Am. Assoc, Lab. Animal Sci, 45:120 abstract P97 (2006). 2 pages.
Hofer, "Human Recombinant Hyaluronidase Increases the Convection of Molecules up to 0.2 μm in Athymic Nude Mice," American Association for Laboratory Animal Science, 2006, Salt Lake City, UT. Abstract published in J. Am. Assoc. Lab. Animal Sci., 45:120, 2006, abstract p. 97.
Hunnicut et al., "Structural relationship of sperm soluble hyaluronidase to the sperm membrane protein PH-20," Biol Reprod. 54(6):1343-1349 (1996).
Hylenex recombinant (hyaluronidase recombinant human) injection, solution. Published on Feb. 29, 2008 in Dosage and Administration: Subcutaneous Urography. Retrieved from <URL: dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/archives/fdaDrugInfo.cfm?archiveid=7523 [Retrieved on Jul. 27, 2016], 6 pages.
ICSI Cumulase, "Human hyaluronidase for hlunan oocytes" Medicult Product information Jun. 16, 2009, 2 pages [accessed on Mar. 30, 2010].
ICSI Cumulase, "Human hyaluronidase for human oocytes" Medicult Product information Jun. 16, 2009, 2 pages [accessed on Mar. 30, 2010].
Instructions for response to Examination Report, dated Apr. 24, 2012, in connection with corresponding Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166, 26 pages.
Instructions for response to Office Action, dated Jul. 4, 2012, in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9, 19 pages.
Instructions for response to Office Action, issued Jul. 4, 2012, in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9, 19 pages.
Instructions, dated Apr. 2, 2013, for response to Office Action, received Feb. 25, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 19 pages.
Instructions, dated Jan. 14, 2015 and Jan. 23, 2015, for Response, filed Jan. 28, 2015, to Office Action, dated Oct. 17, 2014, in connection with Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166, 61 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Chinese].
Instructions, dated Jan. 14, 2015 and Jan. 23, 2015, for Response, filed Jan. 28, 2015, to Office Action, issued Oct. 17, 2014, in connection with Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166, 61 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Chinese].
Instructions, dated Jan. 16, 2014, for response, filed Jan. 20, 2014, to Official Action, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 25 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Spanish].
Instructions, dated Jan. 16, 2014, for response, filed Jan. 20, 2014, to Official Action, received Oct. 4, 2013, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 25 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Spanish].
Instructions, dated Jan. 25, 2014, for Response, filed Jan. 28, 2014, to Office Action, dated Oct. 15, 2013, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009, 20 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Spanish].
Instructions, dated Jan. 25, 2014, for Response, filed Jan. 28, 2014, to Office Action, issued Oct. 15, 2013, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009, 20 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Spanish].
Instructions, dated Jul. 11, 2013, for Response to Office Action, received Feb. 13, 2013, in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009, 23 pages.
Instructions, dated Jun. 1, 2014, for request for reexamination in Response, filed Jun. 5, 2014, to Office Action, dated Feb. 18, 2014, in connection with Chinese Patent Application No, 200980109505. 9), 32 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Chinese].
Instructions, dated Jun. 1, 2014, for request for reexamination in Response, filed Jun. 5, 2014, to Office Action, issued Feb. 18, 2014, in connection with Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9), 32 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Chinese].
Instructions, dated Nov. 7, 2014, for filing Appeal Brief and Appeal Brief, as filed Nov. 13, 2014, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 26 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Japanese].
Instructions, dated Sep. 11, 2013, for response to Final Rejection, received Sep. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104, 16 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 15, 2014 for response, filed Sep. 19, 2014, to Official Action, dated May 9, 2014, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No, MX/a/2010/009478, 71 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Spanish].
Instructions, dated Sep. 18, 2014, for Response, filed Sep. 22, 2014, to Final Office Action, dated May 20. 2014, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 17 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Japanese].
Instructions, dated Sep. 18, 2014, for Response, filed Sep. 22, 2014, to Final Office Action, issued May 20, 2014, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 17 pages [English language instructions and document, as filed, in Japanese].
Instructions, dated Sep. 24, 2013, for response to Office Action, dated Mar. 29, 2013, in connection with corresponding Taiwan Patent Application No. 098108166, 22 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 24, 2013, for response to Office Action, issued Mar. 29, 2013, in connection with corresponding Taiwan Patent Application No. 098108166, 22 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 25, 2013, for response to Office Action, dated Apr. 2, 2013, in connection with corresponding Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 16 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 25, 2013, for response to Office Action, dated May 15, 2013, in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9, 17 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 25, 2013, for response to Office Action, issued Apr. 2, 2013, in connection with corresponding Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 16 pages.
Instructions, dated Sep. 25, 2013, for response to Office Action, issued May 15, 2013, in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9, 17 pages.
International Preliminary Report on Patentability, dated Mar. 2, 2012, in connection with international Application No. PCT/US2010/002545, 26 pages.
International Prelimnary Report on Patentability dated Jun. 8, 2010, in connection with corresponding International Patent Application No. PCT/US2009/001670.
International Prelimnary Report on Patentability issued Jun. 8, 2010, in connection with corresponding International Patent Application No. PCT/US2009/001670.
International Search Report and Written Opinion, dated Oct. 13, 2011, in connection with International Patent Application No. PCT/US2010/002545 (3088PC), 17 pages.
International Search Report, issued Aug. 31, 2009, in connection with corresponding International Patent Application No. PCT/US2009/001670.
Ito et al., "Cultivation of hepatitis C virus in primary hepatocyte culture from patients with chronic hepatitis C results in release of high titre infectious virus," J. Gen. Virol., 77:1043-1054 (1996).
IUPAC, "IUPAC-IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature. A one-letter notation for amino acid sequences. Tentative rules," J. Biol. Chem. 243:3557-3559 (1968).
IUPAC-IUB, "Abbreviated nomenclature of synthetic poypeptidespolymerized amino acids-revised recommendations," Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature, Biochemistry 11:1726-1731 (1972).
Jay et al., "Construction ofa general vector for efficient expression of mammalian proteins in bacteria: use of a synthetic ribosome binding site," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, USA 78:5543-5548 (1981).
Jefferies 2010 Global life science conference call, Jun. 8, 2010, wsw.com/webcast/jeff46/hzym (transcript) [7 pages].
Jefferies Investor Presentation "Matrix Therapies for Life" New York, Jun. 17, 2009 [30 pages].
Jiang et al, "Effects of Recombinant Human PH20 (rHuPH20) on Interstitial Matrices: Creating a Favorable Environment for The Delivery of Cytostatic Agents," American Association for Cancer Research Annual Meeting, 2005, Anaheim, CA, 1 page.
Jiang et al., "Reduction of ischemic stroke mortality with chronic intravenous recombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPH20): effects of pharmacokinetic optimization," American Neurological Association Annual Meeting, 2005, San Diego, CA, 6 pages.
Kazatchkine, M. and S. Kaveri, "Immunomodulation of Autoimmune and Inflammatory Diseases with Intravenous Immune Globulin," Mackay and Rosen eds., N. Engl. J. Med. 345(10):747-755 (2001).
Keller et al., "Pharmacokinetic, Pharmacodynamic and Toxicologic Effects of a Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (rHuPH20) in Rodent and Non-Human Primate models," Hyaluronan (ISHAS) 2007, Charleston, SC, 1 page.
Keller et al., "Pharmacokinetic, Pharmacodynamic and Toxicologic Effects of a Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (rHuPH20) in Rodent and Non-Human Primate models," Hyaluronan (ISHAS) 2007, Charleston, SC, 2 pages.
Kelsey et al., "Species- and tissue-specific expression of human alpha 1-antitrypsin in transgenic mice," Genes And Devel. 1:161-171 (1987).
Kim et al., "An autoimmune animal model of the Lambert-Eaton syndrome," Annals NY Acad Sci 841:670-676 (1998).
Ko et al., "Clinical Review Memorandum: BLA STN 125105/708, Baxter's Immune Globulin Infusion (Human) 10%, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200 and 300 mL Solutions for Subcutaneous Administration," Prepared Feb. 21, 2010. Retrieved from the Internet at http://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&frm=1&source=web&cd=3&ved=0CDMQFjAC&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.fda.gov%2Fdownloads%2FBiologicsBloodVaccines%2FBloodBloodProducts%2FApprovedProducts%2FLicensedProductsBLAs%2FFractionatedPlasmaProducts%2FUCM275415.pdf&ei=jD-vU0v9D8LX2AXNmICYCQ&usg=AFQjCNG5hbn36PZ5ifK_5xhiBdqQmSFwIQ [Retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], 39 pages.
Ko et al., "Clinical Review Memorandum: BLA STN 125105/708, Baxter's Immune Globulin Infusion (Human) 10%, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200 and 300 mL Solutions for Subcutaneous Administration," Prepared Feb. 21, 2010. Retrieved from the Internet at http://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&frm=1&source=web&cd=3&ved=0CDMQFjAC&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.fda.gov%2Fdownloads%2FBiologicsBloodVaccines%2FBloodBloodProducts%2FApprovedProducts%2FLicensedProductsBLAs%2FFractionatedPlasmaProducts%2FUCM275415.pdf&ei=jD-vUov9D8LX2AXNmICYCQ&usg=AFQjCNG5hbn36PZ5ifK_5xhiBdqQmSFwIQ [Retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], 39 pages.
Koblet et al., "Turnover of standard-gammaglobulin, pH-4-Gammaglobulin and pepsin desaggregated Gammaglobulin and clinical implications," Vox Sang. 13(1):93-102 (1967).
Kollias et al., "Regulated expression of human a gamma-, beta-, and hybrid gamma beta-globin genes in transgenic mice: manipulation of the developmental expression patterns," Cell 46:89-94 (1986).
Kriel et al., "Hyaluronidases—a group of neglected enzymes," Protein Science 4:1666-1669 (1995).
Kummer et al., "Expression of human recombinant granzyme A zymogen and its activation by the cysteine proteinase cathepsin C," J Biol. Chem. 271:9281-9286 (1996).
Kundu et al., "Dispersion of the Cumulus Matrix with a Highly Purified Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (rHuPH20)," Hyaluronan Meeting, 2003, Cleveland, OH. [1 page].
Kundu et al., "Dispersion of the Cumulus Matrix with a Highly Purified Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (rHuPH20)," Hyaluronan Meeting, 2003, Cleveland, OH. 2 pages.
Lalancette et al, "Characterization of an 80-kilodalton bull sperm protein identified as PH-20," Biol Reprod. 65(2):628-636 (2001).
Lathrop et al., "cDNA cloning reveals the molecular structure of a sperm surface protein, PH-20, involved in sperm-egg adhesion and the wide distribution of its gene among mammals," J Cell Biol. 111(6 Pt 2):2939-2949 (1990).
Leder et al., "Consequences of widespread deregulation of the c-myc gene in transgenic mice: multiple neoplasms and normal development," Cell 45:485-495 (1986).
Lee et al "Subcutaneous immunoglobulin administration using recombinant human hyaluronidase: a novel approach for the treatment of peripheral neuropathies in children," abstract for the xIth world congress of ICNC Cairo May 2-7, 2010. Retrieved from the Intenet:<URL: icnc2010.org/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=163&Itemid=9, [retrieved on Jul. 12, 2010] [1 page].
Lee et al."Subcutaneous immunoglobulin administration using recombinant human hyaluronidase: a novel approach for the treatment of peripheral neuropathies in children," abstract for the xIth world congress of ICNC Cairo May 2-7, 2010. Retrieved from the Internet:<URL: icnc2010.org/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=163&Itemid=9, [retrieved on Jul. 12, 2010] [1 page].
Leesch et al., "30-day pharmacokinetic evaluation of IV versus subcutaneous administration of immunoglobulin with and without recombinant human hyaluronidase in dogs," J Allergy and Clin Immunol 123(2, Suppl. S):S10 (2009), Abstract, 1 page.
Leesch et al., "30-Day Pharmacokinetic Evaluation of IV versus Subcutaneous Administration of Immunoglobulin with and without Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase in Dogs," Journal of Allergy and Clinical Immunology 123(2):Supp1. S, p. s10 (2009) and 65th annual meeting of the american academy of allergy asthma and immunology; washington DC, Mar. 13-17, 2009.
Leesch et al., "30-Day Pharmacokinetic Evaluation of IV versus Subcutaneous Administration of Immunoglobulin with and without Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase in Dogs," Journal of Allergy and Clinical Immunology 123(2):Suppl. S, p. s10 (2009) and 65th annual meeting of the american academy of allergy asthma and immunology; washington DC, Mar. 13-17, 2009.
Leesch et al., "30-day pharmacokinetic evaluation of IV versus subcutaneous administration of inuriunoglobulin with and without recombinant human hyaluronidase in dogs," J Allergy and Clin Immunol 123(2, Suppl. S):S10 (2009), Abstract, 1 page.
Leibl et al. "Efficacy and Safety of a New Intravenous Immunoglobulin in Adult Subjects with Chronic Idiopathic Thrombocytopenia Purpura," Blood (ASH Annual Meeting Abstracts) 2005 106:Abstract 3984, 2 pages (2005).
Leibl et al. "Efficacy and Safety of a New Intravenous Immunoglobulin in Adult Subjects with Chronic Idiopathic Thrombocytopenic Purpura," Blood (ASH Annual Meeting Abstracts) 2005 106:Abstract 3984. 2 pages (2005).
Leibl et al., "Multiple infusions of human intravenous immunoglobulin in chimpanzees do not lead to immune elimination," Clin. Exp. Immunol. 81:454-458 (1990).
Letter, dated Apr. 13, 2016, reporting a Notice of Allowance issued in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 1 page.
Letter, dated Aug. 5, 2015, reporting Certificate of Grant, published Jul. 1, 2015, in connection with Taiwan Patent Application No. 098108166 [English letter and Certificate of Grant], 5 pages.
Letter, dated Feb. 17, 2016, reporting Decision to Grant, dated Feb. 16, 2016, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English letter and original document in Japanese], 4 pages.
Letter, dated Feb. 17, 2016, reporting Decision to Grant, issued Feb. 16, 2016, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English letter and original document in Japanese], 4 pages.
Letter, dated Feb. 19, 2016, reporting Allowance of Patent Application- issued in connection with Taiwanese Patent Application No. 102142761 [English letter], 2 pages.
Letter, dated Mar. 31, 2016, reporting Decision to Grant, dated Mar. 23, 2016, in connection with Eurasian Patent Application No. 201200490 [English letter and document as issued in Russian], 9 pages.
Letter, dated Mar. 31, 2016, reporting Decision to Grant, issued Mar. 23, 2016, in connection with Eurasian Patent Application No. 201200490 [English letter and document as issued in Russian], 9 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, dated Feb. 17, 2012, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclo- sure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith on Sep. 9, 2016, 4 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above- referenced application, dated Dec. 17, 2013, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, dated May 16, 2014, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, dated Sep. 10, 2012, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, dated Sep. 11, 2012, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed Aug. 20, 2014, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Apr. 27, 2015, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Aug. 12, 2015, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Aug. 31, 2017, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Dec. 13, 2018, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Dec. 14, 2017, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Dec. 27, 2017, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Jan. 15, 2019, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Jan. 23, 2017, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Nov. 10, 2015, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Oct. 25, 2017, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith on May 10, 2017, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Sep. 22, 2015, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, mailed on the same date herewith, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, mailed the same day herewith. 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced applicatoin, dated Dec. 17, 2013, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure of the Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the abovevreferenced application, filed herewith Dec. 13, 2018, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure ofthe Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Jun. 3, 2016, 2 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure ofthe Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith Jun. 30, 2015, 3 pages.
Letter/Written Disclosure ofthe Supplemental Information Disclosure Statement for the above-referenced application, filed herewith on Aug. 23, 2018, 2 pages.
Li et al., "Irradiation-induced expression ofhyaluronan (HA) synthase 2 and hyaluronidase 2 genes in rat lung tissue accompanies active turnover of HA and induction of types I and III collagen gene expression," Am. J. Respir. Cell Mol. Biol. 23:411-418 (2000).
Lim et al "Matrix Therapies for life" 28th Annual JP Morgan Healthcare Conference San Francisco Jan. 13, 2010, 42 pages.
Lin et al., "Molecular cloning of the human and monkey sperm surface protein PH-20," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:10071-10075 (1993).
Lloyd, J., "Gammagard therapy offers hope for Alzheimer's patients, " USA Today. Published on Jan. 17, 2012 [Retrieved on Dec. 17, 2012] Retrieved from the Internet: URL:usatoday30.usatoday.com/news/health/story/2012-07-16/alzheimers-treatment-gammagard/56270084/1 [6 pages].
Lloyd, J., "Gammagard therapy offers hope for Alzheimer's patients," USA Today. Published on Jul. 17, 2012 [Retrieved on Dec. 17, 2012] Retrieved from the Internet: URL:usatoday30,usatoday.com/news/health/story/2012-07-16/alzheimers-treatment-gammagard/56270084/1 [6 pages].
Louie et al., "Inactivation of Hepatitis C Virus in low pH intravenous immunoglobulin," Biologicals 22:13-19 (1994).
Lu, H. and E, Wimmer., "Poliovirus chimeras replicating under the translational control of genetic elements of hepatitis C virus reveal unusual properties of the internal ribosomal entry site of hepatitis C virus," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:1412-1417 (1996).
Lu, Y. and A. Felix, "Pegylated peptides I: Solid-phase synthesis of N alpha-pegylated peptides using Fmoc strategy," Peptide Res 6:140-146 (1993).
Lu, Y. and A. Felix, "Pegylated peptides. II. Solid-phase synthesis of amino-, carboxy- and side-chain pegylated peptides," Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 43: 127-138 (1994).
Macdonald, R., "Expression of the pancreatic elastase I gene in transgenic mice," Hepatology 7:42S-51S (1987).
Magram et al., "Developmental regulation of a cloned adult beta-globin gene in transgenic mice," Nature 315(6017):338-340 (1985).
Mammalian Gene Collection (MGC) Program Team, "Generation and initial analysis of more than 15,000 full-length human and mouse cDNA sequences," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 99:16899-16903 (2002).
Marcus, D., "A study ofthe mechanism of the anticomplementary activity of gamma-globulin," J. Immunol. 84:273-284 (1960).
Mason et al., "The hypogonadal mouse: reproductive functions restored by gene therapy," Science 234:1372-1378 (1986).
Mayer, M., "Quantitative C' fixation analysis, complement and complement fixation," in Experimental Immunochemistry Eds, Kabat, E. and M. Meyer, Thomas, Springfield, II., pp. 214-216 and pp. 227-228 (1961).
McCoy et al. "Pharmacokinetics of 10% Immunoglobulin Administered Intravenously or Subcutaneously Alone of Following Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase in Subjects with PID," Retrieved from the Internet<URL: baxter.com/downloads/press_room/press_releases/2010/BAXTER_HyQ_PK_ESID_10_2010.PDF, [retrieved on Oct. 29, 2010] [1 page].
McCoy et al., "Pharmacokinetics of 10% immunoglobulin administered intravenously or subcutaneously alone or following recombinant human hyaluronidase in subjects with PID," XIVth Meeting of the European Society for Immunodeficienies (ESID) Istanbul, Turkey Oct. 6-10, 2010. Poster, 1 page.
Melamed et al. (The Journal of Allergy and Clinical Immunology 121(2), supplement 1: S83, Feb. 2008). *
Melamed et al., "Long-term safety and pharmacokinetics of facilitated subcutaneous infusion of immuneglobulin (HUMAN) 10% and recombinant human hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a phase III extension study in patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI)" Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunolgy Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference, Chicago, IL, Abstract, 1 page.
Melamed et al., "Recombinant human hyaluronidase facilitates dispersion of subcutaneously administered gammagard liquid and enables administration of a full monthly dose in a single site to patients with immunodeficiency diseases," Am Acad Allergy Asthma Immunol Poster 2008 Philadelphia, PA, and Abstract #3204, 2 pages. (2008).
Melamed et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase Facilitates Dispersion of Subcutaneously Administered Gammagard Liquid and Enables Administration of a Full Monthly Dose in a Single Site to Patients with Immunodeficiency Diseases," Am Acad Allergy Asthma Immunol; Philadelphia, PA., Mar. 16, 2008, [6 pages].
Melamed et al., "Recombinant human hyaluronidase facilitates dispersion of subcutaneously administered gammagard liquid and enables administration of a full monthly dose in a single site to patients with immunodeficiency diseases," J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008), Abstract, 1 page.
Melamed et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase Facilitates Dispersion of Subcutaneously Administered Gammagard Liquid and Enables Administration of a Full Monthly Dose in a Single Site to Patients with Immunodeficiency Diseases," J Allergy Clin Immunol. 121(2):Suppl.1, page S83 (2008) [1 page].
Melamed et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase Facilitates Dispersion of Subcutaneously Administered Gammagard Liquid and Enables Administration ofa Full Monthly Dose in a Single Site to Patients with Immunodeficiency Diseases," J Allergy Clin Immunol. 121(2):Suppl.1, p. S83 (2008) [1 page].
Menzel, E. and C. Farr, "Hyaluronidase and its substrate hyaluronan: biochemistry, biological activities and therapeutic uses," Cancer Lett. 131:3-11 (2003).
Meyer et al., "The soluble hyaluronidase from bull testes is a fragment of the membrane-bound PH-20 enzyme," FEBS Letters 413(2):385-388 (1997).
Misbah et al., "Subcutaneous immunoglobin: opportunities and outlook," J Trans1 Immunol 158 (Suppl. 1):51-59 (2009) and available on-line Oct. 30, 2009.
Misbah et al., "Subcutaneous immunoglobin: opportunities and outlook." J Transl Immunol 158 (Suppl. 1):51-59 (2009) and available on-line Oct. 30, 2009.
Mizutani et al., "Characterization of hepatitis C virus replication in cloned cells obtained from a human T-cell leukemia virus type 1-infected cell line, MT-2," J. Virol. 70:7219-7223 (1996).
Mizutani et al., "Inhibition of hepatitis C virus replication by antisense oligonucleotide in culture cells,"Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 212:906-911 (1995).
Mizutani et al., "Long-term human T-cell culture system supporting hepatitis C virus replication," Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 227:822-826 (1996).
Modena et al., "Hyaluronidase-injectable microparticles intended for the treatment of extravasation," J. Microencapsulation, 15(1):85- 92 (1998).
Molineux, G., "Pegylation: engineering improved biopharmaceuticals for oncology," Pharmacotherapy 23 (8 Pt 2):3S-8S (2003).
Moon et al., "Limited growth of severed CNS axons after treatment of adult rat brain with hyaluronidase," J Neurosci Res 71(1):23-37 (2003).
Mouthon et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulins in autoimmune- or paroviius B19-mediated pure red cell aplasia," Autoimmunity Reviews 4(5):264-269 (2005).
Mouthon et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulins in autoimmune- or parovirus B19-mediated pure red cell aplasia," Autoimmunity Reviews 4(5):264-269 (2005).
Muckenschnabel et al., "Hyaluronidase pretreatment produces selective melphalan enrichment in malignant melanoma implanted in nude mice," Cancer Chemother Pharmacol 38(1):88-94 (1996).
Muckenschnabel et al., "Pharmacokinetics and tissue distribution of bovine testicular hyaluronidase and Vinblastine in mice: an attempt to optimize the mode of adjuvant hyaluronidase administration in cancer chemotherapy," Cancer Lett 131:71-84 (1998).
Nagy et al., "Prospective, randomized study on bovine and recombinant human (Cumulase®) Hyaluronidases," American Society of Reproductive Medicine, 2006, New Orleans, LA, 06-A-886-ASRM. [2 pages].
Needleman, S. and C. Wunsch "A general method applicable to the search for similarities in the amino acid sequence of two proteins," J Mol Biol. 48:443-453 (1970).
New Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Reports Fourth Quarter and Year End 2008 Financial Results, Mar. 13, 2009, retrieved from: www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000129993309001189/exhibit1.htm [retrieved on Mar. 30, 2010].
New Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Reports Fourth Quarter and Year End 2008 Financial Results, Mar. 13, 2009, retrieved from: www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000129993309001189/exhibitl.htm [retrieved on Mar. 30, 2010].
News Release, "Baxter And Halozyme Announce Positive Opinion For HyQvia For Treatment Of Primary And Secondary Immunodeficiencies In The European Union," published Mar. 22, 2013 [online][Retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Baxter-And-Halozyme-Announce-Positive-Opinion-For-HyQvia-For-Treatment-Of-Primary-And-Secondary-Immunodeficiencies-In-The-European-Union/defaultaspx, 3 pages.
News Release, "Baxter and Halozyme announce top-line results of phase III study of HyQ in patients with primary immunodeficiency," Published on Jul. 8, 2011 [online][retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:baxter.com/downloads/press_room/press_releases/2011/07_08_11_hyq.pdf [3 pages].
News Release, "Baxter launches HYQVIA in the United States for adult Patients with primary immunodeficiency," Published Oct. 20, 2014 [online] [retrieved on Nov. 11, 2014] Retrieved from:<URL:http://www.halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2014/Baxter-Launches-HYQVIA-in-the-United-States-for-Adult-Patients-with-Primary-Immunodeficiency/default.aspx [4 pages].
News Release, "Baxter presents data from interim analyses of phase III clinical trial HyQ at European Society for Immunodeficiencies meeting," Published on Oct. 6, 2010 [online][retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL:baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2010/10_06_10_hyq.html [5 pages].
News Release, "Baxter presents data from interim analyses of phase III clinical trial of HyQ at European Society for Immunodeficiencies meeting," Published on Oct. 6, 2010 [online] [retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2010/10_06_10_hyq.html [5 pages].
News Release, "Baxter Presents Data from Interim Analyses of Phase III Clinical Trial of HyQ at European Society for Immunodeficiencies Meeting" Oct. 6, 2010, Retrieved from the Internet:<URL: finance.yahoo.com/news/Baxter-Presents-Data-from-bw-3233016796.html?x=0, [retrieved on Oct. 6, 2010] [3 pages].
News Release, "Baxter presents long-term data on HyQ during AAAAI annual meeting," Published on Mar, 2, 2012 [online][retrieved on Nov. 6, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:http://www.baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2012/03_02_12_hyq.html, 2 pages.
News Release, "Baxter presents phase III HyQ efficacy and tolerability data at American College of Allergy, Asthma & Immunology meeting," Published on Jul. 11, 2011 [online][retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2011/11_07_11_hyq_acaai.html [3 pages].
News Release, "Baxter Receives Marketing Authorization for HyQvia in European Union," May 21, 2013 [online][retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], Retrieved from: <URL: halozyme,com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Baxter-Receives-Marketing-Authorization-for-HyQvia-in-European-Union/defaultraspx, 4 pages.
News Release, "Baxter Receives Marketing Authorization for HyQvia in European Union," May 21, 2013 [online][retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], Retrieved from: <URL: halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Baxter-Receives-Marketing-Authorization-for-HyQvia-in-European-Union/default.aspx, 4 pages.
News Release, "Baxter Submits Amended BLA to U.S. FDA for HyQvia for Primary Immunodeficiency," Dec. 2, 2013 [online] [retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], Retrieved from: <URL: halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Baxter-Submits-Amended-BLA-to-US-FDA-for-HyQvia-for-Primary-Immunodeficiency/default.aspx, 3 page.
News Release, "Baxter Submits Amended BLA to U.S. FDA for HyQvia for Primary Immunodeficiency," Dec. 2, 2013 [online][retrieved on Dec. 16, 2013], Retrieved from: <URL: halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Baxter-Submjts-Amended-BLA-t0-US-FDA-for-HyQvia-for-Prunary-Immunodeficiency/defaulti.aspx, 3 page.
News Release, "Bristol, Roche tap Halozyme for tech platform," Published Sep. 14, 2017 [online] Retrieved from:<URL: biopharmadive.com/news/bristol-roche-tap-halozyme-for-tech-platform/504958/ [retrieved on Sep, 18, 2017], 3 pages.
News Release, "Bristol-Myers Squibb and Halozyme Enter Global Collaboration and License Agreement for ENHANZE Technology," Published Sep. 14. 2017 [online] Retrieved from:<URL: halozyme.com/investors/news-releases/news-release-details/2017/Bristol-Myers-Squibb-and-Halozyme-Enter-Global-Collaboration-and-License-Agreement-for-ENHANZE-Technology/defaultaspx [retrieved on Sep. 14, 2017], 7 pages.
News Release, "Data Presented at AAAAI reinforce Baxter's commitment to making Gammagard Liquid Therapy more convenient," Published on Mar. 16, 2009 [online][retrieved on Nov. 30, 2011] Retrieved from:<URL:baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2009/03_16_09 aaaai.html [5 pages].
News Release, "Enhaze draws BMS and Roche money; Halozyme could receive $2B+," Published Sep. 14, 2017 [online] Retrieved from:<URL: bioworld.com/content/enhanze-draws-bms-and-roche-money-halozyme-could-receive-2b [retrieved on Sep. 18, 2017], 2 pages.
News Release, "ENHAZE draws EMS and Roche money; Halozyme could receive $2B+," Published Sep. 14, 2017 [online] Retrieved from:<URL: bioworld.com/content/enhanze-draws-bms-and-roche-money-halozyme-could-receive-2b [retrieved on Sep. 18, 2017], 2 pages.
News Release, "FDA advisory committee panel provides favorable recommendation on Baxter's HyQvia for primary immunodeficiency," published Jul. 31, 2014 [retrieved on Sep. 2, 2014] Retrieved from:<URL:online.wsj.com/article/PR-CO-20140731-915905. html#printMode [2 pages].
News Release, "Halozyme Announced Roche Filed A Marketing Authorization Application For Subcutaneous MabThera,"Published Dec. 8, 2012 [online][Retrieved Jan. 3, 2013] Retrieved from the Internet: URL:http://halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2012/Halozyme-Announced-Roche-Filed-A-Marketing-Authorization-Application-For-Subcutaneous-MabThera1132247/default.aspx, 2 pages.
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics Announces Implementation of Development Focused Strategy," Oct. 11, 2010, San Diego, CA, Retrieved from the Internet: phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=ir0l-newsArticle&ID=1481205&highlight=, (accessed Nov. 19, 2010; 3 pages).
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics Announces Implementation of Development Focused Strategy," Oct. 11, 2010, San Diego, CA, Retrieved from the Internet: phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle&ID=1481205&highlight=, (accessed Nov. 19, 2010; 3 pages).
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics Awarded Four Qualifying Therapeutic Discovery Project Grants," Nov. 4, 2010, San Diego, CA, Retrieved from the Internet: phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle&ID=1491739&highlight=, (accessed Nov. 19, 2010; 2 pages).
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Second Quarter 2010 Financial Results Conference Call Transcript," Aug. 6, 2010, 16 pages.
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Second Quarter 2010 Financial Results Conference Call Transcript," Moderator: Uhl, R., Aug. 6. 2010, (accessed Sep. 3, 2010; 16 pages).
News Release, "Halozyme Therapeutics to present at the 31st Annual J.P. Morgan Healthcare Conference,"Published Jan, 3, 2013 [online][Retrieved Jan. 17, 2013]Retrieved from:<URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2013/Halozyme-Therapeutics-to-Present-at-the-31st-Annual-JP-Morgan-Healthcare-Conference1132508/default.aspx, 2 pages.
News Release, "Halzoyme Therapeutics Reports Third Quarter 2010 Financial Results." San Diego, CA Nov. 5, 2010, Retrieved from the Internet:<URL: phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle&ID=1492590&highlight=, Retrieved on Jun. 7, 2011, 5 pages.
News Release, "KIOVIG, Baxter's New IVIG Product Received Unanimous Positive Opinion in Europe as Replacement Therapy for Immunodeficiencies and for Immunomodulation in ImmuneMediated Diseases," Nov. 22, 2005, Retrieved from the Internet: <URL: baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2005/11-23-05-kiovig.html, (accessed Oct. 20, 2010; 4 pages).
News Release, "Phase III trial begins for Gammagard Liquid Plus rHuPH20 in primary immunodeficiency patients," Published on Jan. 5, 2009 [online][retrieved on Jan. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:baxter.com/press_room/press_releases/2009/01_05_09_halozyme.html [4 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., "Baxter and Halozyme Provide Update on HyQ Biologics License Application," Published on Apr. 16, 12 [online] [retrieved on Jul. 27, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL:finance.yahoo.com/news/baxter-halozyme-hyq-biologics-license-120000974.html [2 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., "Baxter and Halozyme Provide Update on HyQ Biologics License Application," Published on Apr. 16. 2012 [online][retrieved on Jul. 27, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL:finance.yahoo.com/news/baxter-halozyme-hyq-biologics-license-120000974.html [2 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., "Baxter Announces FDA Approval for GAMMAGARD Liquid as a Treatment for Multifocal Motor Neuropathy," Published on Jun. 25, 2012 [online][retrieved on Jul. 27, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL: finance.yahoo.com/news/baxter-announces-fda-approval-gammagard-130000672.html [3 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., "Baxter Presents Phase III HyQ Efficacy and Tolerability Data at American College of Allergy, Asthma & Immunology Meeting,"Published 2012 [online] [retrieved on Jul. 27, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL:fiercebiotech.com/press-releases/baxter-presents-phase-iii-HyQ-efficacy-and-tolerability-data-American-colle [4 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., "Baxter shares fall on news of FDA delay: Regulator requests more long-term data before approving HyQ immune system treatment," Chicago Tribune. Published Apr. 16, 2012 [online][retrieved on Jul, 27, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL: articles.chicagotribune.com/2012-04-16/business/ct-biz-0417-baxter-20120416_1_baxter-shares-gammagard-baxter-stock [2 pages].
News Release, Baxter International Inc., Baxter Gets FDA Nod for Gammagard, Published on Jun. 27, 2012 [online][retrieved on Jul. 27, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL: finance.yahoo.com/news/baxter-gets-fda-nod-gammagard-181520622.html [3 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc. Q4 2007 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/68609-halozyme-therapeutics-q4-2007-earnings-call-transcript [accessed on Jun. 24, 2009] [12 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Baxter Presents Latest Clinical Trial Results of Gammagard Liquid Administered Subcutaneously," Philadelphia, PA, Mar, 16, 2008, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=1120341&highlight=(accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 4 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Data Presented at AAAAI Reinforce Baxter's Commitment to Making Gammagard Liquid Therapy More Convenient" Deerfield I1, Mar. 16, 2009, http://www.businesswire.com/portal/site/google/?ndmViewId=newsview&newsId=20090316005731&newsLang=en [16 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Data Presented at AAAAI Reinforce Baxter's Commitment to Making Gammagard Liquid Therapy More Convenient" Deerfield Il, Mar. 16, 2009, http://www.businesswire.com/portal/site/google/?ndmViewId=news_view&newsId=20090316005731&newsLang=en. [16 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "First Quarter 2010 Financial Results Conference Call," May 7, 2010. Retrieved from the Internet<URL: phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c:175436&p=irol-newsArticle_print&ID=142401, [retrieved on Jun. 1, 2010] [4 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Fourth Quarter and Full Year 2010 Conference Call Transcript," published Mar, 11, 2011, Retrieved from the Internet<URL: phx.corporate-ir.net/External.File?item=UGFyZW50SUQ9NDE5MjUyfENoaWxkSUQ9NDMyNDcwfFR5cGU9MQ==&t=1, Retrieved on Apr. 7, 2011, 18 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme and Baxter Announce Availability of Hylenex for Subcutaneous Delivery of Medications and Fluids," San Diego, CA, Jun. 27, 2006, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=876530&highlight=(accessed Jan, 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics and Baxter Healthcare Corporation Announce FDA Approval of Hylenex," San Diego, CA, and Deerfield, IL, Dec. 5, 2005, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=792608&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics and Baxter Healthcare Corporation Sign Exclusive Sales and Marketing Agreement for Halozyme's Investigational Therapeutic, Enhanze SC," Aug, 16, 2004, retrieved from the Internet:<URL: sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000095013704006885/a01296exv99wl.txt, [retrieved on Mar. 29, 2010] [2 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics and Baxter Healthcare Corporation Sign Exclusive Sales and Marketing Agreement for Halozyme's Investigational Therapeutic, Enhanze SC," Aug. 16, 2004, retrieved from the Internet:<URL: sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000095013704006885/a01296exv99w1.txt, [retrieved on Mar. 29, 2010] [2 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics and Baxter Release Results From the INFUSE-LR Study," San Diego, CA, and Deerfield, IL, Feb. 8, 2006, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=814561&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 4 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Announces FDA Acceptance of Hylenex NDA,"San Diego, CA, May 26, 2005, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=714327&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Announces Roche Begins Phase 1 Clinical Trial and Selects Fourth Exclusive Biologic Target," San Diego, CA, Dec. 8, 2008, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol- newsArticle_Print&ID=1233454&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 09), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Announces Roche Begins Phase I Clinical Trial and Selects Fourth Exclusive Biologic Target," San Diego, CA, Dec. 8, 2008, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=1233454&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Completes Enrollment of Enhanze Technology Clinical Trial to Improve the Subcutaneous Absorption of a Large Protein Molecule Therapeutic," San Diego, CA, Nov. 27, 2006, http://phx.corporate- ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=935824&highlight= (accessed Jan, 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Completes Enrollment of INFUSE-LR, a Hylenex Clinical Trial of Subcutaneous Hydration," San Diego, CA, Jan. 24, 2006, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=807598&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Files NDA for Enhanze SC," San Diego, CA, Mar. 28, 2005, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=689194&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Files NDA for Enhanze SC," San Diego, CA, Mar. 28, 2005, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenixi.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=689194&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Initiates First Enhanze Technology Clinical Trial to Improve the Subcutaneous Absorption of a Large Molecule Protein Therapeutic," San Diego, CA, Aug. 8, 2006, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=893361&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Initiates Hylenex Clinical Trial of Subcutaneous Hydration," San Diego, CA, Dec. 15, 2005, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=796125&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 2 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Releases Results of Enhanze Technology Clinical Trial to Improve the Subcutaneous Absorption of a Large Protein Molecule Therapeutic," San Diego, CA, Jan. 22, 2007, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p-irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=952285&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Releases Results of Enhanze Technology Clinical Trial to Improve the Subcutaneous Absorption of a Large Protein Molecule Therapeutic," San Diego, CA, Jan. 22, 2007, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=l75436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=952285&highlight= (accessed Jan, 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Reports 2008 Second Quarter Financial Results" Aug. 8, 2008, retrieved from the Internet:<URL: sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000129993308003838/exhibit1.htm, [retrieved on Mar. 31, 2010] [5 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Reports 2008 Second Quarter Financial Results"Aug. 8, 2008, retrieved from the Internet:<URL: sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000129993308003838/exhibit.htm, [retrieved on Mar. 31, 2010] [5 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Halozyme Therapeutics Reports Second Quarter 2009 Financial Results" Aug. 7, 2009, retrieved from the Internet:<URL: www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1159036/000129993309003275/exhibit1.htm, [retrieved on Mar. 30, 2010] [5 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Phase III Trial Begins for Gammagard Liquid Plus rHuPH20 in Primary Immunodeficiency Patients," San Diego, CA, Jan. 5, 2009, http://phx.corporate-ir.net/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=1240232&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., "Phase III Trial Begins for Gammagard Liquid Plus rHuPHZO in Primary Immunodeficiency Patients," San Diego, CA, Jan. 5, 2009, hup://phx.corporate-innet/phoenix.zhtml?c=175436&p=irol-newsArticle_Print&ID=1240232&highlight= (accessed Jan. 6, 2009), 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q1 2008 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/76655-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q1-2008-earnings-call-transcript [accessed on Jun. 25, 09] [14 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q1 2008 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/76655-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q1-2008-earnings-call-transcript [accessed on Jun. 25, 2009] [14 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q3 2008 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/106797-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q3-2008-earnings-call-transcript?page=-1 [accessed on Nov. 6, 2009] [9 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q3 2009 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/171883-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q3-2009-earnings-call-transcript?page=-1 [accessed on Nov. 6, 2009] [11 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q3 2009 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seeldngalpha.com/article/171883-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q3-2009-earnings-call-transcript?page=-1 [accessed on Nov. 6, 2009] [11 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q4 2008 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/125929-balozyme-therapeutics-inc-q4-2008-earnings-call-transcript [accessed on May 13, 2009] [12 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics Inc., Q4 2008 Earnings Call Transcript found at: http://seekingalpha.com/article/125929-halozyme-therapeutics-inc-q4-2008-earnings-call-transcript [accessed on May 13, 2009] [12 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc, "Halozyme announces Roche marketing authorization for MabThera SC for patients with common forms of non-hodgkin lymphoma in European Union," Published Mar. 28, 2014 [online], Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2014/Halozyme-Announces-Roche-Marketing-Authorization-For-MabThera-SC-For-Patients-With-Cornmon-Forms-Of-Non-Hodgkin-Lymphoma-In-European-Union/default.aspx [retrieved on Mar. 31, 2014] 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme Announces First Clinical Dosing Of Janssen's Daratumumab Using ENHANZE™ Technology," Published Nov. 4, 2015 [online], Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2015/Halozyme-Announces-First-Clinical-Dosing-Of-Janssens-Daratumumab-Using-ENHANZE-Technology/default.aspx [retrieved on Nov. 5, 2015], 3 pages.
News release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme announces preclinical data presentations at the Association Of Cancer Research Annual Meeting," Published on Apr. 8, 2014 [on line][retrieved on Apr. 14, 2014] Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2014/Halozyme-Announces-Preclinical-Data-Presentations-At-The-Association-Of-Cancer-Research-Annual-Meeting/default.aspx [3 pages].
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme announces Roche marketing authorization for MabThera SC for patients with common forms of non-hodgkin lymphoma in European Union," Published Mar. 28, 2014 [online], Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2014/Halozyme-Announces-Roche-Marketing-Authorization-For-MabThera-SC-For-Patients-With-Common-Forms-Of-Non-Hodgkin-Lymphoma-In-European-Union/default.aspx [retrieved on Mar. 31, 2014] 3 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme Confirms Baxter Has Received a Complete Response Letter For HyQ BLA," Published Aug. 1, 2012 [online][retrieved on Dec 17, 2012]Retrieved from: <URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2012/Halozyme-Confirms-Baxter-Has-Received-A-Complete-Response-Letter-For-HyQ-BLA1130436/default.aspx, 3 page.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme Reports Second Quarter 2016 Financial Results," Published Aug. 9, 2016 [online], Retrieved from: <URL:pmewswire.com/news-releases/halozyme-reports-second-quarter-2016-financial-results-300311374.html [retrieved on Aug, 31, 2016], 10 pages.
News Release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme Reports Second Quarter 2016 Financial Results," Published Aug. 9, 2016 [online], Retrieved from: <URL:prnewswire.com/news-releases/halozyme-reports-second-quarter-2016-financial-results-300311374.html [retrieved on Aug. 31, 2016], 10 pages.
News release, Halozyme Therapeutics, Inc., "Halozyme therapeutics reports selection of first product candidate under Janssen Collaboration," Published on Mar. 10, 2015 [online][retrieved on Mar. 10, 2015] Retrieved from:<URL:halozyme.com/Investors/News-Releases/News-Release-Details/2015/Halozyme-Therapeutics-Reports-Selection-Of-First-Product-Candidate-Under-Janssen-Collaboration/default.aspx [3 pages].
News Release: Baxter International Inc., "Baxter presents latest clinical trial results of Gammagard Liquid administered subcutaneously," Rx Times, published Mar. 16, 2008, Retrieved from the Internet:<URL: rxtimes.com/baxter-presents-latest-clinical-trial-results-of-gammagard-liquid-administered-subcutaneously/, Retrieved on Jun. 7, 2011, 18 pages.
Notice of Acceptance, dated Jul. 12, 2013, in connection with corresponding Australian Patent Application No. 2009226141, 3 pages.
Notice of Allowance, dated Apr. 17, 2013, in connection with corresponding Korean Patent Application No. 10-2010-7023180 [English Translation], 1 page.
Notice of Allowance, dated Dec. 1, 2017, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English reporting letter and original document in Vietnamese], 4 pages.
Notice of Allowance, dated Nov. 20, 2017 and received on Nov. 26, 2017, in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English reporting letter with Original document in Spanish], 5 pages.
Notice of Allowance, dated Nov. 20, 2017, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English translation and original document in Spanish], 10 pages.
Notice of Allowance, issued Nov. 20, 2017 and received on Nov. 26, 2017, in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English reporting letter with Original document in Spanish], 5 pages.
Notice of Allowance, issued Nov. 20, 2017, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English translation and original document in Spanish], 10 pages.
Notice of Grant, dated Aug. 10, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2012/003282 [Letter Reporting Notice of Allowance and Letters Patent], 3 pages.
Notice of Grant, dated Oct, 9, 2017, issued in connection with Indonesian Patent Application No. 201003534, 2 pages.
Notice of Grant, dated Oct. 9, 2017 and corresponding Indonesian Patent Application received on Nov. 15, 2017, issued in connection with No. 201003534, 2 pages.
Notice of Grant, dated Oct. 9, 2017 and received on Nov. 15, 2017, issued in connection with corresponding Indonesian Patent Application No. 201003534, 2 pages.
Notice of Grant, issued Aug. 10, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2012/003282 [Letter Reporting Notice of Allowance and Letters Patent], 3 pages.
Notice of Opposition, submitted Oct. 24. 2011, in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009, 7 pages.
Notification of Reexamination, dated Mar. 7, 2016, in connection with Chinese Patent Application No. 2009801095059 [English Translation and original document in Chinese], 14 pages.
Notification of Reexamination, issued Mar. 7, 2016, in connection with Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9 [English Translation and original document in Chinese], 14 pages.
Ochs et al., "Safety and efficacy of self-administered subcutaneous immunoglobulin in patients with primary immunodeficiency diseases," J Clin. Immunol. 26:265-273 (2006).
Offcial Action, dated May 9, 2014, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 4 pages [English language translation and original document in Spanish].
Office Action and Search Report, dated Jul. 4, 2012 (received Aug. 10, 2012) in connection with Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9 (3058CN) [English Translation], 8 pages.
Office Action, dated Apr, 2, 2013, in connection with corresponding Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795 [English Translation], 3 pages.
Office Action, dated Aug. 29, 2016, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English translation and original document in Spanish], 7 pages.
Office Action, dated Dec. 22, 2015, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English translation and original document in Japanese], 3 pages.
Office Action, dated Dec. 5, 2018, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English translation and original document in Spanish, D1=Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol (2008), D2=WO 2006/091871, D3=Bookbinder et al., J Controlled Release (2006)], 14 pages.
Office Action, dated Feb. 17, 2011, in connection with related U.S. Appl. No. 12/378,969, 12 pages.
Office Action, dated Feb. 18, 2014 (received Mar. 7, 2014), in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 2009801095059 [English Translation], 6 pages.
Office Action, dated Feb. 7, 2013 (received Mar. 4, 2013), in connection with Corresponding Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 3 pages.
Office Action, dated Jan. 15. 2013 (received Feb. 13, 2013), in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English Translation together with Original in the Spanish language], 16 pages.
Office Action, dated Jul, 18, 2017, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English translation and original document in Vietnamese], 2 pages.
Office Action, dated Jul. 27, 2015, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English translation and original document in Chinese], 2 pages.
Office Action, dated Jul. 27, 2017, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 2009-00633 [English translation and original document in Spanish], 6 pages.
Office Action, dated Jun, 30, 2017, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English translation and original document in Spanish; D1=Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol (2008), D2=WO 2006/091871, D3=Bookbinder et al., J Controlled Release (2006)], 8 pages.
Office Action, dated Jun. 30, 2015, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English translation and original document in Japanese], 6 pages.
Office Action, dated Jun. 4, 2014, in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 12/807,991, 7 pages.
Office Action, dated Mar. 5, 2012 in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 541-2009, 3 pages.
Office Action, dated May 15, 2013 (received Jun. 9, 2013), in connection with corresponding Chinese Patent Application No. 200980109505.9 [English Translation], 6 pages.
Office Action, dated May 23, 2018, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No, P090100943 [English translation and original document in Spanish, D1=Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol (2008), D2=WO 2006/091871, D3=Bookbinder et al., J Controlled Release (2006)], 6 pages.
Office Action, dated Oct, 17, 2014, in connection with corresponding Taiwanese Patent Application No. 098108166, 17 pages [English language translation, original document in Chinese, and cited reference: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Office Action, dated Oct. 15, 2013, in connection with corresponding Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English translation together with Original in the Spanish language] 13 pages.
Office Action, dated Oct. 16, 2014, in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 12/807,991, 7 pages.
Office Action, dated Oct. 8, 2018, in connection with Chinese Patent Application No. 2016102582824 [English Translation and original document in Chinese], 18 pages.
Office Action, dated Sep. 17, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 5 pages [English language translation, original document in Spanish].
Office Action, issued Dec. 22, 2015, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English translation and original document in Japanese], 3 pages.
Office Action, issued Feb. 17, 2011, in connection with related U.S. Appl. No. 12/378,969, 12 pages.
Office Action, issued Jul. 18, 2017, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English translation and original document in Vietnamese], 2 pages.
Office Action, received Feb. 25, 2013, in connection with corresponding Colombian Patent Application No. 10.111.104 [English Translation and Original in the Spanish language], 10 pages.
Official Action, dated Jan, 28, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 6 pages [English language translation, original document in Spanish, and cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Official Action, dated Oct. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 4 pages.
Official Action, issued May 9, 2014, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 4 pages [English language translation and original document in Spanish].
Official Action, received Oct. 4, 2013, in connection with corresponding Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478, 4 pages.
Ohno, N., Models of Kawasaki disease, Drug Discovery Today: Disease Models 3(1):83-89 (2006).
Oncley, M. and M. Melin, "The separation of the antibodies, isoagglutinins, prothrombin, plasminogen and betal-lipoprotein into subfractions of human plasma," J Am. Chem. Soc. 71:541-550 (1949).
Ornitz et al., "Elastase I promoter directs expression of human growth hormone and SV40 T antigen genes to pancreatic acinar cells in transgenic mice," Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol. 50:399-409 (1986).
Osgood et al., "Pegylated recombinant human hyaluronidase PH20 (PEGPH20) enhances cetuximab efficacy in BxPC-3/HAS3 human pancreatic cancer xenografts," AACR Annual Meeting Apr. 5-9, 2014. San Diego, CA Abstract #3646, Available on-line Mar. 2014 [Retrieved from the internet Mar. 18, 2014], 1 page.
Oyaizu et al, "(NZW x BXSB)F1 mouse. A new animal model of idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura," J Exp Med 2017-2022 (1988).
Oyaizu et al., "(NZW x BXSB)F1 mouse. A new animal model of idiopathic thrombocytopeni purpura," J Exp Med 2017-2022 (1988).
Pearlman, R. and T. Nguyen, "Analysis of protein drugs," in Peptide and Protein Drug Delivery Ed, Lee, V., Peptide and Protein Drug Delivery, Marcel Dekker:New York, N.Y., pp. 247-301 (1991).
Pearson, W. and D. Lipman "Improved tools for biological sequence comparison," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, USA 851:2444-2448 (1988).
Pham et al., "Large-scale transient transfection of serum-free suspension-growing HEK293 EBNA1 cells: peptone additives improve cell growth and transfection efficiency," Biotechnology and Bioengineering 84:332-342 (2003).
Pinkert et al., "An albumin enhancer located 10 kb upstream functions along with its promoter to direct efficient, liver-specific expression in transgenic mice," Genes and Devel. 1:268-276 (1987).
Pinkstaff et al., "Evaluation of the Companbllity and Pharmacokinetics of Co-formulated Biologics with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Jun. 2006, San Antonio, TX, 2 pages.
Pinkstaff et al., "Evaluation of the Compatibility and Pharmacokinetics of Co-formulated Biologics with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Jun. 2006, San Antonio, TX [3 pages].
Pinkstaff et al., "Evaluation of the Compatibility and Pharmacokinetics of Co-formulated Biologics with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Jun. 2006, San Antonio, TX, 2 pages.
Pinkstaff et al., "Evaluation ofthe compatibility and pharmacokinetics of co-formulated biologics with recombinant human hyaluronidase: Dose Response," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Conference, Nov. 2006, Poster, 1 page.
Pinkstaff et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for Drug and Fluid Dispersion," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, Nov. 2006, Boston, MA [3 pages].
Pinkstaff et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for Drug and Fluid Dispersion," American Association of Pharmaceutical Scientists Annual Meeting, Nov. 2006, Boston, MA, 2 pages.
Pinkstaff et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for Use with Therapeutic Antibodies," Controlled Release Society Conference, Vienna, Austria, 2006 [2 pages].
Pinkstaff et al., "Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase for Use with Therapeutic Antibodies," Controlled Release Society Conference, Vienna, Austria, 2006, 1 page.
Pirrello et al., "Initial experiences with subcutaneous recombinant human hyaluronidase," J Palliat Med. 10(4):861-864 (2007).
Planitzer et al., "Neutralization of different echovims serotypes by individual lots of intravenous immunoglobulin," J Med Virol 83(2):305-310 (2011).
Planitzer et al., "Neutralization of different echovirus serotypes by individual lots of intravenous immunoglobulin," J Med Virol 83(2):305-310 (2011).
Poelsler et al., "A new liquid intravenous inmmunoglobulin with three dedicated virus reduction steps: virus and prion reduction capacity," Vox Sang 94(3):184-192 (2007).
Pollack, A., "Small Trial Hints Drug Can Slow Alzheimer's," New York Times. Published Jul. 17, 2012 [online][Accessed Dec. 17, 2012] Retrieved from the Internet: URL: www.nytimes.com/2012/07/18/business/study-shows-drug-may-help-alzheimers-patients.html?_r=0 [3 pages].
Polson et al., "The Fractionation of protein mixtures by linear polymers of high molecular weight," Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 82:463-475 (1964).
Pre-appeal Examination Report, dated Jan. 7, 2015, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 3 pages [English language translation and cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):583 (2008)].
Pre-appeal Examination Report, issued Jan. 7, 2015, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-500795, 3 pages [English language translation and cited reference D1: Melamed et al., J Allergy and Clin Immunol 121(2, suppl.):S83 (2008)].
Readhead et al., "Expression of a myelin basic protein gene in transgenic shiverer mice: correction of the dysmyelinating phenotype," Cell 48:703-712 (1987).
Reipeit et al., "Fc function of a new intravenous immunoglobulin product:IGIV 10% triple virally inactivated solution," Vox Sang 91(3)256-263 (2006).
Reipert et al., "Fc function of a new intravenous immunoglobulin product:IGIV 10% triple virally inactivated solution," Vox Sang 91(3)256-263 (2006).
Relkin et al., "18-Month study of intravenous immunoglobulin for treatment of mild Alzheimer disease," Neurobiol Aging (2008). [9 pages].
Response dated Aug. 17, 2011 to Office Action, dated Feb. 17,2011, in connection with related U.S. Appl. No. 12/378,969, 16 pages.
Response of Aug. 17, 2011 to Office Action, issued Feb. 17, 2011, in connection with related U.S. Appl. No. 12/378,969, 16 pages.
Response to Examination Report, dated Nov. 22, 2012, in connection with corresponding European Patent Application No. 09721669.1 (3058EP), 26 pages.
Response to Examination Report, dated Nov. 22, 2012, in connection with corresponding European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 26 pages.
Response to Examiner's Report, dated Oct. 5, 2011, in connection with corresponding Australian Patent Application No. 2009226141, 29 pages.
Response to Examiner's Report, issued Oct. 5, 2011, in connection with corresponding Australian Patent Application No. 2009226141, 29 pages.
Response to Notice of Opposition, submitted Oct. 24, 2011, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009, 27 pages.
Response to Search Report and Written Opinion, dated Dec. 2, 2011, in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8 (30588G), 9 pages.
Response to Search Report and Written Opinion, dated Dec. 2, 2011, in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8 (3058SG), 9 pages.
Response to Written Opinion, dated Aug. 31, 2009, in connection with International Application No. PCT/US2009/001670 (3058PC), 32 pages.
Response to Written Opinion, dated Aug. 31. 2009. in connection with International Application No. PCT/U82009/001670 (3058PC), 32 pages.
Response to Written Opinion, dated Oct. 13, 2011, in connection with related International Patent Application No. PCT/US2010/002545, 24 pages.
Response, dated Aug. 7, 2013, to Office Action, issued Feb. 7, 2013, in connection with corresponding Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 27 pages.
Response, dated Aug. 7,2013, to Office Action, dated Feb. 7, 2013, in connection with corresponding Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 27 pages.
Response, dated Jan. 12, 2012, to Written Opinion, dated Oct. 13, 2011, in connection with International Patent Application No. PCT/US2010/002545, 24 pages.
Response, dated Jun. 25, 2013, to Written Opinion, dated Jan. 25, 2013, in connection with corresponding Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8, 10 pages.
Response, filed Aug. 9, 2018, to Office Action, dated May 23, 2018, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as-filed in Spanish], 72 pages.
Response, filed Aug. 9, 2018, to Office Action, issued May 23, 2018, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as-filed in Spanish], 72 pages.
Response, filed Dec. 29, 2015, to Examination Report, dated Oct. 21, 2015, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 8 pages.
Response, filed Dec. 29, 2015, to Examination Report, issued Oct. 21, 2015, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 8 pages.
Response, filed Feb. 10, 2016, to Examiner's Report, dated Aug. 10, 2015, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 57 pages.
Response, filed Feb. 10, 2016, to Examiner's Report, issued Aug. 10, 2015, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 57 pages.
Response, filed Feb. 2, 2016, to Office Action, dated Sep. 17, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478 [English language instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 31 pages.
Response, filed Feb. 2, 2016, to Office Action, issued Sep. 17, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478 [English language instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 31 pages.
Response, filed Jan. 16, 2015, to Office Action, dated Oct. 16, 2014, in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 12,807,991, 22 pages.
Response, filed Jan. 21, 2016, to Office Action, dated Dec. 22, 2105, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English language instructions and document as filed in Japanese], 34 pages.
Response, filed Jan. 21, 2016, to Office Action, issued Dec. 22, 2105, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English language instructions and document as filed in Japanese], 34 pages.
Response, filed Jan. 22, 2015, to Examiner's Report, dated Jul. 22, 2014, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708, 27 pages.
Response, filed Jun. 6, 2016, to Written Opinion, dated Jan. 6, 2016, in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q, 46 pages.
Response, filed Mar. 21, 2016, to Examination Report, dated Apr. 30, 2015, in connection with Indian Patent Application No. 7321/DELNP/2010, 47 pages.
Response, filed Mar. 21, 2016, to Examination Report, issued Apr. 30, 2015, in connection with Indian Patent Application No. 7321/DELNP/2010, 47 pages.
Response, filed Mar. 5, 2015, to Examination Report, dated Sep. 10, 2014, in connection with European Patent Application No. 09721669.1, 18 pages.
Response, filed May 29, 2015, to Official Action, dated Jan. 28, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478 [English language instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 35 pages.
Response, filed May 29, 2015, to Official Action, issued Jan. 28, 2015, in connection with Mexican Patent Application No. MX/a/2010/009478 [English language instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 35 pages.
Response, filed Nov. 24, 2015, to Office Action, dated Jul. 27, 2015, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English instructions and document as filed in Vietnamese], 6 pages.
Response, filed Nov. 24, 2015, to Office Action, issued Jul. 27, 2015, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English instructions and document as filed in Vietnamese], 6 pages.
Response, filed Nov. 30, 2016, to Office Action, dated Aug. 29, 2016, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 25 pages.
Response, filed Nov. 30, 2016, to Office Action, issued Aug. 29, 2016, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 25 pages.
Response, filed Oct. 4, 2017, to Office Action, dated Jun. 30, 2017, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as-filed in Spanish], 68 pages.
Response, filed Oct. 4, 2017, to Office Action, issued Jun. 30, 2017, in connection with Argentinian Patent Application No. P090100943 [English instructions and document as-filed in Spanish], 68 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 18, 2017, to Office Action, dated Jul. 18, 2017, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English instructions and document as filed in Vietnamese], 4 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 18, 2017, to Office Action, issued Jul. 18, 2017, in connection with Vietnamese Patent Application No. 1-2010-02743 [English instructions and document as filed in Vietnamese], 4 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 27, 2017, to Examiner's Report, dated Mar, 31, 2017, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708 [Response as-filed and cited references], 43 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 27, 2017, to Examiner's Report, issued Mar. 31, 2017, in connection with Canadian Patent Application No. 2,714,708 [Response as-filed and cited references], 43 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 28, 2015, to Office Action, dated Jun. 30, 2105, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English language instructions and document as filed in Japanese], 18 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 28, 2015, to Office Action, issued Jun. 30, 2105, in connection with Japanese Patent Application No. 2014-192938 [English language instructions and document as filed in Japanese], 18 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 4, 2014, to Office Action, dated Jun. 4, 2014, in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 12/807,991, 23 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 8, 2017, to Office Action, dated Jul. 27, 2017, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 35 pages.
Response, filed Sep. 8, 2017, to Office Action, issued Jul. 27, 2017, in connection with Chilean Patent Application No. 633-2009 [English instructions and document as filed in Spanish], 35 pages.
Roord et al., "Home treatment in patients with antibody deficiency by slow subcutaneous infusion of gammaglobulin," Lancet 1(8273):689-690 (1982).
Rousell et al., "Prospective Study on the Hepatitis Safety of Intravenous Immunoglobulin, pH 4.25," Vox Sang. 60(2):65-68 (1991).
Schiff et al., "Alterations in the half-life and clearance of IgG during therapy with intravenous gamma-globulin in 16 patients with severe primary humoral immunodefciency," J. Clin. Immunol. 6:256-264 (1986).
Schiff et al., "Alterations in the half-life and clearance of IgG during therapy with intravenous gamma-globulin in 16 patients with severe primary humoral immunodeficiency," J. Clin. Immunol. 6:256-264 (1986).
Schiff et al., "Multicenter Crossover Comparison of the Safety and Efficacy of Intraglobin-F with Gamimune-N, Sandoglobulin and Gammagard in Patients with Primary Immunodeficiency Diseases" Journal of Clinical Immunology 17(1):21-28 (1997).
Schiff et al., "Tolerability of immunoglobulin subcutaneous 10% administered SC following administration of recombinant human hyaluronidase in subjects with PID," XIVth Meeting of the European Society for Immunodeficienies (ESID) Istanbul, Turkey Oct. 6-10, 2010, Poster, 1 page.
Schiff et al., "Use of a new chemically modified intravenous IgG preparation in severe primary humoral immunodeficiency: clinical efficacy and attempts to individualize dosage" Clin Immunol Immunopathol 31(1):13-23 (1984).
Schiff, R, "Individualizing the dose of intravenous immune serum globulin for therapy of patients with primary humoral immunodeficiency" Vox Sang 49(1):15-24 (1985).
Schiff, R., "Half-life and clearance of pH 6.8 and pH 4.25 immunoglobulin G intravenous preparations in patients with primary disorders of humoral immunity" Rev Infect Dis, Jul.-Aug.;8(4)S449- 56 (1986).
Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., Atlas of Protein Science and Structure, National Biomedical Research Foundation, pp. 353-358 (1979).
Search and Examination Report, dated May 7, 2013, in connection with related Singapore Patent Application No. 201202729-8, 11 pages.
Search Report and Written Opinion, dated Dec. 2, 2011 (received Jan. 19, 2012), in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8, 15 pages.
Search Report and Written Opinion, issued Dec. 2, 2011 (received Jan. 19, 2012), in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8, 15 pages.
Search Report, dated Nov. 6, 2015, and Written Opinion, dated Dec. 11, 2015, issued in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q, 10 pages.
Sequence alignments from U.S. Appl. No. 10/795,095 search of SEQ ID No. 1 in the Issued Patents database, performed on Sep. 25, 2007.
Shani, M., "Tissue-specific expression of rat myosin light-chain," Nature 314:283-286 (1985).
Shapiro et al., "Intravenous gamma globulin inhibits the production of matrix metalloproteinase-9 in macrophages," Cancer 95:2032-2037 (2002).
Shekhar et al., "The matrix reloaded: halozyme's recombinant enzyme helps injected drugs spread faster," Chem. Biol. 14:603-604 (2007).
Shimizu, Y. and H. Yoshikura, "Multicycle infection of hepatitis C virus in cell culture and inhibition by alpha and beta interferons," J. Virol. 68:8406-8408 (1994).
Skoda-Smith et al., "Subcutaneous immunoglobulin replacement therapy in the treatment of patients with primary immunodeficiency disease," Ther Clin Risk Manag 6:1-10 (2010).
Skoda-Smith et al., "Subcutaneous inununoglobulin replacement therapy in the treatment of patients with primary immunodeficiency disease," Ther Clin Risk Manag 6:1-10 (2010).
Smith, T. and M. Waterman, "Comparison of biosequences," Advances in Applied Mathematics 2:482-489 (1981).
Solomon, B., "Intravenous immunoglobulin and Alzheimer's disease immunotherapy," Curr. Opin. Mol. Ther. 9:79-85 (2007).
Sommer et al., "Paraneoplastic stiff-person syndrome: passive transfer to rats by means of IgG antibodies to amphiphysin," Lancet 365:1406-1411 (2005).
Stein et al., "Pharmacokinetic (PK) of human immuneglobulin 10% (IgG) administered intraveneously (IGIV), subcutaneously (IGSC) or facilitated subcutaneously with recombinant human hyaluronidase hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a subset of patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI)," Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunolgy Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 2 pages.
Stein et al., "Pharmacokinetics (PK) of Human Immunoglobulin 10% (IgG) Administered Intravenously (IGIV), Subcutaneously (IGSC) or Facilitated Subcutaneously with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a Subset of Patients with Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PIDD)," J Allergy Clinl Immunol. 129(2):AB14. Presented Mar. 3, 2012 at AAAAI Annual Meeting, Orlando, FL. Abstract #55.
Stein et al., "Pharmacokinetics (PK) of Human Immunoglobulin 10% (IgG) Administered Intravenously (IGIV), Subcutaneously (IGSC) or Facilitated Subcutaneously with Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a Subset of Patients with Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PIDD)," Presented Mar. 3, 2012 at AAAAI Annual Meeting, Orlando, FL, Poster #55, 1 page.
Stein et al., "Tolerability and efficacy of facilitated-subcutaneous infusion of immuneglobulin (HUMAN) 10% and recombinant human hyaluronidase (IGHy) in patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI)," Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunolgy Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 1 page.
Stein et al., "Tolerability and efficacy of recombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPH20)—facilitated subcutaneous infusion of immune globulin (Human), 10% (IGHy) in patients with Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PI)," American College of Allergy, Asthma, & Immunology Meeting, Boston, MA, Nov. 5, 2011, Poster, 1 page.
Steinkuhler et al., "Product inhibition of the hepatitis C virus NS3 protease," Biochem. 37:8899-8905 (1998).
Steinlcuhler et al., "Product inhibition of the hepatitis C virus NS3 protease," Biochem. 37:8899-8905 (1998).
Stem, R., "Devising a pathway for hyaluronan catabolism: are we there yet?" Glycobiology 13:105R-115R (2003).
Stern, R., "Devising a pathway for hyaluronan catabolism are we there yet?" Glycobiology 13:105R-115R (2003).
Stiehm et al. "Slow subcutaneous human intravenous immunoglobulin in the treatment of antibody immunodeficiency: Use of an old method with a new product," J Allergy Clin Immunol 101:848-849 (1998).
Strongwater et al., "A murine model of polymyositis induced by coxsackievirus B1 (Tucson strain)," Arthritis Rheum. 27:433-442 (1984).
Sudo et al., "Establishment of an in vitro assay system for screening hepatitis C virus protease inhibitors using high performance liquid chromatography," Antiviral Res. 32:9-18 (1996).
Supersaxo et al,"Effect of molecular weight on the lymphatic absorption of water-soluble compounds following subcutaneous administration," Pharm. Res, 7:167-169 (1990).
Swift et al., "Tissue-specific expression of the rat pancreatic elastase I gene in transgenic mice," Cell 38:639-646 (1984).
Takahashi et al., "A fluorimetric Morgan-Elson assay method for hyaluronidase activity," Anal. Biochem. 322:257-263 (2003).
Takeshita et al., "An enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay for detecting proteolytic activity of hepatitis C virus proteinase," Anal. Biochem. 247:242-246 (1997).
Taliani et al., "A continous assay of hepatitis C Virus protease based on resonance energy transfer depsipeptide substrates," Anal. Biochem. 240:60-67 (1996).
Teschner et al. A new liquid, intravenous immunglobulin product (IGIV 10%) highly purified by a state-of-the-art process. Vox Sanguinis. 92(1): 42-55, Jan. 2007. *
Teschner et al., "Preclinical Characterization of a New Liquid "Immune Globulin Intravenous (Human), 10% Triple Virally Reduced Solution"(IGIV, 10%TVR)," The Journal of Allergy and Clinical Immunology. 113(2):S45 (2004). Abstract 79, 1 page.
Thomas et al., "Assessing the Role of Human Recombinant Hyaluronidase in Gravity-Driven Subcutaneous Hydration: The INFUSE-LR Study," J Palliat Med. 10:1312-1320 (2007).
Transcript, "Halozyme Therapeutics's CEO hosts analyst/investor day conference call (Transcript)," Published on Oct. 2, 2012 [online] [retrieved on Oct. 25, 2012] Retrieved from:<URL:seekingalpha.com/article/901141-halozy me-therapeutics-s-ceo-hosts-analyst-investor-day-conference-call-transcript?part=single, 49 pages.
Transcript, "Halozyme Therapeutics's CEO hosts analyst/investor day conference call (Transcript)," Published on Oct. 2, 2012 [online][retrieved on Oct. 25, 2012] Retrieved from: <URL: seekingalpha.com/article/901141-halozyme-therapeutlcs-s-ceo-hosts-analyst-investor-day-conference-call-transcript?part=single, 49 pages.
Trebst et al., "Expression of chemokine receptors on peripheral blood mononuclear cells of patients with immune-mediated neuropathies treated with intravenous immunoglobins," Eur J Neurology 13:1359-1363 (2006).
van Schaik et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulin for chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyradicloneuropathy: a systematic review," Lancet Neurol. 1:497-498 (2002).
Varga et al., "Efficacy and safety of IGIV, 10% TVR solution, a new intravenous immunoglobulin, in adult subjects with chronic idiopathic thrombocytopenia purpura" Transf Med Hemother 33:509-514 (2006).
Varga et al., "Efficacy and safety of IGIV, 10% TVR solution, a new intravenous immunoglobulin, in adult subjects with chronic idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura" Transf Med Hemother 33:509-514 (2006).
Varnell et al., "Effect of Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase on Intraocular Pressure in Rabbits Following Injection of Viscoelastic Substances," Association for Research in Vision and Ophthalmology Annual Meeting, 2005 Fort Lauderdale, FL, 2 pages.
Wagner et al., "Nucleotide sequence of the thymidine kinase gene of herpes simplex virus type 1," Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1441-1445 (1981).
Walter et al., "High-dose immunoglobulin therapy in sporadic inclusion body myositis: a double-blind, placebo-controlled study," J Neurol 247(1):22-28 (2000).
Wang, Y. and M. Hanson, "Parenteral formulations of proteins and peptides: Stability and stabalizers," J. of Parenteral Science & Technology 42(supp):S4-S26 (1988).
Wang, Y. and M. Hanson, "Parenteral formulations of proteins and peptides: Stability and stabilizers," J. of Parenteral Science & Technology 42(supp):S4-S26 (1988).
Wasserman et al., "Pharmacokinetics of recombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPH20)—facilitated subcutaneous infusion of immune globulin (Human), 10% (IGHy) in patients with Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PI)," American College of Allergy, Asthma, & Immunology Meeting, Boston, MA, Nov. 5, 2011, Poster, 1 page.
Wasserman et al., "Tolerability and Efficacy of Facilitated- Subcutaneous Infusion of Immune Globulin (Human), 10% and Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a Subset of Study Patients With Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PIDD)" Presented Mar. 3, 2012 at the American College of Allergy, Asthma, & Immunology Meeting, Orlando, FL, Poster #56, 1 page.
Wasserman et al., "Tolerability and Efficacy of Facilitated-Subcutaneous Infusion of Immune Globulin (Human), 10% and Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a Subset of Study Patients With Primary Immunodeficiency Disease (PIDD)," J Allergy Clinl Immunol. 129(2):AB15. Presented Mar. 3, 2012 at the American College of Allergy, Asthma, & Immunology Meeting, Orlando, FL. Abstract #56, 1 page.
Wasserman et al., "Tolerability and efficacy of facilitated—subcutaneous infusion of immuneglobulin (HUMAN) 10% and recombinant human hyaluronidase (IGHy) in patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI)," Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunolgy Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 2 pages.
Wasserman et al., "Tolerability and efficacy of facilitated-subcutaneous infusion of immuneglobulin (HUMAN) 10% and recombinant human hyaluronidase (IGHy) in patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI)," Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical lmmunolgy Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 2 pages.
Wasserman et al., Pharmacokinetic (PK) of human immuneglobulin 10% (IgG) administered intraveneously (IGIV), subcutaneously (IGSC) or facilitated subcutaneously with recombinant human hyaluronidase hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a subset of patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI) Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunology Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease North American Conference May 17-20, 2012, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 1 page.
Wasserman et al., Pharrnacokinetic (PK) of human immuneglobulin 10% (IgG) administered intraveneously (IGIV), subcutaneously (IGSC) or facilitated subcutaneously with recombinant human hyaluronidase hyaluronidase (IGHy) in a subset of patients with primary immunodeficiency (PI) Presented May 18, 2012 at the Clinical Immunology Society Annual Meeting: Primary Immune Deficiency Disease Nonh American Conference May 17-20, 2012, Chicago, IL. Abstract, 1 page.
Wasserman et al.. "Efficacy, Safety, and Pharmacokinetics of a 10% Liquid Immune Globulin Preparation (Gammagard Liquid, 10%) Administered Subcutaneously in Subjects with Primary Immunodeficiency Disease," J Clin Immunol., Epub ahead of print, 9 pages (2011).
Weber et al., "Intravenous immunoglobulin gammagard liquid contains anti-Rage IgG and sLRP," Presented at the 19th Meeting of the European Neurological Society, Jun. 23, 2009. Abstract, 1 page.
Wei et al., "Structure function analysis of the human hyaluronidase enzymes," American Society for Matrix Biology Biennial Meeting, San Diego, CA, Dec. 5, 2008, B4. [2 pages].
Weksler et al., "Drug-Ranging Study of Intravenous Immunoglobulin in Patients with Alzheimer's Disease," Abstracts: Pharmacological Treatments Suppl 1:S94-S95 (2005).
Welch, M. and E. Stiehm, "Slow subcutaneous immunoglobulin therapy in a patient with reactions to intramuscular immunoglobulin," J Clin Immunol 3(3):285-286 (1983).
Williams, R., "The effects of continuous local injection of hyaluronidase on skin and subcutaneous tissue in rats." Anat. Rec. 122:349-361 (1955).
Wilson, M., "Enhanze Technology—An Enzymatic Drug Delivery System (DDS)," Japanese Export Trade Organization, 2005, Santa Clara, CA, 22 pages.
Written Opinion, dated Jan. 25, 2013 (received Mar. 7, 2013), in connection with corresponding Singapore Patent Application No. 201005998-8, 8 pages.
Written Opinion, dated Jul. 1, 2016, in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q, 7 pages.
Written Opinion, issued Jul. 1, 2016, in connection with Singapore Patent Application No. 10201503296Q, 7 pages.
Yamamoto et al., "Identification of a functional promoter in the long terminal repeat of Rous sarcoma virus," Cell 22:787-797 (1980).
Yang, T., "An alternative approach for delivering high dose biologics subcutaneously," presented at PEP Talk, presented Jan. 11, 2011, Presentation, 28 pages.
Yasuda et al., "Effect of hyaluronidase on experimental cerebral infarct size and mortality," Lab Invest 46(4):400-404 (1982).
Yocum et al., "Assessment and Implication of the Allergic Sensitivity to a Single Dose of Recombinant Human Hyaluronidase Injection: A Double-Blind Placebo-Controlled Clinical Trial," J Infus Nursing. 30:293-299 (2007).
Yocum et al., "Phase IV study of the PK, safety and tolerability of HUMIRA administered with escalating doses ofrecombinant human hyaluronidase (rHuPH20); an Enhanze Technology Study with a Large Protein Molecule Therapeutic" Controlled Release Society Conference. Long Beach, CA, Jul. 9, 2007 [20 pages].
Zalipsky, S and C Lee, "Poly(ethy lene glycol) Chemistry: Biotechnical and Biomedical Applications," J. Hams, ed., Plenum: NY, Chapter 21, pp. 341-370 (1992).
Zalipsky, S and C Lee, "Poly(ethyl ene glycol) Chemistry: Biotechnical and Biomedical Applications," J. Hams, ed., Plenmn: NY, Chapter 21, pp. 341-370 (1992).
ZLB Behring LLC (Immune Globulin Subcutaneous (Human), Vivaglobin®, pp. 1-14, Jan. 2006). *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2015028050A (en) 2015-02-12
TW201408320A (en) 2014-03-01
EP2271363A1 (en) 2011-01-12
DK2271363T3 (en) 2017-08-21
EP2271363B1 (en) 2017-05-03
HRP20171068T1 (en) 2017-12-01
TWI532498B (en) 2016-05-11
ES2633295T3 (en) 2017-09-20
US10301376B2 (en) 2019-05-28
WO2009117085A1 (en) 2009-09-24
AR114957A2 (en) 2020-11-11
SI2271363T1 (en) 2017-08-31
TWI489994B (en) 2015-07-01
JP5898286B2 (en) 2016-04-06
AU2009226141A1 (en) 2009-09-24
PL2271363T3 (en) 2017-10-31
BRPI0909499A2 (en) 2015-12-01
HUE033055T2 (en) 2017-11-28
CA2714708C (en) 2018-07-31
US20100074885A1 (en) 2010-03-25
CN101977627A (en) 2011-02-16
CN105816876A (en) 2016-08-03
TW200950803A (en) 2009-12-16
KR20100134671A (en) 2010-12-23
CA2714708A1 (en) 2009-09-24
PT2271363T (en) 2017-08-09
AR074968A1 (en) 2011-03-02
KR101275949B1 (en) 2013-06-18
CO6331301A2 (en) 2011-10-20
MX2010009478A (en) 2010-12-20
JP2011515395A (en) 2011-05-19
SG10201503296QA (en) 2015-06-29
AU2009226141B2 (en) 2013-07-25
MX339658B (en) 2016-06-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USRE49967E1 (en) Combinations and methods for subcutaneous administration of immune globulin and hyaluronidase
US9084743B2 (en) Stable co-formulation of hyaluronidase and immunoglobulin, and methods of use thereof
CA2746181C (en) Extended soluble ph20 polypeptides and uses thereof
AU2013202000B2 (en) Extended soluble PH20 polypeptides and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY